Home

ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software User Manual (for FloBoss 107)

Contents

1. cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 7 9 28 DIN TY EE 7 22 Direct Connect 3 15 6 1 DIECO EE 5 2 DISCONNECT esan a a A 6 2 HOBOS e 3 17 KR ir 3 12 BF a Geese eae een eee re ee nen ec ae ee eee nce 3 7 Display Admnmtstrator 5 16 Bel e H E 10 2 Displays CUS CO deen ee 5 18 Display Administrator aanneaannnennaanneennnn 5 16 From FIC 2c asiinnonnrn oa 5 41 ODICCIS EE 5 39 TLP Display Optons cccccceececeeeeeeeeees 10 1 Distributing Licenses FBTO aian ia etd cic ee oe ae ee 9 6 DO Discrete Outputs cc eecceeeeeeeeeeees 7 26 Advanced Tall cuit ie ested eed 7 30 Alarms TaD a 7 31 7 32 Genetal Ta Dran a 7 27 DOUT TV e 7 29 DOW AIO AG EE 9 21 CORMNGQUP ANON EE 4 6 FST to the FIOBOSS A Sacereibeceatade eee he B 8 Download amp Grat 9 21 Download User Program File 00000e 9 21 Biel Et CTT NEE 7 49 8 11 Ries 8 13 RE 5 41 Duplicating ee Le EE 4 2 E Editing LIS DIAY EE 5 41 EFM History Points ccccseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 1 14 EFM MOODUS feia aa 7 94 EFM EE 5 2 Colect Dala a a Ocal cides 6 2 Convert EFM Fille sirnana 9 16 CNG AUING EE 5 2 WIGWING E 5 3 Elevato WEE 8 10 EE 1 10 Enabling Alarming nonan T 9 7 18 7 23 7 30 7 37 Meter RUNS aaa Geistieintecaue dea emaeaae 6 7 PID LOOD Saa easecie tere eee an 6 7 RBX Alarming 3 13 7 15 7 20 7 26 7 33 7 40 7 56 8 18 4 Index El nl Le E 7 63 Scannng ososan T 9 7 18 7 23 7 29 7 37 SOC
2. ACancel Figure 3 10 Device Security Use this dialog box to edit the security on an existing operator ID To add an operator ID click on an empty cell in the table The Device Security dialog box displays Complete the dialog box as described below To delete an operator ID click a cell in that line When the Device Security dialog box appears click Remove Answer Yes to the confirmation dialog box that displays ROCLINK 800 removes the operator ID from the table 3 22 Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 Field Operator ID Password Confirm Password Access Levels Security One ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets the three alphanumeric characters for the operator ID which is typically the initials of the person who operates the device through that communications port The operator ID is case sensitive Each operator ID must be unique Sets the four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 for the password More than one operator ID can have the same password Validates the password you entered in the previous field Sets the access permitted to this operator ID Click v to display all options 0 is the lowest access level and allows access to the fewest number of screens 5 is the highest access level and permits access to all screens Each access level permits access to screens at that level and any inherited from lower access levels For example the IDs with access level 3 ca
3. 7 8 1 MVS Module General Tab The MVS display shows the General tab which shows the current settings including any alarms and integrity alerts 1 42 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 General UC Points Installed Module MVSModule Description MVS Interface Part Number wem 0 Serial Number w48082X0032 406520014 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Actual Module MVS Module Revision Rev 101 Build Date Feb 01 2007 09 00 Boot Revision Rev100 0 4 Boot Build Date Dec 11 2006 16 17 Integrity Uninstall Field Installed Module Description Part Number Serial Number Actual Module Revision Build Date Boot Revision Boot Build Date Integrity Auto Scan Update Figure 7 32 MVS Interface General tab Description This read only field shows the type of module the FB107 uses for point configuration It does not require that a module be physically installed to display The FloBoss 107 remembers the installed module type until you uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module This read only field shows a description of the hardware currently installed in the FB107 This read only field shows the part number of the hardware currently installed in the FB107 This read only field shows the serial number of the hardware currently installed in the FB107 This read only field shows the module is physically installed in the backplane This field i
4. Accumulated flow is stored as zero for historical data over that time period Accumulated Energy is stored as zero for historical data over that time period Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Averaging Technique Sets an averaging technique for the meter run Valid values are Flow Dependant Linear Flow Dependant Formulaic Flow Weighted Linear Flow Weighted Formulaic This display only field shows any alarm currently Active Flow Alarms This is the simplest and most commonly used method This method discards samples for periods when there is no measurable flow and performs a straightforward linear average of the remaining samples to compute the minute and hour values The value specified in the Low Flow Cutoff of the Meter setup determines the values When no flow occurs all values are sampled This method discards samples for periods when there is no flow However in calculating the average this method typically takes the square root of each sample before averaging the samples together and then squares the result This formulaic method produces a slightly lower value than the linear method This method does not discard any samples instead it weights each sample by multiplying it by a flow value square root of the differential pressure measured during the sample period Next a linear average is calculated by dividing the sum of th
5. E Een Ui IER High Scale Low Scale cm CH w Cancel 2 Complete the following fields to define the chart display values Field Data Source Description values are Standard History Sets a standard history point to chart Click to open a Select History Point Sets the source for data included in the chart Valid dialog box you can use to select a valid standard history point Sets an extended history point to chart Click to open a Select History Point Extended History dialog box you can use to select a valid extended history point to open a Select TLP dialog box you can use to select a valid TLP Text Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for the a Gata OI Units This read only field shows the engineering units for a the associated parameter o Scaling Indicates whether the system applies automatic or manual scaling factors to the charted results Valid values are Auto apply automatic values or Manual apply defined values Sets the high scaling value for the data point Note This field is available only if you select Manual as a scaling option Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Low Scale Sets the low scaling value for the data point Note This field is available only if you select Manual as a scaling option 3 Click Update if you make any changes to this screen 4 Click OK to close the LCD Use
6. 0 ZlUpdate Y OK A Cancel Dh Figure 7 15 AO General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Analog Outputs Selects the analog output to be configured The outputs are listed by both Point Number and Tag Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Tag Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Point Number This read only field identifies the rack location for this point Value Sets a value to override the output Note When scanning is disabled enter a value to override the output If scanning is enabled this field displays the last analog scan in engineering units Units Sets the engineering units for the I O such IN H20 PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps volts etc Low Reading EU Sets the engineering unit EU for the low reading to zero percent output low end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU value is converted to a corresponding analog signal TTT High Reading EU Sets the engineering unit EU for the high reading to 100 percent output or high end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU value is converted to a corresponding analog signal OM Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field De
7. Discrete Input Discrete Inputs Dages Tag Di slots General Advanced Alarms Point Humber CI Scan Period 0 1 DIN Type Status Standard Latched C On es Of Scanning Alarming fe Enabled i Disabled t Enabled ie Disabled Active Alarms jo Blupdete Y OK X Cancel e Appl Figure 7 18 DI General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Discrete Inputs selects the discrete input to be configured The inputs are listed by both Point Number and Tag Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Tag Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Point Number This read only field identifies the rack location for this point Scan Period Sets in seconds how frequently the system scans DIN Type Sets how the Di works Valid values are EE Latched Maintains the input status For example in an active transition from off to on the DI remains in the on state until you clear the Status parameter either manually or through the software Status Sets the state of the discrete input Valid values are On indicates that a contact is closed or input is on or Off indicates that a contact is open or input is off 1 22 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Scanning Sets the sca
8. Graphical Interface Splash Screen Menu bar and menus Toolbar Function screens Dialog boxes Help system including the Status bar and message boxes Device Directory or Configuration Tree menu ROCLINK 800 employs a dynamic graphical user interface GUI with a standard Windows menu structure After you log on to ROCLINK 800 available functions display in a menu bar with drop down menus A Status Line at the bottom left of the display contains pertinent information about the highlighted item such as a menu option or a parameter Buttons display dialog boxes for further configuration details or perform a desired action such as the Update button To activate the button Click the button with a left click of the mouse When a button is active press Enter or a function key Dialog boxes are areas that pop up inside the current screen allowing you to make further selections or enter values Dialog boxes can also provide messages or more detailed information The menu structure lists choices from which you can select the desired function Once you select a function the screen or dialog box for that function displays This screen or dialog box provides the requested information and lets you enter the applicable configuration data Table 1 1 Menu Listing for ROCLINK 800 Menu Menu Options File New Open Download Close Save Configuration Print 8 Configuration Print Print Setup List of recent fi
9. to display a Select TLP dialog box you use to assign the input The system assumes the units for the input to be MCF per day 1000 ft day or 1000 cubic meters per day kM day lf Manual appears use the Values field to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value based on non adjusted pulses from the turbine meter Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Note This field displays only for a turbine meter Static Pressure Sets the input that senses static pressure Click to display a Select TLP dialog box you use to assign the input The system assumes the units for the input to be PSIG PSIA or kPaG kPaA lf Manual appears use the Values field to enter a engineering units value for the static pressure input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Temperature Sets the input that senses the temperature of the flowing gas Click to display a Select TLP dialog box you use to assign the input The system assumes units for the input to be degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius lf Manual appears use the Values field to enter an engineering units value for the temperature input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Type of Primary Sets the element type associated with the orifice Element meter Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Pipe
10. Analog Input Analog Inouts We dE 7 Tag Diti Fres General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Foint Number Value nits Scan Feriod Low Reading EU a 250 3873 scanning Alarming INHO e Enabled C Enabled T Sacs Disabled mg Disabled High Reading ELI 250 0 Active Alarms ess Update OK ACancel d Figure 7 7 AI General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Analog Inputs Scan Period Description Selects the analog input to be configured The inputs are listed by both Point Number and Tag Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen This read only field identifies the rack location for this point Reads value from a field device Note When scanning is disabled enter a value to override the input If scanning is enabled this field displays the last analog scan in engineering units Sets the engineering units for the I O such IN H20 PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps volts etc Sets the amount of time between updates of the Filter value All analog inputs are updated based on their individual Scan Periods The default value is 100 milliseconds The minimum Scan Period allowed is 50 milliseconds 7 8 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Low Reading EU
11. Slot 5 10 Configuration 250 Ohm Resistor Installed Integral Sensor GA DI G A 2 C D ADi C DOA DO 2 Cpa DI h Did A Yes C No senso Tepe D AlL2 Yes C No Se Start Close Figure 4 3 New File Configuration completed 3 Review and complete the following fields Field File Type Control Configuration History Sizing Modules 4 4 File Menu Description Associates the file type with a specific device Select FB107 to build an off line configuration file for the FB107 Indicates the number of PID loops FSTs and Meter Runs AGAs for the configuration Note Activate only the necessary number of devices for your device Selects the maximum number of history points in Standard and Extended History History Sizing Caution Select this value carefully you cannot later add History Points without first clearing current history present in the unit Standard History archives up to 100 points of minimum maximum min max minute hourly and daily values The min max values are from today and yesterday the minute values are from the last 60 minutes hourly values are from the last 35 days and daily values are from the last 35 or 60 days Extended History can be configured to archive up to 25 points of user selectable values from 1 second to 60 minute periods Extended History archiving provides a monitoring resolution for the FloBoss that is similar to a chart recorder or
12. Start Close Figure 9 3 Update Firmware CPU tab 9 1 2 Additional Update Firmware Tabs The additional tabs on the Update Firmware screen display the hardware installed in the FB107 see Figure 9 4 which shows the Aux 6 Pt IO tab and enable you to update the firmware for the selected hardware These additional tabs include Issued Jan 08 Tab LCD Controller On Board IO Aux 6 Pt lO MVS Description Updates the firmware for the optional Liquid crystal display the Touchpad Updates the firmware for the CPU s optional internal input output including system analog inputs communications and the RTD Updates the firmware for the I O modules The tab lists each module and its current slot See Figure 9 Updates the firmware for the optional Multi Variable Sensor module Utilities Menu 9 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 WW Update Firmware eu LER Coone Gheeadio Update Firmware Currently Installed SLOT 2 Rev SLOT 4 Rev SLOT 5 Rev SLOT 6 Rev Firmware Image to Download File Hame Browse Sa Status Start Close Figure 9 4 Update Firmware Additional tabs 9 2 License Key Administrator Use ROCLINK 800 s License Key Administrator screens to view and manage information on any software licenses currently installed on the FB107 Some applications require that you install a license in the CPU to run the application This license software is specific to
13. and date stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS and date stamp MMDDYY and floating point values for each of the defined History Points for that _ History Archive Register Response contains two floating point values for the time and date stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS and date stamp MMDDYY and floating point values for each of the defined History Points for that History Archive Register Response contains two floating point values for the time History Archive Register 1 The Hourly periodic Index Daily Index Event and Alarm Log data fields are used to address a history index number 2 The Event and Alarm Log record consists of the bytes shown in Table 7 12 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents Table 7 13 Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Contents breaks down the bit map in bytes 1 2 Issued Jan 08 Field Register Number Starting History Point Ending History Point Description Sets the register number to acquire the group of history points defined by the values in the Starting History Points and Ending History Points fields Sets the starting history point first retrieved history point for a group of points as defined in the Register Number field You must complete both this field and the Ending History Points field and the value in the Ending History Points field must be different and larger than this value Sets the ending history point last retri
14. off line configuration refers to configuring an electronic file that is later loaded into a ROC Glossary Issued Jan 08 Ohms On line Opcode Operator Interface Orifice meter P Q Parameter PC Permissive Pf P DP Pl PID PIT PLC Point Point Number Point Type Preset PRI Primary Blend Stream Component Primary Blend Stream Meter Protocol Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Units of electrical resistance Accomplished while connected by a communications link to the target device For example on line configuration refers to configuring a ROC800 Series unit while connected to it so that you can view the current parameter values and immediately load new values Type of message protocol the ROC uses to communicate with the configuration software as well as host computers with ROC driver software Also LOI or Local Port the serial EIA 232 RS 232 port on the ROC through which local communications are established typically for configuration software running on a PC A meter that records the flow rate of gas through a pipeline The flow rate is calculated from the pressure differential created by the fluid passing through an orifice of a particular size and other parameters A property of a point that typically can be configured or set For example the Point Tag ID is a parameter of an Analog Input point Parameters are normally edited by using configuration software r
15. 1 Input Database or Constant Value 3 LABEL If RR in ARG1 Goto ARG2 Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in lt ARG1 Go to ARG2 Otherwise continue to next command lt RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Value 2 LABEL Value If RR in lt ARG1 Go to ARG2 Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in 1 Input Database or Constant Otherwise continue to next command lt RR out RR in If RR in gt ARG1 Go to ARG2 _ SVD out SVD in 1 Input Database or Constant Value 2 LABEL If RR in gt ARG1 go to ARG2 Otherwise continue to next command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in FST Time Related Use time related commands FST Timers to implement simple time Commands related operations such as setting Timers checking Timers determining if Timers have elapsed wait time before continuing and imposing a delay upon each command executed Timers are used to branch the FST to a specific Label after a specified period of time following an action Up to four Timers are available for use in an FST and each Timer has a time interval of 100 milliseconds Each FST Timer decreases by interval if the Timer value is greater than 0 Command Issued Jan 08 Description FST Editor ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Command Description Set Timer ST The ST command sets any one of the
16. 1 Input Database or Delay ARG1 seconds number of seconds ARG1 have Constant Value RR out RR in elapsed The number of seconds SVD out SVD in can be from 0 1 to 999 999 DWK Day of Week sets RR out to the None RR out Day of Week day of the week 1 Sunday SVD out SVD in 7 Saturday Note The DWK function requires that you correctly set the real time clock a a aaa MND Minutes Since Midnight sets RR None RR out Minutes out to the number of minutes past SVD out SVD in midnight FST Miscellaneous Use the miscellaneous commands to move around FSTs and end FSTs Commands Miscellaneous commands provide operations such as an unconditional go to GO message to local display panel MSG alarms ALM and event EVT generation end of the FST END and delay BRK B 20 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 Command GO Message Break End Alarm and Event Log ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Executes an unconditional branch to the LABEL in ARGUMENT1 Branching can direct the FST toa step before or after the current step Provides a 30 character message and value for viewing on the local display panel Imposes a delay Break period in 100 millisecond intervals before executing the next command Once the break period is set to a value other than zero a delay in 100 millisecond or 1 second intervals occurs between the executions of each subsequent command Com
17. 3 Click Update if you make any changes to this screen 4 Click OK to close the LCD User List screen 7 13 2 LCD User List BLUM In basic list mode BLM the Touchpad continually displays a series of up to 32 parameters you define This enables service technicians to quickly review a dynamic display of current values without logging onto the Touchpad To define the BLM display 1 Select Configure gt LCD User List gt BLM The LCD User List BLM screen displays LCD User List BLM wech 1 2 3 4 5 E T H q cc et EER INN co 13 14 1 16 16 17 32 Device Parameter GANEW 1 CUA OP AGANE 1 CUR SP AGANE 1 CUR TP FCW NEW 1 FLOW DY FLWNEW 1 ENGDAY FLW NEw 1 FLOTO FEW NEw 1 FLOYD Undefined Undefined ge Undefined eB Undefined fe Scroll Time 0 TATATATA Units Mia MMBTU Day 2 Update wv OK 3 Cancel Figure 7 62 LCD User List BLM 2 Complete the following fields to define the first 16 parameters of the BLM list 7 106 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Title Scroll Time Device Parameter Text Units ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for the list Indicates the number of seconds the Touchpad displays each parameter set before scrolling to the next parameter set Typically the Touchpad displays two parameters at atime Valid values are 0 do not scroll to 255 Note
18. 4 1 New Contouraton 4 2 4 1 1 Configuration Checker 4 2 4 1 2 Duplicating a Configuration cc cccccceeeceeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaees 4 2 4 1 3 Creating a New Configuration tie 4 3 4 2 Opening a Configuration File cccceccseeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeeeens 4 6 4 3 Downloading a Configuration cccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeees 4 6 4 4 Saving a ROC User File A 4 7 AS Saving a Configurator EE 4 7 kat EBEN 4 7 AO Ge EE 4 9 Ar PARE Di EE 4 9 AO TROG SiN NG Seve she E such cows sna neet ade ncarieee beenidie tones Geeeweabewaanes 4 10 Me e EE 4 10 ATO GE 4 10 Issued Jan 08 File Menu 4 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 4 1 New Configuration You configure a FloBoss either by modifying an existing configuration file or by starting a new configuration file The full configuration procedure involves using the menu functions or Configuration Tree Menu to access the configuration screens Some of the configuration screens may not be required for your application or may not be available for your type of FloBoss The following checklists present the order of configuration in a typical application Omit configuration screens for modules and accessories that do not appear in your hardware configuration and for control elements PID FST and such that do not apply to your application Configuration Checklist For a FloBoss 107 ROC menu gt ROCLINK 800 Security logon Device Direc
19. 6 6 ROC Comm Ports For a compete discussion on configuring communication ports refer to Section 3 4 Configuring FB107 Communications Ports 6 7 ROC Device Memory Use this option in troubleshooting and advanced diagnostics to display a screen that shows the memory address as a single hex address for the FloBoss 1 Select ROC gt Memory The Device Memory screen displays Device Memory Address 0000 2 6 T o S ATB CAD E FEF EE EE 00000010 Ee 2 F 00000020 00000030 00000040 00000050 00000060 00000070 00000080 00000090 00000020 000000B0 000000C0 000000D0 000000E0 Next Block Previous Block Close Figure 6 4 Device Memory 2 Complete the Address field with a vallid range of memory location and click Update ROCLINK 800 updates the display to show the contents of 240 bytes of memory The hexadecimal values appear on the left side of the screen ASCII character equivalents appear on the right Click Next Block and Previous Block to view the previous or next block 240 bytes of memory If you are viewing data that may be changing click the Update button to refresh the screen with the most recent values from the FloBoss 3 Click Close to exit the Device Memory screen 6 8 Configuring Device Information Use this option to set a number of variables including station name address group active PIDs and associated history points and other global variables as well as review device i
20. Events gt From Device TI View History gt From File E View History gt From Device 1 k ao e eg me pn O O Fie Print o d File genug H Help AboutROCLINK D 7 Help HelpTopics H E ROC ra E Sane eee k ROC Direct Connect H R Tools Customize H Utilities Communications Monitor D View Directoy Oo E View Display gt From Fie 0 View onbe D Window Cascade 0 O oO 3 2 Device Security Use the Device Security screen to control who has access to the Comm Ports on a specific device When you enable this feature you must log Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 onto ROCLINK 800 to use the communications port You can enable this feature on each communications port separately To access the Device Security screen select ROC gt Security The Device Security screen displays Device Security Security on LO Disabled User ID User Access Enabled Level Enabled Security on COMI UserID User Access DEEG d Enabled Level Enabled Security on COM2 UserID User Access Disabled C Enabled Level Enabled Security on LCD i User ID User Access D Disabled Enabled LevelEnabled ZUpdate Y OK X Cancel Figure 3 9 Device Security Field Description User Table Click an operator ID in the table The Device Security dialog box displays Device Security Leer Operator ID Password Confirm Password Access Level
21. High Reading EU Scanning Alarming Active Alarms ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets the engineering unit EU for the low reading to zero percent input For example if a temperature transmitter is connected to the analog input with a range of 40 to 160 degrees F the Low Reading EU would be set to 40 Sets the engineering unit EU for the high reading to 100 percent input For example if a temperature transmitter is connected to the analog input with a range of 40 to 160 degrees F the High Reading EU would be set to 160 Sets the scanning option for this point Valid values are Enabled automatically process the field input and display the last analog input scan in the Value field or Disabled permit only manual updates of the Value field Note If you enable alarming the FB107 generates a Manual Mode alarm when scanning is disabled If Scanning is set to Disabled you must manually enter a value in the Value field to override the input Sets the alarm option for this point Valid values are Enabled configures the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband on the Alarms tab or Disabled does not generate limit alarms Note The Point Fail alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but is not logged in the Alarms file If you Enable alarming the system generates an alarm if you disable scanning This read only field shows any active alarms for this point When you Enable alarm
22. ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter describes both the ROCLINK 800 Configuration software ROCLINK 800 you use to configure and monitor the FloBoss 107 Flow Manager FB107 and the FB107 s dynamic user interface In This Chapter 1 1 ROCLINK 800 Software Description 00nnn0nnnnnnnennennnnnennnnnnnsennnni 1 1 1 2 Computer Requirements n0nnnnennennnsennnennnrnnnnnrrnennnnrrnennrenrnsnnne 1 2 1 3 Contacting Technical Support 1 2 1 4 Software Installation ccc ecccccececeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeseeesseeeeees 1 2 1 4 1 Manually Creating a Desktop SGhbortcut 1 3 1 4 2 Un installing ROCLINK OO 1 4 1 5 Starting ROCLINK 800 Goftware cc ccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 1 4 E EN Ee e elle e EE 1 5 1 6 User Interface Basics ccccccccccsececeesceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeesseneeees 1 6 1 6 1 The FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface cecccceeeeeeeee es 1 7 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module 1 10 1 6 9 Standard BUMONS EE 1 11 TOA FOOIDAR E den 1 11 1 6 5 Configuration Tree Men 1 13 KEG Jee Eeer e geed 1 14 KOF Eer 1 15 MOG Basie Navigation eegen 1 15 1 1 ROCLINK 800 Software Description Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 Configuration software enables you to monitor configure and calibrate FloBoss 107 Flow Managers Emerson Process Management provides the software and user documentation on a CD ROM ROCLINK 800 is designe
23. Undefined Undefined 2 Update vw OK A Cancel Figure 7 52 AGA 7 History Setup Standard History tab Logical Number FLWNEW 1 AGANEW1 Turbine 1 AGANEW1 Turbine 1 FLWNEW1 FLWNEW1 FLWNEW1 FLWNEW1 FLW stands for the flow calculation point type SP stands for static pressure point type TP stands for temperature point type 7 76 Table 7 2 EFM History Points AGA 7 Parameter Minutes Today AGANEW1 Turbine Pulses Accumulated Tf Temperature IMV BMV Uncorrected Today Flow Rate per Day Archive Type Totalize Totalize Average Flow Dependent Linear Average Flow Dependent Linear Average Flow Dependent Linear Totalize Accumulate Day Energy Rate per Day Accumulate Day Archive Point FLWNEW1 MINTDY FLWNEW 1 PULACC AGANEW 1 CUR SP AGANEW 1 CUR TP FLWNEW 1 IMV BMV FLWNEW1 UCCTDY FLWNEW 1 FLOWDY FLWNEW1 ENGDAY You can configure the historical database to log only the values that you require Unless you implement FST controls the values log in the standard minute hourly daily time base of the FloBoss By using the FST Editor Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Archive Type Undefined Avg Flow Dependant Linear Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 utility you can place the period at which the data logs under FST program control The FB107 maintains the followi
24. Yes Object is always visible This is the default gt No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object 5 34 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chart Adds a chart to represent data graphically H Note You can view real time data by configuring what figures display on the chart After you configure the chart view the display and select Auto Scan The chart displays the collected data in real time You cannot save the chart data to system memory This option has the following properties Property Description Header _Sets a title for the object TLP 1 through 4 Associates up to four TLPs with the chart Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to define the TLPs Button Adds a button to the screen This object has the following properties 7 Buttont mr LI Value ves LP Enabled es Tab Order 0 Property Description Caption Sets a label or caption for the object The default is Button 1 the system uniquely names each object until you rename it Action Associates an activity with the button Write Value is the only action currently associated with this control The system writes the value iden
25. aor soa E SERA Ee El RRE E SERA Edel El Update Y OK A Cancel Figure 7 54 Opcode Table Settings 1 2 A H 5 E T H J 1 sch lz 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Table No Selects an opcode table You can define up to 8 opcode tables Version No Associates a version number with the opcode table By default the version number a floating point number is one less than the number of the opcode table Note If you change the configuration of data points update the version number of the table Aeeeeeecececceccccccecececsecccccsescccesescceeseseceeseseceesececseseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesss 1 E Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 81 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Data Assigns a TLP value to each opcode data point Click the TLP button to display a Select TLP dialog box Use the dialog box to map TLP values into the opcode table data point If a host computer asks for a specific opcode data point the FloBoss returns the value that is referred by the mapped TLP 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 7 12 Modbus Communications This section describes how to configure the FB107 to communicate using the Modbus protocol and integrate the FB107 and Modbus devices into the same host slave system Note A FloBoss can act as a Modbus slave device on LOI COM1 COM2 and COM3 and
26. every 100 milliseconds A timer can be set using the Set Timer ST Command or by TTT TTT TTT TTT OTT OTTEN FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description parameter using the SAV Command The Check Timer CT Command is used to compare the timer to 0 When greater than 0 it branches to the desired LABEL MSG1 Character field for storing a message MSG2 Not used by the FST A value can be written to MSGz2 using the FST Registers point or a ROC Display field and viewed while monitoring or tracing GE MSG Data Displays any values associated with MSG1 MISC 1 through Single byte registers that can be written to and the MISC 4 value can be used by the FST Valid value is 0 to 255 Table B 7 Monitor and Trace Mode Keystrokes Key Action Key Action tT Move cursor to the cell above it End Move cursor to the right most cell ii accident ie eee Ctrl End Display last entry in Workspace F6 Execute current FST command _Ctrl Home Display beginning of Workspace Home Move cursor to the left most cell Page Down Display next page of Workspace Page Up Display previous page of Workspace B 3 FST Trace Mode Issued Jan 08 In Trace mode you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed Print the FST to assist in troubleshooting When on line the FST Editor uses a Trace mechanism that provides the ability to debug FST program log
27. for all slots The Installed Module field also displays Empty for all slots When you insert an I O module in slot 2 and power up the FB107 the FB107 displays Aux IO in the Actual Module field The FB107 also displays Aux IO in the Installed Module field since there was not a module previously installed in slot 2 and creates the I O points associated with the I O module If you remove the I O module from slot 2 and power up the FB107 the Actual Module field now displays Empty but the Installed Module field still displays Aux IO The FB107 remembers what was previously installed Additionally the FB107 sets an integrity error specifically Communication Failure on slot 2 because the slot is now physically empty and the Installed Module field indicates Aux IO You can still define and manage the I O points associated with the Installed Module Aux I O but because of the unresolved integrity error any I O points are marked in point fail A Module Mismatch error occurs if you install a different type of module than currently displays in the Installed Module field To completely remove a module from the FB107 click Uninstall This resets the value in the Installed Module field to Empty and deletes any I O points associated with the previously installed module Note The FB107 completely re scans for actual and installed modules if you select ROC gt Flags click Flash Memory Clear on the Flags screen and click Cold
28. D ay 4 FST Data 10 FST Time Second 11 Undefined 12 Undefined Undefined 13 Undetined Undefined 14 Undefined Undefined 15 Undefined Undefined a 2 Update w OK A Cancel Figure B 3 History Setup 2 Add two new definitions one for point 9 FST Data at FST 1 R1 and one for point 10 FST Time Second at FST 1 R2 You use these points when you define the FST B 26 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Access the FST Editor Utilities gt FST Editor A blank FST Editor screen displays 1 FST Edit View Build Monitor Window OD Ge NM SI Aha WG amp OO e hl K m C RW a d S Fst 1 Fst2 Fst al reral STEF LABEL CMD ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 COMMENTS Not stored in device Use Read File to get comments Figure B 4 Blank FST Editor 4 Complete steps 0 through 4 with the commands and arguments as shown below 1 FST Edit View Build Monitor Window 0 SI DK AH WG zo BR bi K w Ss wos Fst 1 Fst2 rst al Fst 4 ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 COMMENTS Not stored in device Use Read File to get comments SFP 1 DATAT FST 1 A1 10 FST 1 Ae Figure B 5 Sample FST Issued Jan 08 FST Editor B 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 a Get the value VAL from softpoint 1 data 1 and save it to the first results register b Write the value saved in the Results Register to the historical database WDB placing it at point 9 FST Data at FST 1 R1 a
29. General Securty Summary AutoAd TurboMeter23 dsp Type of file DSF File Opens with Unknown application Location C Program Files ROCLINK800 Displays Size 5 42 KB 5 552 bytes Size on disk 8 00 KB 8 192 bytes Created Friday June 09 2006 1 47 18 PM Modified Friday June 09 2006 10 39 46 AM Accessed Today October 31 2007 2 14 10 PM Attributes Advanced Figure 5 24 Properties Uncheck the Read only Attributes box and click Apply You can now edit the DSP file Use I O Monitor to view all installed and active I O points MVS values and flow calculations that provide information configured in the FloBoss and its operating environment View Menu 5 41 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 1 Select View gt I O Monitor The Select Points to Monitor dialog box displays Select Points to Monitor Analog Outputs Discrete Outputs Pulse Inputs DI Multi Variable Sensor 0 AGA Flow Calculation Values Select All Deselect All X Cancel Figure 5 25 Select Points to Monitor 2 Select the points you want to monitor Click the plus sign next to each item to expand the selection Click Select All or Deselect All to select or deselect all points 3 Click OK ROCLINK 800 displays a screen showing the point information you have requested and automatically updates the on screen values 5 42 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107
30. If the parameters used by ROCLINK 800 when establishing a communications link to your PC are incorrect a Direct Connect connection cannot be made If ROCLINK 800 stands idle for too long and exceeds the timeout value for a device a communications failure can also occur In this case simply log back into ROCLINK 800 and use the Direct Connect or Connect features If you do not have security access to the FloBoss you cannot make a connection You must configure a valid User ID and Password using the ROC gt Security option for each user who can connect to a FloBoss 3 6 1 Troubleshooting ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 Security Occasionally you may need to alter your PC communications options when you are having problems communicating with your FloBoss select the desired device in the Device Directory Right mouse click and select Properties Make sure you have specified the correct Device Address and Device Group of the FloBoss with which you are trying to communicate If you are communicating through the LOI port of the device the Device Address is 240 and Group Address is 240 which is the universal address Click the Advanced tab Try increasing the Time Out and or Tx Delay Click Apply Return to the General tab and click Connect 5 If you are still having trouble communicating try increasing the Number of Retries field in the Advanced tab screen Click Apply Return to the General tab and click Connec
31. If you set this value to 0 you must use the N and keys on the Touchpad to manually scroll through the parameters defined in the list Sets the parameter that you want to display on the Touchpad Click to display a Select TLP screen you can use to define the parameter Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for the parameter This read only field shows the engineering units for the associated parameter 3 Click the 17 32 tab to define 16 additional parameters 4 Click Update if you make any changes to this screen 5 Click OK to close the LCD User List BLM screen 7 13 3 LCD User List Chart In Chart mode the Touchpad functions as a chart recorder displaying historical or dynamic values for up to 16 parameters you define To access the chart function you must first log onto the Touchpad Issued Jan 08 To define the chart display 1 Select Configure gt LCD User List gt Chart The LCD User List Chart screen displays Configure Menu 7 107 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 108 LCD User List Chart LD co Ym mo amp tw fh ch 1 1 1 1 15 1 Data Source Standard History Dynamic 10 Standard History Scaling Data Point Text Units Auto Manual FlWNEWwLMINTOY o Is RT MINUTE Jm TI 2 Update Y OF Figure 7 63 LCD User List Chart vi ai a ei si e vu e ai a si e MH Iess UE 65 0 n a IESSE a a IESSE a Ess ae Se a
32. Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Manual Mode Point Failure Manual Mode Point Failure Manual Mode Point Failure Manual Mode Point Failure Manual Mode Save Print Preview 2 Review the alarms preview and click Close to return to the FB107 graphic display Note Click Print Preview to print the report contents see Section 4 5 1 Print Configuration or Save to save the preview to a View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 file for off line viewing select View gt Alarms gt From File 5 4 5 Viewing Event Logs Bile Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utlites Tools Window Help AH oe fe He Ca RM Events AlG2 FB107 Gt zs Uploaded 11705 2007 17 17 07 Operator LOI Date Time 1170172007 14 32 11 10 29 2007 12 43 07 107 2972007 12 42 41 10 29 2007 12 42 25 10 11 2007 15 16 33 10 11 2007 15 16 33 10 10 2007 16 20 21 10 10 2007 14 28 29 10 10 2007 14 28 29 10709 2007 13 02 08 10 09 2007 13 02 08 10 09 2007 13 02 08 09 21 2007 15 51 32 09 21 2007 15 51 32 09 18 2007 07 25 55 09 18 2007 07 25 55 09 17 2007 16 09 22 09 17 2007 16 09 22 09 17 2007 15 36 19 09 17 2007 15 36 19 03 17 2007 15 36 16 09 17 2007 15 36 01 09 17 2007 15 36 00 0917 2007 15 36 00 09 17 2007 15 36
33. Meter Configuration Parameters Meter Flow Values Meter Flow Values Meter Flow Values Instantaneous Energy FLW stands for the flow calculation point type Meter Flow Values History Setup ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Standard History Extended History Setup Point 1 2 3 4 5 G H 8 g Archive Type Totalize Archive Point FLANES 1 MINTDY Avg Flow Weighted Formula AGANEW 1 CUR DP Avg Flow Weighted Formula AGANEW 1 CUR SP Avg Flow Weighted Formula AGANEW 1 CUR TP Avg Flow Weighted Formula FLYVNEW 1 IMV BMY Avg Flow Weighted Formula FLYWNEWY 1 HPF Accumulate Day FLYVNEW 1 FLOWDY Accumulate Day FLYWNEW 1 ENGDAY Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Update vV OK X Cancel Figure 7 51 AGA 3 History Setup Standard History tab Table 7 1 EFM History Points AGA 3 Logical Number FLWNEW AGANEW1 Meter 1 1 FLWNEW1 FLWNEW1 FLWNEW1 FLWNEW1 DP stands for differential pressure point type SP stands for static pressure point type TP stands for temperature point type Issued Jan 08 Minutes Today Parameter Rate AGANEW1 Meter Pf Static Pressure IMV BMV oo i Tempera
34. Select Monitor gt Next Step to turn off Trace mode B 4 FST Command Library Convention Commands are identified by a name that consists of one or more characters or mathematical symbols In the FST Editor select the CMD field and perform one of the following Type the Command a Click the Gel This opens a list of commands the command names and their descriptions actions See Table B 8 which describes the terms RR and CF used in the command descriptions actions button Table B 9 presents each command name along with a brief description action the Arguments ARGUMENTI or ARGUMENT2 required and the effect each operation has on the RR and CF In the explanation of the operation if RR or CF is not mentioned then the current content is not affected and remains unchanged In general the CF is affected only by logical commands Table PS FST Command Library Conventions Description RR in The value or contents of the Results Register RR Signal Value Analog SVA prior to execution of the function command RR out Output value from Results Register RR CF in B 14 The value or contents of the Compare Flag CF Signal Value Discrete SVD prior to execution of a function command CF out The contents of the Compare Flag CF following execution of the function command Category Math Table B 9 FST Command Summary Command Action RR RR ARGUMENT1 add
35. Select the Sampler tab The Sampler screen displays 8 14 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Meter Setup Meter Number 1 Meter 1 v Meter Tag Meter 1 Sampler Control C Enabled e Disabled Output Point Undefined ie Sample Accum i 000 0 Ft3 Sample Duration i H Seconds BS Copy Update Y OK ACancel Apply Figure 8 7 Meter Setup Sampler tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Sampler Control Allows the sampler to override the DO located on the CPU I O assembly or on an I O module Valid values are Enabled override CPU based I O or Disabled permit CPU based I O The default is Disabled Output Point Sets the DO point to be used Click to display a Select TLP dialog box you use to define the point Sample Accum Sets the volume of gas to be metered between pulses expressed either in cubic meters or cubic feet For example if an odorizer needs to track every 100 cubic feet of gas being metered enter 100 The Sampler Volume Accum value is based upon the instantaneous flowrate Sample Duration Sets in seconds how long the pulse to the device needs to remain on Whenever the sampler exceeds the defined accumulated volume Sample Accum the system turns on the discrete output for the amount of time set in this field 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 8 1 6 Me
36. The system updates all inputs such as FSTs PIDs and I O based on their individual scan periods The FloBoss 107 has three configurable scan rate resolutions 50 milliseconds 100 milliseconds and 1000 milliseconds 1 second The minimum scan period allowed is 50 milliseconds Indicates whether the CPU uses a conserve power mode Valid values are Enabled or Disabled default is Disabled Sets the loop output power for I O to 10 volts dc or 24 volts dc The I O module only supports 24 volts dc loop output power Note The CPU I O assembly uses the CPU s loop power output and ground connections The loop output powers field devices or transmitters that require 24 volts dc to ground allowing the external device to send the FB107 a4 to 20 mA signal based on pressure temperature level and such The 10 volt loop output power is intended for low power transmitters The loop current is designed to deliver 80 mA to power two field devices that connect back to the two analog inputs Note If the input voltage is greater than the 10 volt loop then the loop voltage equals the input voltage For example if the PWR IN is 14 volts dc and you select a 10 volt loop the loop output equals 14 volts dc You can use current analog inputs of 4 to 20 mA when the 250 ohm resistor is selected in the Al configuration using ROCLINK 800 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 6 9 3 CPU Informati
37. operation adjustments to the calibration procedure may be required when setting the Span value Note If you change this value click Write on the General tab to save the new configuration Sets how the sensor retains values on failure of the sensor an input point or communications Valid values are Hold Last Value retains the last values before the failure or Set to Fault Value returns to the configured fault values Note See the Alarms tab for the Fault Value Sets a reference temperature the sensor uses when reporting differential pressure The default value is 60 F 15 6 C The system uses this value only when you change the Units selection is changed or when you select the Downstream option is selected in Metric units Note If you change this value click Write on the General tab to save the new configuration Action on Failure Reference Temperature 3 Click Write if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 8 5 MVS Calibration Tab 7 8 5 Multi Variable Sensor Calibration Tab Use this tab to calibrate the MVS points Note You can calibrate sensors at up to five points zero span and up to three mid points You must define at least zero and span points for calibration 1 Select the Calibrate tab The Calibrate screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 49 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 50 Multi Variable Sensor MVS Tag MUD Ba Copy Figure 7 3
38. override the input Alarming Sets the alarm option for this point Valid values are Enabled configures the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband on the Alarms tab or Disabled does not generate limit alarms Note The Point Fail alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but is not logged in the Alarms file If you Enable alarming the system generates an alarm if you disable scanning 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 6 2 PI Advanced Tab 7 6 2 Pl Advanced Tab Use this tab to configure features such as EU Options Rate Period Rollover value and Conversion for the pulse input 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays Pulse Input Pulse Inputs FI 1 slot Y Tag Pi slot EU Options mg Rate Max Rollover Slow Pulse Filter Time None Secands C Today s Total Max Rollover C Running Total Entered Rollover Rollover Value EUs 20 Conversion Rate Period e EUs Pulse C PulsesfEU Edem Copnoersiondk Facior i D es EU hour EL lida ES Copy Up dege Y OK l X Cancel Figure 7 28 PI Advanced tab Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 37 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 38 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field EU Options Description Sets how the system assigns the value of the engineering units EU Valid values are Rate Uses the value of the Current Rate par
39. s Inputs Outputs tab Each active PID loop acquires its process variable input and calculates the change in output required to maintain its setpoint If you enable Override Control what calculation result the system applies to the output depends on Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 61 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 62 whether you select the High or Low option in the Override Type Select field If you have chosen an analog output type the system adds the selected change in output to the current value of the output If you have chosen a discrete output type the system sends the change in output to one of the two discrete outputs The magnitude of the correction determines the amount of time that an output is energized A positive correction routes to the open forward DO A negative correction routes to the close reverse DO One application of Override PID control allows pressure control to override flow control when the pressure exceeds a setpoint value For example the system selects the output of the Primary flow control loop until the pressure input approaches the Override setpoint of 700 PSIG As the pressure input approaches its setpoint the pressure loop tries to close the valve and take over control at the point when the output calculated by the pressure loop is less than the output calculated by the flow loop Control returns to the Primary flow control loop when the change in output required to maintain the override setpoi
40. stamps history data from the beginning of a period or from the end of the period This option affects both Standard and Extended History values For example if you select At End of Period the system time stamps data it collects from 8 00 to 9 00 as 9 00 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note If you make changes on the Setup tab you must run Cold Start amp Clear History on the ROC Flags screen ROC gt Flags The system displays dialog boxes to walk you through the process To avoid losing data save any changes you make on the Setup tab 4 Proceed to Section 7 10 2 History Setup Standard History Tab 7 10 2 History Setup Standard History Tab Use the Standard History tab to define up to 100 Standard History points Note Use the Setup tab to define the total number of Standard History points The first eight Standard History points are pre defined for a EFM report on meter run 1 but can be reassigned to suit your application Refer to Table 7 1 Select the Standard History tab The Standard History screen displays Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 History Point Definition Flowing Minutes Today Meter Input hw Uncorrected Flow Differential Pressure Meter Input Point Type Meter Flow Values Meter Configuration Parameters Meter Configuration Static Pressure Parameters Meter Input Temperature IMV or BMV hwPf Pressure Extension Instantaneous Flow
41. string based licenses have an expiration date since they are intended for demonstrations or evaluations or to provide temporary access to an application Each string contains the license for a specific software application but there is no limit to the number of iterations of that license on the string This enables you to copy the application to demonstration devices knowing that the license has an expiration date Regardless of the delivery method you use the two License Key Administrator screens to install and manage software licenses on your FB107 9 2 2 Installing a License Key based To install a USB key based license on the FB107 1 Insert the USB license key in a USB port on your PC 2 Select Utilities gt License Key Administrator gt Transfer Between Device and Key from the ROCLINK 800 menu bar The Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key screen displays Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY Licenses on DEVICE Application Name App Cade i Time Created V Cone Flow Calc Siete at en eos 1 00 0 No Expiration 04 09 2007 11 44 41 AM Connect to KEY Moye to KEY Add License Remove Licenses on KEY Time Created Application Name Vendor ID Vendor Name App Code Version Expiration 1 01 22 2007 11 40 25 AM Props Example Sample Vendor D No Expiration 2 01 22 2007 11 40 30 4M Flow Example Sample Vendor D No Expiration 3 01 22 2007 11 40 35 AM IAPWS 1997 Sample Vendor D No Expiration 4 01
42. the output value The analog output AO command sends the analog value specified in ARGUMENT to the analog Point Number specified in ARGUMENTI The analog value is not sent if the analog Point Number is in Manual Mode The check for Manual Mode is included as a safety feature and permits the FST to continue operation if the device connected to the analog output is being serviced If a PID loop is controlling the analog output placing the PID loop into Manual Tracking Mode allows the FST to send a value to the output parameter of the PID For other active PID modes the FST and PID will be in conflict The mathematical commands provide simple arithmetic or mathematical operations Such operations include addition subtraction A multiplication division raise to power absolute value ABS e raised to a power EXP truncate to integer INT base 10 logarithm LOG natural logarithm LN square root SQR and 3rd order polynomial P3 Note No operation occurs with the LOG LN power and SQR commands if the Results Register is less than or equal to zero Table B 11 FST Mathematical Commands FST Editor Issued Jan 08 Name Description Arguments Add value to RR in 1 Input Database or Constant Value Subtract value from RR in 1 Input Database or S Constant Value Multiply RR in by value 1 Input Database or 2 Constant Value Value Raise RR in to a power 1 Input D
43. to an Object Oval Adds an oval to mark borders between objects This object has the following properties Color amp HS0000008 Visible Yes Property Description Color Sets the color of the object Enter a hexadecimal color value or click in the field to display a Color screen which you use to assign a color to the object Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values Yes Object is always visible This is the d default No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Image Adds an image JPG BMP PNG GIF or other graphic formats SS froma file This object has the following properties Visible Property Description Picture Sets an image JPG BMP GIE or other graphic formats to display with the object Click in the field to display a Select Picture File screen which you use to indicate the appropriate image The default is None Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values
44. 1 Temporary 05 31 2007 11 59 59 PM 05 31 2007 09 56 39 AM 2 f Props Example E VENDOR 1 1 00 0 1 Key No Expiration Connect to KEY Move to KEY Time Created dem 1 07 26 2007 09 37 44 AM aen 123 VENDOR 1 0 0 No Expiration 2 07 26 2007 02 Sse AM Flow Example 123 VENDOR 1 0 0 No Expiration Licenses on KEY License Key Event Log User ID Vendor ID Application Name Previous Quantity New Quantity 09 12 2007 10 47 10 Props Example 07 31 2007 15 30 28 Flow Example 07 31 2007 15 30 22 Flow Example 077 3172007 15 30 07 Props Example 077 3172007 15 30 00 Props Example 077 3172007 13 19 13 Props Example 077 3172007 13 19 07 Props Example 07 26 2007 09 41 14 Flow Example COPS Oo co rol Figure 9 7 License Moved 6 Click Move to Key ROCLINK moves the license from the device to the key and updates the screen Fields The fields and buttons on the Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key screen provide additional information about the software licenses Field Description Application Name Shows the name of the software application such as a 0 a e a aa Vendor Name Identifies the company that developed or distributed this application App Code Indicates a code the vendor or developer has associated with the particular application Refer to the vendor s application documentation for a meaning of the application code Note Do not mistake the Application Code for the license quantity Version Indicates
45. 17 7 4 Modbus Message Framing 00000000n 7 85 7 5 Modbus Function Codes saaanneaann 7 91 7 6 Modbus History Event and Alarm Functional Ve E 7 95 7 7 Modbus Convert Codes n nnsneannnaann 7 96 7 8 Status of Host Request or Command 7 99 l 12 Index 7 9 Host Event Alarm Request Example WIESSAG GS E 7 103 7 10 Event Alarm Response Example Message DEEN 7 103 7 11 Event and Alarm Acknowledgement RESPONSE E 7 103 7 12 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Content 7 103 7 13 Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Contents 7 104 8 1 Meter Run Es cc ecccccccecceeeeeeeeeees 8 1 9 13 FST Comparison Commande B 19 B 1 Device specific FST Functionality B 2 B 2 Workspace and Output Keystrokes B 4 B 3 FST Function Structure B 4 B 4 FST Label Feld es B 5 B 5 CommandEeld B 5 B 6 FST Function Example aannaannnaaanan B 6 B 7 Monitor and Trace Mode Keystrokes B 13 B 8 FST Command Library Conventions B 14 B 9 FST Command Summary aaannaaaaanaan B 14 B 10 FST Control Related Commande B 16 B 11 FST Mathematical Commands B 16 B 12 FST Logical Commande a0annaaan B 18 B 14 FST Time Related Commande B 20 B 15 FST Miscellaneous Commande B 21 B 16 FST Database Commands B 23 B 17 FST Historical Commande B 25 E A SUNG WEE 3 4 TCP IP Seele 3 4 ee ee EE 3 4 MD WEE 1 22 TDO TOG GG E 1 29 Technical SUPP
46. 18 7 30 7 37 Analog Outputs nannnnannnnennenennnnenne 7 18 7 30 Communications Module 3 9 CPU Information EE 6 10 errereen ee 6 10 Deadband nianeannnnenann 7 15 7 40 7 56 8 18 Discrete Iopute A 7 23 1 25 Discrete Outputs cccccceececeeeeeeees 7 31 7 32 Enabling c 0008 7 9 7 18 7 23 7 30 7 37 7 56 8 18 Eh erennere 7 101 7 103 Heger 7 4 Reie 7 4 7 6 HR Un EC 7 6 Integrity 3 9 6 10 7 4 7 6 7 43 7 45 Integrity Fallecen and anaioee 1 9 lee ee 8 6 8 17 Klee al VC 7 100 Module Mismatch cccccecccseeesseeeeeeeeeeees 1 9 KK 7 43 7 45 7 47 7 55 le E e 1 9 Pulse le 7 36 7 39 PR EE 3 15 PRO a sets cess Ee 1 9 EISE genee ee 7 102 Troubleshooting cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 9 1 10 CN OW EE 1 9 Analog Inputs Advanced Tab 7 9 Analog MPU EE 7 6 250 Ohm Resistor Installed 4 5 7 5 Alarme En EE 7 14 Elle Le te WEEN 7 11 Calibration Values cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 26 General TaD natina 7 8 Analog Output AO BEE 7 16 AO Advanced Tab 7 18 AO General Tab 7 16 EE EELER 9 9 Application Name 9 9 Archive Type Histonm 1 17 Archive Type Modbus s nnonnnennnenennnnnenneennnn 7 95 Argument Structure nnenneneaneenennnnnneenennnenennne B 5 PT QUIMGING EN B 5 ALQUINGINZ EN B 5 ET CR RE B 22 AS DGMIVElGG jis ates titi se ie ecaaeet se cchecdededst 8 13 ASG TEE 7 85 Atmospheric Hresesu
47. 2007 16 10 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8921 4620 0750 333 7649 25 7008 26 3433 11 05 2007 16 09 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 9107 4619 3400 333 7649 25 6991 26 3415 11205 2007 16 08 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 80 0292 4618 8790 333 7649 25 6954 26 3378 11 05 2007 16 07 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 80 1036 4619 4370 333 7649 25 6946 26 3370 11 05 2007 16 06 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 80 0135 4620 2830 333 7649 25 6982 26 3407 11 05 2007 16 05 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8771 4620 3630 333 7649 25 7016 26 3442 11 05 2007 16 04 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8642 4621 1570 333 7649 25 7033 26 3459 11 05 2007 16 03 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7363 4620 8750 333 7649 25 7059 26 3485 11 05 2007 16 02 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7821 4620 7500 333 7649 25 7046 26 3472 11 05 2007 16 07 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8021 4621 0650 333 7649 25 7046 26 3472 11 05 2007 16 00 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7513 4621 3970 333 7649 25 7064 26 3491 11 05 2007 15 59 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6978 4621 3120 333 7649 25 7075 26 3502 11 05 2007 15 58 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7113 4621 4330 333 7649 25 7074 26 3501 11 05 2007 15 57 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6920 4620 7540 333 7649 25 7067 26 3494 11 05 2007 15 56 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8013 4620 4420 333 7649 25 7036 26 3462 11 05 2007 15 55 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8514 4621 1130 333 7649 25 7035 26 3461 11 05 2007 15 54 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7435 4622 0590 333 7649 25 7077 2
48. 22 2007 11 40 42 AM Cond Orifice Sample Vendor D No Expiration License Key Event Log Serial Number Vendor ID Application Name Previous Quantity New Quantity 05 24 2007 11 42 49 ADD LOI Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 42 06 REMOVE LOI Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 41 14 ADD LOI Props Example 05 24 2007 11 40 56 REMOVE LOI Props Example 05 24 2007 11 40 26 ADD LOI Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 40 05 REMOVE LOI Cond Orifice 05 04 2007 14 54 52 ADD JMB Cond Orifice 05 04 2007 14 53 56 REMOVE JMB Cond Orifice COP Oo Oo oo Moye Figure 9 5 Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key Note that this screen has three sections The upper portion Licenses on Device shows any software licenses currently installed on the FB107 The middle portion Licenses on Key shows software licenses on the license key The lower portion of the screen License Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Key Event Log provides a rolling log of the last eight events related to this license key 3 Select the key based license you want to transfer to the FB107 Props Example as shown in Figure 9 6 4 Click Move to Device ROCLINK moves the license from the key to the FB107 and updates the screen Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY Licenses on DEVICE Application Name YendorName App Code Version Quantity License Source Expiration Time Created Cone RAS 1 Temporary 05 31 2007 11 59 59 PM 05 31 2007 09
49. 3 2 PAVING EE 4 7 IEN 1 13 Configure Menu cccccsseeccseseeeceesseeseeeeeeeees 7 1 Configuring Comm Ports on ERBIO 3 9 DUPIE IIN EE 4 2 Kleeder 1 71 Ha earners aera eee me eter eg ete ee ee eee ee ee 7 3 Meter History EE 1 11 Meter Setup kA 8 1 PID LOOD Meee aceoetes ended ees 7 60 Configuring H EE B 26 el ne EE 3 16 eu ue BEE 3 13 Connect TIME sssrin 3 12 Re EE 3 15 ROCLINK 800 Communicatons 3 2 CONNECT tO EE 9 10 Connecting to Gi CN LAKE 3 15 Contacting Technical Gupport 1 2 Continuous Polling eessen 7 87 Contr l eier de BEE 4 4 Control MON WEE 7 56 CONTO MEIER ue 7 64 CONVENS OM EE 7 38 7 93 Conversion K Factor nannnannnennnennnnennnennnnnne 7 38 Convert IVE TEE 9 16 CPU I FORMMAUCH moienn 6 8 Advanced TaD cc ace elec Meakin icc eee 6 10 DIAGNOSUG Ta e EE 6 13 Sener al E EE 6 8 WOOP e E AD EE 6 11 Meter Points Tab 6 12 Module Alarms AA 6 10 CPU Module Ke 6 16 CRC Check le Ee 6 18 CRC CNECK oeiia a a 3 6 Creating Calibration Report cccccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 6 EFM Reports A 5 2 E E RE B 7 FST from an Esingen B 8 New Configuration Eie 4 3 Creating a Custom Display 5 19 Current Date sus sateen ceiteteneaciestuesieavie ee taesetees 7 94 HEEN 7 36 Sid t Rn EE 7 94 Issued Jan 08 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 CUMETIE EH EEN 8 34 Custom Displays Adding Expressions snenneeeneenneennenennnn 5 39 AdMINMS TAON eebe Ge OE E 5 16 Makim ee aa eee
50. 56 39 AM Props Example VENDOR 1 No Expiration 07 26 2007 09 37 44 AM Connect to KEY Move to DEVICE Add License Licenses on KEY Example 0 07 26 2007 09 37 50 AM Flow Example 123 VENDOR 1 0 0 lore No Expiration No Expiration License Key Event Log UserID Vendor ID Application Name Previous Quantity New Quantity 09 12 2007 10 47 10 Props Example 077 3172007 15 30 28 Flow Example 077 3172007 15 30 22 Flow Example 077 3172007 15 30 07 Props Example 077 3172007 15 30 00 Props Example 077 3172007 13 19 13 Props Example 077 3172007 13 19 07 Props Example 07 26 2007 09 41 14 Flow Example CO OM ol n a A a a Figure 9 6 License Installed Note An FB107 can hold up to six different licenses although you can install only one instance of each license on the FB 107 When you click Move to Device ROCLINK 800 moves only one instance of the license onto the FB107 and automatically decreases the license quantity on the USB key by one You can also use this same screen to move a license from an FB107 and place it on a USB license key 5 Select the device based license you want to remove Note that ROCLINK 800 re labels the Move to Device button as Move to Key 9 8 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY KEN Licenses on DEVICE 7 Application Name Vendor Name App Code Version Quantity License Source Expiration Time Created 1 1 00 0
51. 7 1 2 I O Interface I O Setup Tab 7 4 7 1 3 1O Interface I O Points Tab 7 5 7 2 Analog Input Al Configuration cccccecccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 7 6 7 2 41 Al General EC EE 7 8 7 2 2 Al Advanced Tab 1 9 7 2 3 Al Al Calibration Tab 7 11 T 2 4 Al Alarms Tal exsg ustgegiek ed de ege ENNEN Ed e NN een 7 14 7 3 Analog Output AO Configuration cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeees 7 16 7 3 1 AO General Tab 7 16 Tice AO Advanced AO EE 7 18 7 4 Discrete Input DI Configuration n n00nnnnennnnnennnnennnennnnnnnnnnnne 7 20 TAG WER Kee CC ER AD EE 7 21 TAZ DIAdvanced Tab NEE 1 23 TAS DIAlarms TaD SE 1 25 7 5 Discrete Output DO Configuration cccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 26 75 1 DO General E EE 7 27 7 5 2 DO Advanced TAD EE 7 30 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tat 20dkegNEaEAEEN KAREN SENNENG 7 31 7 5 4 DO Alarms Tab EE 1 32 7 6 Pulse Input PI Configuration ccccccceeeceesseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 7 33 7 6 1 Ee TC RE EE 7 34 16 2 PIlAdvanced VAD BEE 1 37 163 PlIAlams A BEEN 1 39 Tl e a EEN 7 41 7 8 Multi Variable Sensor MVS Configuration a00nnnaannnaannenannnans 7 42 7 8 1 MVS Module General Tab 1 42 7 8 2 MVS Module I O Points Tab 7 44 7 8 3 Multi Variable Sensor General Tab 7 45 7 8 4 Multi Variable Sensor Advanced Tab 1 48 7 8 5 Multi Variable Sensor Calibration Tab 1 49 7 8 6 Multi Variable Sensor Alarms Tab 7 55 79 ge et e EE RE 7 56 Issued Jan 08
52. 7 10 7 9 Al Al Calibration tab 0 0 0 7 11 7 10 EE ee 7 12 TV SOL Spaan den 7 13 l 12 Set Mid DEE 7 13 7 13 Al Alarms tab 7 14 7 14 Analog Output 7 16 7 15 AO General tab 00 0 0 ee eeeeee eee eee 7 17 7 16 AO Advanced ab 7 19 7 17 Discrete Input 7 21 7 18 DI General tab eee eee eee eee es 1 22 7 19 DI Advanced ab 1 24 7 20 DI Alarms tab 1 25 7 21 Discrete Output 7 27 7 22 DO General tab eeeeee eee es 7 28 1 293 DO Advanced tab BEE 7 30 7 24 DO TDO Parameters tab 00 7 31 1 25 DO Alarms EE 1 32 1 26 Pulse INDUL saeco 1 34 7 27 PI General tab iets awed ncccoend ees 1 35 7 28 Pl Advanced ab 1 37 T 29 E EE E e EE 1 39 F 30 SON PON EE 7 41 7 31 MVS lee 7 42 7 32 MVS Interface General tab 1 43 7 33 MVS I O Points ab 7 44 7 34 MVS General tab eee 7 46 7 35 MVS Achvanced Lab 7 48 7 36 MVS Calibration ab 7 50 eol NOVY ee 7 51 Teo SCE EEN 7 52 7 39 Set Zero Shift Offset ee 7 53 7 40 MVS Alarms toab eeeeeeeeeeeeee es 7 55 7 41 FST Registers cccccsseeccseeeeseeseees 7 57 7 42 FST Registers General tab 7 58 7 43 FST Registers Advanced tab 7 59 7 44 Device Information Points tab 7 60 TAS PID LOOD EE 7 61 7 46 PID Loop General ab 7 63 7 47 PID Loop Inputs Outputs tab 7 66 7 48 PID Loop Advanced ab 7 68 7 49 History Getunp 7 71 7 50 History Set
53. Associates the object with a Visual Basic expression Click which displays when you click in the field to display an Expression Builder window which you use to define the expression Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object View Menu 5 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values Yes Object is always visible This is the d default No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display Text Box Adds a data entry field This object has the following properties ab TextBox Text Texthox 2 me EE Allow Data Entry Yes Tab Order J0 Property Description Text Sets text that appears in the object You can enter as many characters as necessary Use the control squares to change the size of the text box T
54. CPU Information screen s General tab displays hardware and firmware information about the CPU 1 Click the CPU module on the FB107 s dynamic interface The CPU Information displays the General tab 6 8 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General Advanced UC Points Meter Points Diagnostic Installed Module CPU Actus Module CPU Description Application Firmware Revision Rev100 00 9 4 2 Part Number w n 0 Build Date Dec 20 2006 7 22 Serial Number w48083x0012 C 07010049 Boot Revision Devi Boot Build Date Nov 17 2006 8 32 Integrity Auto Scan ZUpdate Figure 6 9 CPU Information General tab 2 Review the following fields Field Installed Module Description Part Number Serial Number Actual Module Revision Build Date Boot Revision Boot Build Date Description This read only field shows the type of module the FloBoss 107 is using for point configuration and does not require that a module be physically installed to display The FloBoss 107 remembers the Installed Module type until you Uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module This read only field shows a description of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss This read only field show the Part Number of the firmware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 This read only field shows the Serial Number of the hardware currently installed in t
55. Configure Menu 7 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 9 1 Function Sequence Table tGiiReosters 7 56 7 9 2 Proportional Integral and Derivative PID Loops 7 60 7 10 Configuring History Points ccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesaeseeseaees 7 71 7 10 1 History Setup Setup Tab 7 72 7 10 2 History Setup Standard History Tab 7 74 7 10 3 History Setup Extended History Tab 7 179 7 10 4 Configuring History An Example n eaannnennnnnennnnnnnnennnnnne 7 79 7 11 e eege 7 81 7 12 Modbus Communications aannnneannnnennnnennnenrnnnenrnnnrnrnnnnrnesnnennne 7 82 7 12 1 Modbus Configuration ccccccecseeeeecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 82 7 12 2 Modbus Configuration General Tab 7 83 7 12 3 Modbus Configuration Scale Values Tab 7 87 7 12 4 Modbus Registers cece cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeessaeeesaaeeeeaeeeesees 7 89 7 12 5 Modbus History Table cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeesees 7 93 7 12 6 Modbus Conversion Codes 7 96 7 12 7 Modbus Master Table 7 98 7 12 8 Modbus Events and Alarms a nnnannnnennennenenenennennnenennnne 7 100 PAG LCD User EE 7 104 7 13 1 LCD User List Gtandard 7 105 7 13 2 LCD User List BIM 7 106 7 13 3 LCD User List Chart E 7 107 7 1 Configuring Input Output I O The I O module rack provides slots for up to seven I O modules The available expansion rack plugs directly into the FB107 module rack connector on the bottom edge of
56. Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help x E SFr VO Nae ME FZOR bs Minute History 41G2 FB107 Uploaded 11 05 2007 16 08 15 Operator LOI Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Date Time MINTDY CUR DP CUR SP CUR TP IMV BMYV H WPF FLOWDY ENGDAY J TOTAL AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG ACCUM Day ACCUM Da 11 05 2007 16 08 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 80 0292 4618 8790 333 7649 25 6954 26 3378 11 05 2007 16 07 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 80 1036 4619 4370 333 7649 25 6946 26 3370 11205 2007 16 06 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 80 0135 4620 2830 333 7649 25 6982 26 3407 11 05 2007 16 05 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8771 4620 3630 333 7649 25 7016 26 3442 11 05 2007 16 04 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8642 4621 1570 333 7649 25 7033 26 3459 11 05 2007 16 03 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7363 4620 8750 333 7649 25 7059 26 3485 11 05 2007 16 02 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7821 4620 7500 333 7649 25 7046 26 3472 11 05 2007 16 01 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8021 4621 0650 333 7649 25 7046 26 3472 11 05 2007 16 00 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7513 4621 3970 333 7649 25 7064 26 3491 11 05 2007 15 59 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6978 4621 3120 333 7649 25 7075 26 3502 11 05 2007 15 58 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7113 4621 4330 333 7649 25 7074 26 3501 11205 2007 15 57 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6920 4620 7540 333 7649 25 7067 26 3494 11205 2007 15 56 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8013 4620 4420 333 764
57. Deviation 0 0000 z Figure 8 16 Verify Log Entry Field Description Action Indicates the current action Valid values are Verify or Calibrate 8 24 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Actual Displays the value in the Live Reading field Expected Displays the value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field Deviation Displays the amount of deviation between the actual and expected values TTIE Deviation Displays a percentage deviation between the Actual and Expected values 8 As the live reading value changes click Log Verify as many times as necessary to establish the verification log Typically you verify the same points you calibrate zero span and mids Temperature might be an example 100 200 50 For each test point you set your test equipment to produce the expected value enter that expected value in the Tester Value field wait for live input to stabilize and then click Log Verify You can verify as many points as you want Note If you have chosen to save the verification log ROCLINK 800 saves it in the location you specified in step 3 RATE Verity o4 ozr O42 0 000 0 0000 E Dead Wreight T ester Value 84 827 Live Reading 84 01 3 Deviation Figure 8 17 Verify Log Entry 9 Review the verification log and determine whether the results are within contractual limits If they are not you may need to calibrate the temperature
58. Diameter Sets the inside diameter for the pipe near the orifice plate in this meter run The units are inches or millimeters Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Orifice Diameter Sets the diameter of the orifice plate in this meter run The units are inches or millimeters Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Low Flow Cutoff Sets the low flow cutoff point When the differential pressure value of the metering device is less than this value the system sets the calculated flow rate to zero and if alarming is enabled records a No Flow alarm in the Alarm Log For the AGA3 92 or 1S05167 2003 standard this value is in terms of inches of water column or kPa For the AGA7 96 standard this value is in terms of MCF day Static K Factor Sets a K factor expressed as counts pulses per unit volume such as 4 pulses per cubic foot or 235 pulses ft that the AGA7 calculations use for various low and high flow conditions as received from a specified input The K Factor cannot be less than zero The system assumes units for the input to be either in ft or m If you disable the Variable K Factor the system uses the Static K Factor Note This field displays only for a turbine meter 8 8 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Stacked DP Low DP Input Low DP Setpoint High DP Setpoint Variable K Factors ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Enables the use of standard differentia
59. Download Display Size Estimated Bytes Remaining 19 568 111 204 Close Figure 5 17 Display Administrator 3 Click Browse to open the Select User Display File Double click a display file to load The Display Administrator screen redisplays with Download now active 4 Click Download to add the user display to the FB107 Display Administrator User Displays Installed in Device GC Interface Display APIZ540 Display Oo 00 00 OT Fe Oo Po A 10 Gas Chromatograph Display Download User Display File C Program Files ROCLINE SOO Displays GOST Calcs dep l em Bytes Free Downoad Display Size Estimated Bytes Remaining d 350 110 854 Download Close Figure 5 18 Display Administrator ROCLINK 800 prompts you to verify the installation loads the file displays a verification message and updates the display Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 17 Display Editor toolbar ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note Use the Flash File System frame on this screen to monitor the number of available bytes used and remaining Use Remove to delete a display file from the FB107 5 Click Close to return to the FB107 graphic display 5 6 Custom Displays The custom display option in ROCLINK 800 software allows you to create customized FB107 displays or load a display from a file The FB107 can store up to 40 displays including both custom user displays you create and user program displays that accompany user pro
60. FB107 ROCLINK 800 13 Click OK and click Cancel to display the FB107 graphic Note Click Cancel to stop a conversion in progress ROCLINK 800 displays a dialog box click OK to acknowledge the cancellation 9 4 User Program Administrator User programs provide the FB107 with extended functions and applications such as gas chromatograph support or GOST calculations Use this option to download start stop and remove user programs Note Extensive documentation covering configuration and usage information accompanies each user program 1 Select Utilities gt User Program Administrator The User Program Administrator screen displays User Program Administrator User Program Administrator User Programs Installed in Device User Programs Installed in Device Name No Program No Program Name 070 032 Cone Flow No Program No Program No Program Version Library Version No Program Version Rev 1 00 No Program o No Program i wo i 070032 V Cone Flow Created DRAM Used O 070032 V Cone Flow Created 04 10 2007 16 07 49 DRAM Used 16384 No Program CRC Ox0 FLASH Used O0 No Program CRC Ox48B9 FLASH Used 11117 Entry Pt Entry Pt Ox5E 0000 Displays Clear Start Stop Library Version Rev 0 Displays 32 Status Empty Status Loaded pean poan fos Download User Program File Browse Name Version Created CRC Download User Program File Kl Brow
61. FB107 graphic 9 4 1 Downloading a User Program You can use the User Program Administrator screen to download a user program to the FB 107 Note For the FB107 ROCLINK 800 automatically determines in which of six slots to install a downloaded program 1 Select Utilities gt User Program Administrator The User Program Administrator screen displays 2 Click Browse in the Download User Program File frame The Select User Program File screen displays Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Select User Program File Look in Program Files da E Mjollnir File name Fb107_vcone bin DA Files of type User Programs bin Figure 9 22 Select User Program File Note User Program files are typically located in the Program Files folder on the distribution CD The screen displays the names of all files that have the bin extension 3 Select a file name to load and click Open The User Program Administrator screen displays User Program Administrator User Programe Installed in Device 1 No Program Mame No Prograrn 2 Mo Frogram 3 No Frogram Version Library Version A Mo Program Created DRAM Used O 6 Mo Program CHC Uu FLASH Used O Entry Ft Displays Status Empty Download User Program File F Program Files Fo107_vcone bin d Mame 070032 Cone Flow Download amp Start Download Version Aew 1 00 Size 11121 TWU GQ
62. MPU Loading This read only field shows the processes in the processor MPU Loading 3 Proceed to Section 6 8 4 Device Information Revision Info Tab 6 8 4 Device Information Revision Info Tab The Revision Info tab displays information about the applicaton firmware or accessory software installed in the FB107 1 Select the Revision Info tab on the Device Information screen The Revision Info screen displays Device Information Application Firmware Rev 1 00 wW68182 W48083x0012 c 07010049 Led Controller App Rev 1 00 wW 68190 W48085x0012 A 06510148 Slot0 CPU Field Interface Rev 1 00 w68184 W48084x0012 A 06510030 Slot1 Auxiliary IO Module Rev 1 00 wWw 68186 W48082x0042 A 06510004 Slot2 RS485 Comm Module w48082 Slot3 MVS Interface Rev 1 01 wW68188 W48082x0032 A 06520016 Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 6 8 Device Information Revision Info tab 2 Review the information on this screen 3 Click OK to close the Device Information screen 6 9 CPU Information You can navigate FloBoss 107 options using the ROCLINK menu structure or by clicking on the FloBoss 107 graphic and selecting a tab or button The graphical interface display shows the current settings of the point including alarms and integrity To display the CPU information for the FloBoss 107 click the CPU module on the graphical interface The currently selected hardware displays at the bottom of the screen 6 9 1 CPU Information General Tab The
63. Meter Calibration screen displays Meter Calibration Meier Meter Tag Meter HI Freeze Freeze VY alues Diff Pressure Low DP Static Pressure Temperature Livery w erty wen caise ee eee eee Oi ETD Bs frame of this screen depending on the selected meter For orifice meters you can calibrate differential pressure static pressure and temperature inputs For a turbine meter you can calibrate static pressure and temperature inputs When calibrating stacked differential pressure you can calibrate either high differential pressure Diff Pressure input or low differential pressure Low DP input 8 20 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Meter Selects the meter for verification or calibration Click v to display all defined meter runs Meter Tag This read only field shows the short description associated with the selected meter Freeze Click to stop the system from updating the values of the analog MVS and temperature RTD inputs during verification or calibration Freeze Values These read only fields show the value received from the analog input MVS or RTD input when the Update button was last clicked The system uses these values in ongoing processing such as flow calculations history logging or control while calibration occurs Verify Click to start the verification process Calibrate Click to start to calibration
64. Modbus gt Registers Opcode table S User Data Download New Save Configuration Clock Configure Configure Configure Configure File File File ROC Table 3 2 Security Access Levels Menu Option Security License Key Administrator Update Firmware User Program Administrator 4 Control gt FST Registers ROCLINK 800 Security Control gt PID Loop History Points I O gt Al Points I O gt AO Points VO gt DI Points I O gt DO Points I O gt Soft Points Modbus gt History Modbus gt Master Modem Comm Ports Communications and Security Access Level ee 5 5 5 o a A E 3 a 3 ooo se 3 E E 3 Li SNE Kee 3 ooo ie 3 DE 3 ae 3 oo te 3 oo aa 3 bE 3 ooo WE 3 ooo Kc 3 a 3 S a 3 KZ 3 ZE 3 ooo a 3 WWW 3 3 7 3 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Menu Menu Option Access Level ROC ROCFlags A E ROC ROC Information 3 Tools Options 3 Utilities Al Calibration Values 3 i Utilities Convert EFM File 3 o Utilities FST Editor 3 View Display gt New 3 Meter __Calibration S 2 Meter PlateChange o o 20 Meier Setup 2 d Meter ss Values 2 d ROC Collect Data i 2 S Ven Calibration Report 2 View EFM Repot 2 ee File Close E File Open a File PrintConfiguration 1 File Recent Files a oo E ROC Memory E Ven Alarms gt From File 1 View Alarms gt From Device 1 7 View Events gt From File Ir View
65. OM EE 1 2 TEMPO RAC aleet 8 8 9 28 Temperature Values AA 7 47 e EIERE egen Eege dee Eege A 1 MES OIG EE 1 69 KIT 11 2 TREA AN A E AAEE NE E N EAT AEEA ANA TENS 6 3 Biet 8 18 Time Created EE 6 7 9 10 RT ae a hore msutin aciion mietaok 7 28 TNS EE 3 6 Bin EE 9 27 Timer 1 through Timer A B 12 Title BEM EE 7 107 LS Ol NS GE 7 105 R EE 1 16 10 1 Kee VE 6 3 Today s Total 7 36 Today s Total Max Hollover 7 38 TOG lei 1 29 ele e 1 11 5 43 TOONS IMG rsrs sae tolatuie a 10 1 Issued Jan 08 TOUCN DAG BEE 7 104 ele UM CES 7 105 7 107 Update Firmware annnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnne 9 5 Trace Mode B 13 Transferring a License CARE 9 12 Troubleshooting Alan S Gch eg ee 1 9 1 10 COMMUNICATIONS cccceccceeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeeeees 3 18 From Factory Defaults ccccceeeeeeeseeeees 6 17 Fs KEEN B 6 B 8 B 11 VOdUIG aoe Sate oo cece een een tea 1 9 1 10 VE 9 28 ROG User MOD EE 2 4 EAR 3 6 LE WE 4 7 Re 9 27 Type of Primary Element 8 8 Type Ol UNIS ninan 8 5 U Uncorrected Volume cccccccseecsseeseeeeeeeeeees 8 7 Uninstall ceeeeeeeee 1 10 3 9 6 10 7 4 7 44 Units Analog Inpute eneen 7 8 7 17 Discrete Output 7 32 INE AEE EA AEE A 7 48 5d B Ec cc aeeaetemies ee cree peer ireunnen ok cane narerent NEN 1 67 Pulse Vue DEE 7 35 Ke 8 5 Update Firmware ccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeaeeesaes 9 2 Additional Firmware Tab 9 5 OT Eegeregie eebe
66. Once you are in the Configuration Tree menu you can use the and symbols to display or hide various options Double click the desired function in the Configuration Tree to display the associated screen Double clicking an icon is the same as selecting the menu bar or Toolbar button option If this is the first time that you have connected to the FloBoss refer to Section 6 4 Setting the Clock 1 6 6 Keystrokes If you are using the keyboard you may use the Alt key plus one or more letters to access menus Windows underlines the appropriate letter in the menus For example to access the Open File dialog box press Alt F and press O You may also use the Left Arrow lt and Right Arrow gt keys to highlight a menu bar item the help Status Line at the bottom of the screen provides a description of the menu and press the letter With a menu displayed you can highlight the desired item by using the Down Arrow 4 and Up Arrow keys or the mouse Once you have highlighted an item press Enter to activate the function To leave a menu or submenu press Esc You can then select another menu You can also access another menu using lt and gt The text scrolling keys are Page Up and Page Down To use the keyboard in configuration screens and dialog boxes press Tab to move in a predetermined sequence from one parameter field or button to the next The selected field or button becomes highlighted Fields unavailable for
67. Output AO Configuration Analog outputs are analog signals the FB107 generates to regulate equipment such as control valves or any device requiring proportional control Select Configure gt I O gt AO Points The Analog Output screen displays Analog Output Analog Outputs aS iil Taq Ag 1 Slot General Advanced Paint Number Alt Scanning Alarming Value oo o f Enabled C Enabled Units P C Disabled Ce Disabled Low Reading EU oOo High Reading EU 100 0 Active Alarms ja Copy Update w OF 7 Cancel Figure 7 14 Analog Output The Analog Output screen has two tabs Use each tab to configure a component of the output Use the General tab to set the basic parameters for the analog output point Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as on restart power settings and RBX alarming Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 3 1 AO General Tab The Analog Output screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to set the basic parameters for the analog output point 7 16 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Analog Output Analog Outouts eh Tag aot Slot General Advanced Foint Number scanning Alarming Value e Enabled C Enabled Sr Disabled Disabled hits Low Reading EU OO o o High Reading EU 100 0 Active Alarms
68. PID 1 Gas Flow F Tag Gas Flow General Inputs Outputs Advanced Primary 1 0 Definition Units Process Variable Undefined Pal Override Process Variable Undefined zl Output Output Point Ot Output Low Limit 0 0 Copy Output High Lirit 1 00 0 Auto Scan 2 Update Y OK A Cancel Apply Figure 7 47 PID Loop Inputs Outputs tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values 7 66 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Primary Process Click to select a process variable for the Primary Variable PID loop which displays onthe General tab Primary Units Sets the units for the Primary process variable Override Process Click to select a process variable for the Override Variable PID loop which displays on the General tab Override Units Sets the units for the Override process variable Output Point Click to select an analog output point for the loop Note This field displays only if you select Analog as an Output Type on the General tab DO Open Point Click to select a discrete open point and discrete DO Close Point close point for the loop These values respectively open or close the valve or other device You must configure these values as TDO Time Duration Output discrete output mode Note These fields display only if you select Discrete as an Output Type on the Gen
69. Panel a display only device that plugs into ROC300 via a parallel interface cable used to access information stored in the ROC Light Emitting Diode For sequential blending In multi component blending a load is the completed delivery of one component of a batch The completion of loading all components in the batch completes the batch delivery If the recipe only loads one component a load corresponds to a batch delivery For inline blending Each component of the blend is loaded simultaneously Depending on the blend ratio the low proportion components are loaded completely during the time that the high proportion component s are being loaded After loading of the highest proportion component has been terminated all component loads and the batch delivery are complete Also loading rack an installation of one or more loading arms or risers used to deliver liquid components to a tanker vehicle located on one or both sides of the island depending on the design of the island The related instruments and devices located in a meter stream that provide the liquid component loading capability to a mobile tanker vehicle Note The flow meter piping can also be installed horizontally if desired Also bay or lane one side of a loading island a position where a tanker vehicle parks for a loading operation One load spot can have one or more loading arms Also LOI the serial EIA 232 RS 232 port on the ROC through which local commun
70. Pressure Offset Figure 8 28 Set Zero Shift 3 The system then reflects this offset as an adjustment in calculations and lists this value on the AI Calibration Values screen Utilities gt AI Calibration Values Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Al Calibration Values Raw Value 1 57 EU Value 1 0 0 Raw value 2 1960 EU Value 2 50 0 Raw value 3 4295 EU Value 3 100 0 Raw Value 4 4295 EU Walue 4 100 0 Raw Wale 5 4295 EU Value 5 100 0 Press Effect 0 036 Timer 3559 Set EU Value 0 036 Mode T Manual EU 0 0362543 Type DU LC Update w OF A Cancel Figure 8 29 Set Zero Shift 8 3 Meter Values The Meter Values screen displays a variety of values from the orifice or turbine meter You can use these for diagnostics or monitoring Click Update to refresh the displayed values These may be used for diagnostics or monitoring 1 Select Meter gt Values The Meter Values screen displays Meter Values KIEA Tag Meier i 0 DP 13 62584 InH20 SP 14 49294 PSI Description Meter 3 Description TP 76 63955 Segr Current Values Factors Flow Rate Energy Rate hwPf 14 05805 Mu 10151 71 142667 1 CF Hour 146540800 0 BTU Hour CaFT 0 6069296 Reynolds 382467 7 3424 011 MCF Day 351 6 979 MMBTU Day Ey 1 069655 Fpb ho 0 v ogeei493 Fie bann m Accumulation Fpv 0 9998738 Fpwl H MCF MMBTU a Upstream Static Pressure 4 49568 PSIA T
71. RR e Number of Daily _ Indexes e 1 Input 2 Input History Segment History Point _ Returns 1 if Month Day not found Month Day Starting Periodic Index 1 Input 3 Input History Segment History Point Returns 1 if Month Day not found Month Day Stores value in RR Stores value in RR Issued Jan 08 FST Editor Stores value in RR B 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Name Description Arguments Results _ Indexes 2 Input Month Day _ Returns 1 if Month Day not _ found GTE Extract Time Element 1 Input DB Point or Constant History Stores value in RR Index Time in Seconds since Valid Time Elements 1 1 1970 0 Month 2 Input Time Element 1 Day 2 Year 3 Hour 4 Minute 5 Second B 5 Example FST This example FST shows how to configure history and then write an FST to submit data to the historical database 1 Access the History Setup screen Configure gt History Points The History Setup screen displays History Setup Archive Port FLW EW 1 MINT DY FLW NEW 1 PULACC AGANE 1 CUR SF AGANE 1 CUR TF FEWE 1 IMVADMuM FLWHEW 1 UCCTD Y FLW EM 1 FLO O FLW NEW 1 ENGDAY FST 1 A1 FST 1 A2 Undefined Foint Archive Type UL 1 Totalize Totalize Avg Flow Dependant Linear Avg Flow Dependant Linear 4g Flow Dependant Linear Totalize Accumulate D ay 2 A 4 5 b H D Accumulate
72. SE Contiguring FB107 Communications GE 3 9 3421 Comm Poms General T ab EE 3 10 34 2 COMM POMS Modem TaD EE 3 12 34 9 COMM PONS REX E KEE 3 13 8 0 CONMECHNG 10 GRIF BT EE 3 15 JSK BY g oh ele EE 3 15 29 2 Local POM LOW isecassehe diene chs a a ence a E anes he a lobe t aaauceoaeded 3 16 9 020 CONNEC loa IOBDOSS ee een 3 16 8 04 SUCCES SIU LOGON eebe EE 3 17 3 5 0 Disconnecting from a Eeer eege ee e 3 17 3 6 Troubleshooting Connection Error 3 18 Issued Jan 08 Contents lil ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 6 1 Troubleshooting ROCLINK 800 Communications cccccccceeceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeees 3 18 SE te 3 18 Sen TROGLINIK G00 SOCUrity EE 3 19 Ofe2 DEVIC Die EE 3 21 Chapter 4 The File Menu 4 1 AT NeW ee le Le DEET 4 2 Ale COMMOUPATOM Ee EE 4 2 4A k2 Duplicaing a CONNGUIATION scarna o antieauae set ean ueeaeeates 4 2 4 1 3 Creating a New Configuration ie 4 3 4 2 Opening a Configuration H TEE 4 6 4 3 Downloading a Configuration ME 4 6 dad Sang AROC TE 4 7 e E le e ER Geleet te le EE 4 7 Aol E aile le le EE 4 7 40 PINa E E 4 9 Ast lge EE 4 9 48 Recent GE 4 10 BO ee EE 4 10 EH Eege 4 10 Chapter 5 The View Menu 5 1 Ot EIERE Muda an Makan ie en cle cent ete anon uae 5 2 OZ EFMRODOM EE 5 2 SS Cheating Ihe Eege dE eebe 5 2 52 2 VIEWING Re CEET 5 3 Deo ie leie Men EE 5 6 5 3 1 Creating a Calibration Report asierea ea a EE a eaaa a len
73. Select the Scale Values tab The Scale Values screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 87 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Modbus Configuration Integer Scale Float Scale 1 Float Scale H2 Float Scale 3 Float Scale 4 Float Scale 5 Float Scale 6 Float Scale 7 Float Scale 6 Low Value High Value 035 III ees es Cem Gem es Gem es es es Update vw OK A Cancel Figure 7 57 Modbus Configuration Scale Values tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Low Value and High Value Description Sets values the system uses to scale analog I O to integer values with an implied decimal point The Low Value represents the lowest integer value and the High Value represents the highest integer value used the scale the data The High Value and Low Value fields are signed integers and can range from 32768 to 32767 Float Scale 7 88 Configure Menu Scales data in conjunction with the Low and High Integer Scale values Provide high and low values for each float scale For host systems that do not accept floating point numbers you can specify eight sets of floating point ranges for values This allows the host to read and set floating point values such as PID setpoints softpoint values and flow values as integer values The system converts floating point values to integers by configuring a register or range of registers with
74. TLP value under which the frame displays Until that value occurs the frame does not appear on the custom display A We strongly suggest prior experience in Visual Basic programming if you Caution want to create display element expressions To add an expression 1 Click an object s property that includes Expression as an option 2 Click Ww and select Expression 3 Click which displays as part of the Expression option The Expression Builder screen displays Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 39 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 WW Expression Builder Expression ILP akakaa lt lt gt gt AND OR NOT A8 Conversion Error Handling Date Time Inspection Lookup Reference Bit bit number value Returns a Boolean value indicating whether bit number 0 15 in value is set Evaluate Result Y OK X Cancel Figure 5 23 Expression Builder Note If you are skilled in Visual Basic or already know the specific expression you want to add you can enter the desired expression directly in the upper Expression box on this screen 4 Build an expression using the buttons immediately under the Expression box and or the three boxes in the center of the screen Click Add to include each expression component to the screen Note Based on your selected expression category ROCLINK 800 changes the options displayed in the other two boxes to help you in the building process Additionally ROCLINK 800 dis
75. This read only field shows the status of the selected activity 3 Proceed to Section 6 10 3 Flags Advanced Tab Reset Switch The CPU module provides a reset RST switch which you can use to restart the FB107 from the boot block of flash memory essentially a cold start rather than from RAM a warm start However a CPU based reset reconfigures all comm ports back to their factory defaults shuts off all user programs and FSTs All other data remains intact Note Performing a reset using the CPU module s RST switch reloads the factory default settings for the communication ports and disables all FSTs and user programs 6 16 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 6 10 2 Returning a Device to Factory Default Settings Sometimes you may find it necessary to return a device to its original factory default settings Use the following procedure to clear all saved restart configuration data contained in flash memory retaining only the factory defaults 1 2 7 Select ROC gt Flags Click Clear in the Flash Memory frame ROCLINK 800 displays a verification dialog box Click Yes ROCLINK 800 displays a completed dialog box when the process completes Click OK Click Cold Start amp Clear All to perform a cold start ROCLINK 800 displays a verification dialog box Click Yes ROCLINK 800 displays a dialog box when the process completes Click OK Note You may need to re connect as the factor
76. USB key you install as License Key 1 and the second USB key you install as License Key 2 2 Select Utilities gt License Key Administrator gt Transfer Between Keys from the ROCLINK 800 menu bar The Transfer Licenses Between Keys screen displays Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Transfer Licenses Between KEYS License Key 1 Serial Number TESTI 2 Time Created pplication Name VYendorID YendorName App Code Version Expiration 01 16 2007 11 16 59 Props Example 27 Vendor Name 1 1 0 0 No Expiration Connect to License Key Move GR KEY 2 to License Key2 Serial Number TEST 456 Time Created Application Name 01 22 2007 11 40 25 Props Example 12345 D No Expiration 01 22 2007 11 40 30 Flow Example 12345 D No Expiration F 12345 7 Cond Orifice 12345 Figure 9 11 Transfer Licenses Between Keys This screen has two sections The upper portion License Key 1 shows any software licenses on the first license key The lower portion License Key 2 shows any software licenses on the second license key 3 Select a license to transfer in this case APWS 1997 on License Key 2 4 Click Move License from License Key 2 to License Key 1 ROCLINK 800 Since this license actually has three distinct licenses as shown in the Quantity field ROCLINK 800 displays a dialog box you use to indicate the number of licenses to transfer Note ROCLINK 800 relabels this button if you select a li
77. Use the Alarms tab to set alarm parameters for the meter Note After you configure a meter and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save the configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold start Meter Setup General Tab Use the General tab to define basic parameters for the meter The General tab displays when you first access the Meter Setup screen Meter Menu 8 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Meter Setup Meter Number Meter Tag Meter 2 General Inputs Advanced Fluid Properties Sampler Calibration Factors Alarms Meter Description Meter 2 Description Calculation Standard Type of Units Flow Alarming AGA3 92 Volume C Enabled C AGA 96 C Mass Disabled C 1 05167 2003 e Integral Multiplier Period IMP i 0 Minutes Averaging Technique Flow Dependent Linear C Flow Dependent Formulaic Flow Weighted Linear C Flow Weighted Formulaic Active Flow Alarms ZUpdate Y ok X Cancel Figure 8 3 Meter Setup General Tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Meter Number Selects the number of the meter to be configured Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Meter Tag Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the meter Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Meter Description Sets
78. a nee 5 18 KI 5 19 ODICCIS EE 5 23 VIEWING EE 5 18 Customer Name 6 7 Cycle TIME ainean a aa 7 31 D Bally ISTOT EE 5 8 Daily Hist ry SIZO rodie na 7 74 Dally IMO EE 7 94 R I HL 3 10 DADON e 7 108 R I 6 3 Day of Week DWK and Minutes Since Midnight VINO Nice schte arene said A eanceebnet B 20 Dead Weight Gravitational Correction 8 16 8 17 Deadband cesses 7 15 7 40 7 56 8 18 RIVE 3 14 DI GICLS SUC ME B 11 Deleting Al RT le EEN 2 6 PVCS EE 2 5 EE eee ete Mamet eee t B 10 RO EE 2 5 Derivative Gamm 7 66 Description ccceeee eee 3 8 6 9 7 3 7 43 7 58 Desktop Shortcut ise cxcrevs nscedsencitedeesd ecbeeenniedeeat 1 3 Device A ele We Le EE 2 6 Address for ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 3 BI re BEE 2 5 Deleting All EEN 2 6 DIECON EE 2 1 3 15 Group for ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 3 Jeteie le a EE 6 4 Momor ioira ee aE 6 4 FROMAINUING NEE 2 ROC Intormatnon nnn 6 4 PROC ROO eebe eebe 3 15 ROO WEEN 2 1 2 4 SECUN oie nee Meakin 3 21 Device Address ROCLINK 800 CGommupnicatons 3 3 Device LDrechorn kA 3 15 Device Group ROCLINK 800 CGommupnicatons 3 3 Device Information See ROC Information ce ceee cesses eee es 6 4 Device barameier 1 92 Device root BackUPS uaea a eaceen cea eee 2 4 Device Security leie 3 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 DI Discrete Input 7 20 Advanced Tab 1 23 ei EINEN e WEE 7 25 General PAD EE 7 21 Riets 6 13 IEN 8 8 Differential Pressure
79. a serial port COM port For successful communications the baud rate you set here must match the baud rate on the PC The default value is 19200 Note This field is available only if you select the Comm Port option Modem Indicates the modem ROCLINK 800 uses Click w to list all available modems Only the modems defined in the Windows Control Panel display here Ensure that the modem you select is properly set up Note This field is available only if you selected the Modem option Phone Number Sets the telephone number for the modem ROCLINK 800 uses If you select Modem in the Use field enter the phone number of the device ROCLINK 800 dials Note This field is available only if you selected the Modem option Override Default Indicates that ROCLINK 800 should use an override TAPI Init String initialization string configuration When you select this optoin you must provide an override initialization string Note This field is available only if you selected the Modem option IP Address Indicates the IP address for the TCP IP connection Note This field is available only if you selected the eet OPN O o o o Port Number Indicates the port for the TCP IP connection Note This field is available only if you selected the TCP IP option 3 4 Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 2 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab on the ROCLINK 800 Com
80. also those values from one FST to another For example an FST can write values to the registers and also read the values stored in the FST Register storage points Registers may be read from or written to any FST configured for the FloBoss 2 Click Apply if you changed any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 9 1 2 FST Registers Advanced Tab 7 9 1 2 FST Registers Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to add timers execution controls and other features to the FSTs 7 58 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advance screen displays FST Registers EST 1 FST 1 ll Tag FST 8 Timer 1 Mise 1 0 Execution Delay Timer 2 Mise 2 0 0 Secs Timer 3 Mise 372 p Result Register Timer 4 Misc 4 0 0 0 Mesg 1 Compare Flag Mesg 2 Pe D Code Size E Bytes Code Pointer Byte 0 Copy Update Y OK AS Cancel Figure 7 43 FST Registers Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Timer 1 through 4 Sets up to four countdown timers that signal certain periods or times have elapsed You set the time and the FST updates the time These four timers when set to values greater than 0 decrement by 1 every cycle time The scan period determines the cycle times Misc 1 through 4 Sets up to four unsigned 8 bit integers with valid values from 0 to 255 the FST can use
81. an area in the host must have the same group Valid values are 1 to 255 Note To avoid communications problems do not use 240 With ROC Protocol the values in the Address and Group fields must match the address defined in the destination device for communications to work Sets the hour at which the system totals values for a single day of production clears accumulators and logs data to the Daily History database The contract hour is based on a 24 hour clock using 0 as the midnight hour ROC Menu 6 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Force End of Day FST Execution Description Logs when you select this check box and click Apply the current day and its hourly values into memory for all historical data with the exception of station totals This field also resets the daily and hourly accumulator Note This option uses of the 35 possible slots for storing daily data Sets the engineering units of measure If you select Metric the AGA calculations expect all input in the terms of the indicated units such as kPa for static pressure input The system expresses calculation results in the selected units Specifies how many FST instructions can be executed per FST execution cycle Execution period is based on system scan speed The default number of instructions is 20 Under the default value an FST with 30 sequential instructions runs in two execution periods with 20 instructions in the first cycle and 10 in
82. be sufficient for dial up modems and EIA 232 RS 232 connections For older radios you may need to set this value to 0 2 seconds For newer radios 0 02 seconds should be sufficient Key Off Delay Sets in seconds the amount of time ROCLINK 800 waits after transmitting a message before turning off the ready to send RTS signal The default is 0 You can change this value to optimize communications The default value should be sufficient for dial up modems and EIA 232 RS 232 connections For radios a value of 0 01 may be appropriate Note These variables may change based on your situation These are general values which you need to assess for each circumstance Valid Receive Ctr Sets the number of valid messages received by the FloBoss on this communication port This counter can be preset to a value or cleared Idle Time Sets in milliseconds the amount of time the FloBoss waits between communication events Communications and Security 3 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 4 2 Comm Ports Modem Tab Use the Modem tab on the Comm Ports screen to configure the device s modem communication ports Comm Ports 1 Local Port v Tag Local Port Modem Type fe None C External E Connect Time 60 0 Seconds Disconnect Time 60 0 Seconds Inactivity Time 600 0 Seconds Config Command ATHOEOVO Connect Command ATDT lt number gt Modem Status OK ES Copy Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 3 5 Com
83. beginning of the next Note If you select Override Control both loops executed in this time period Actual Period This read only field shows the actual amount of time in seconds from the beginning of the last execution of the loop to the beginning of the current execution of the loop Halt PID On Reset Sets the status of the PID control loop following a power restart or a warm start Valid values are Enabled activate the PID loop or Disabled do not activate the PID loop Primary Integral Sets a window around the setpoint for the Primary Deadband PID When the process variable is within this window the system does not recalculate a change in output If you enter 5 the deadband is a region of 5 units above and 5 units below the setpoint in which the process variable can move without affecting the 7 68 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 Field Primary SP Ramp Rate Override Integral Deadband Override SP Ramp Rate Threshold Manual Tracking ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets the maximum rate at which the Primary PID setpoint can ramp to a new value Maximum rate is in EU per minute where engineering units are the units of the process variable Sets a window around the setpoint for the Override PID When the process variable is within this window the system does not recalculate a change in output If you enter 5 the deadband is a region of 5 units above and 5 units be
84. configure the Modbus History complete the History Setup screen Configure gt History Points 1 Select Configure gt MODBUS gt History The Modbus History Table screen displays Modbus History Table EFM Modbus Daily Index ried Hourly Index D Extended Index H be C Disabled Events Alarmes E Current Date 7046 Current Time 7047 f Enabled Register Starting History Ending History Number Foint Foint Archive Type E OU Si Cell EN Extended Extended Extended Extended Extended m m m m m Daily C Extended amp s CH 4 Hourly Daily Hourly Daily D Hourly Daily dch O Hourly Daily D ce 4 Hourly 7 Extended Extended Extended Extended Hourly Daily dh D Hourly Daily O Cc 4 Hourly Daily m m m Hourly 7 Daily amp E TEELELTETL CECCOTTI ECCE o Hourly Daily Update vw OK 8 Cancel Figure 7 59 Modbus History Table i 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Daily Index Sets the register number to acquire daily index Hourly Index Sets the register number to acquire hourly index Extended Index Sets the register number to acquire extended history values The default is 7162 Events Alarms Sets the register number to acquire the most current ane alatlogienity The gerautis ga Current Date Sets the register number to acquire th
85. defined on the Inputs Outputs tab Note If you select Primary Only as a Control Type the Override Process Variable field does not display Likewise if you select Override Only as a Control Type the Primary Process Variable field does not display This read only field shows the calculated change in output from the associated loop You define these values on the Inputs Outputs tab Note If you select Primary Only as a Control Type the Override Output Change field does not display Likewise if you select Override Only as a Control Type the Primary Output Change field does not display This read only field shows for Auto Mode the current output of the PID Loop Note In Manual Mode enter a value at which the output should remain Sets the control output for the Override Type Valid values are High system selects as the control output the higher of the Primary Output Change value or the Override Output Change value or Low system selects as the control output the lesser of the Primary Output Change value or the Override Output Change value Sets parameters the system uses to tune each PID loop Note The Primary Tuning fields do not display if you choose Override Only as a Control Type Likewise the Override Tuning fields do not display if you choose Primary Only as a Control Type Sets proportional gain as the ratio of the change in output to the change in the error Typically calculated as either Primary Proc
86. definition Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface Integrity indicates the point is out of the user defined or default range For example when an Al is open the actual AD count is 0 but the default range is 643 to 3220 or when a module was installed and improperly removed or loss of communications occurred Active Alarms This read only field shows any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear If Alarming is Disabled the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 7 2 Analog Input Al Configuration Analog inputs are analog signals that measurement devices such as pressure and temperature transmitters including RTD probes and pressure sensors generate inputs for the FloBoss 107 DVS points Differential Pressure and Static Pressure are visible once you connect a DVS sensor Select Configure gt I O gt AI Points The Analog Input screen displays 7 6 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Analog Input Analog Inputs se an e Tag RTO General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms Point Number Wi Value OO Scanning Alarming Units DegreesF f Enabled f Enabled Scan Pe
87. file or go on line with an FB107 the Configuration Tree appears on the left hand side of the screen The tree hierarchically displays the parts of a configuration such as I O Meter Runs and History that you can change Option Modules Oo Control 2 n On Line Com FB107 Modules o ZS CPU SENSOR Not Installed LED Controller Module Information SLOT 0 On Board 6 Foint 10 SLOT 1 AS 232 8 SLOT 2 MS Module SLOT 3 Not Installed Wes SLOT 4 Ausillary Got 10 CG SLOT 5 Not Installed CG SLOT 6 Not Installed Cl SLOT Not Installed Fall AN Analog Input his Analog Output H Discrete Output WL Pulse Input I 4 Fl 2 Slot4 MG Sensor Mf Soft Point amp Control H Meter System History User Program SS User Display Figure 1 4 Configuration Tree Description a a aare e moate E EE Displays the FST and PID options enabled on the ROC gt Information screen Mieieallavaiablemetere 00000 Displays ROC gt Information system folders Comm Port ee a eae ee tee History User Programs Displays all installed user programs Issued Jan 08 Introduction 1 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 User Display Accesses custom displays stored in the FB107 The FB107 can store a maximum of 40 displays including both custom user displays and user program displays From the Configuration Tree you may change the configuration or monitor current operations
88. four available Timers for any of the available FSTs ARGUMENT 1 specifies the number of the Timer to set and ARGUMENT2 specifies the number of intervals to which the Timer is set Check Timer CT When executing a loop repeatedly in an FST it is recommended a timer CT be included so the loop executes only once every time interval This prevents the loop from executing several times within the allotted task period eliminating unnecessary calculations that could deprive time from other tasks Wait WT The Wait WT command imposes a delay entered in seconds and tenths of seconds before executing the next command For example entering a value of 0 1 implies a 100 millisecond delay and a value of 1 0 implies a one second delay Day of Week DWK These commands are written to the Results Register and Minutes Since For DWK 1 Sunday through 7 Saturday Midnight MND Table B 14 FST Time Related Commands Name Description Arguments Results ST Get Timer for specified FST with 1 Output FST Point FST Timer ARG1 ARG2 value in 100 mSec intervals Database Value RR out RR in 2 Input Database or SVD out SVD in Constant Value eeseses lt ititststS CT Check Timer for specified FST with 1 Input FST Point Database If FST Timer ARG1 0 value in 100 mSec intervals Value continue to next command 2 LABEL Otherwise Goto ARG2 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in WT Wait suspend FST until specified
89. from a USB key a moveable license Instead you can transfer it from the FB107 back onto a USB key Refer to Section 9 2 4 Transferring Licenses However you can remove a software license you have installed from a string Remember that the license you installed on the FB107 is actually a copy of the original license which still resides on your PC Additionally a USB key can contain up to 255 separate iterations of a license A string based license has no limit on the number of reuses To remove a license 1 Select Utilities gt License Key Administrator gt Transfer Between Device and Key from the ROCLINK 800 menu bar The Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key screen displays Review the Transfer Mode field at the top of the screen and select a permanent license here V Cone Flow Calc Note that ROCLINK 800 activates the Remove button Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY Licenses on DEVICE Teen a a Time Created 2 V Cone Flow Calc A No Expiration 04 09 2007 11 44 41 4M lIAPWS 1997 Sample Vendor 3 No Expiration 0172272007 11 40 35 AM Connect to KEY Move to KEY Add License Remove Licenses on KEY Time Created pplication Name Yendor ID Yendor Name App Code Version Expiration 1 01 22 2007 11 40 25 AM Props Example Sample Y endor 2 01 22 2007 11 40 30 AM Flow Example Sample Yendor No Expiration No Expiration No Expi
90. installed in the new configuration Valid values are None a Dual Variable Sensor DVS or Pulse Input Module PIM 4 Once you have completed the configuration click Start The Save As dialog box displays 5 Enter a file name for the configuration file Configuration files for ROCLINK 800 use the extension 800 6 Click Save ROCLINK 800 saves the new configuration file and displays the following dialog ROCLINK 800 New configuration file C Program Files ROCLINKS00 Displays Test042407 300 created and initialized Do you want to open the new configuration file 7 Click No to save the new configuration file and return to the New Configuration Issued Jan 08 File screen File Menu 4 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 4 2 Opening a Configuration File Use the Open option to open an existing configuration file either on line from a FloBoss or off line from the PC s hard drive or disk You use the Save Configuration function to create configuration files see Section 4 1 3 Creating a New Configuration File To open a configuration file 1 4 Establish an on line connection to the FloBoss if opening a file on line Select File gt Open The Open dialog box displays Select the configuration file name ROCLINK 800 files have the extension 800 Alter the parameters and point assignments as necessary Once you open the configuration file it automatically becomes the active configura
91. menu options to set system information for the FloBoss 0 On Line Com ER Su ere Configure Meter Direct Connect Disconnect e RI les Collect Data Clock d security Comm Ports m Memory d Information Proc H Dep 395 Figure 6 1 Collect Device Data In This Chapter 6 1 Direct COMM CU EE 6 1 SC 8 018 E S E 6 2 6 3 Collecting ROG RE 6 2 64 Setting th e ee 6 3 EECHELEN 6 3 60 ROC COMM POMS E 6 4 6 7 ROC Device Memory ccccccssccccssseeecceeseeecseseeeceeueessseseesssaneees 6 4 6 8 Configuring Device Information cccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeees 6 4 6 8 1 Device Information General Tab 6 5 6 8 2 Device Information Points Tab 6 6 6 8 3 Device Information Other Information Tab 6 7 6 8 4 Device Information Revision Info Tab 6 8 6 9 CPU JIntommaton 6 8 6 9 1 CPU Information General Tab 6 8 6 9 2 CPU Information Advanced Tab 6 10 6 9 3 CPU Information I O Points Tab 6 11 6 9 4 CPU Information Meter Points Tab 6 12 6 9 5 CPU Information Diagnostic Tab 6 13 E FAO S en 6 14 6 10 1 Flags General Tab 6 14 6 10 2 Returning a Device to Factory Default Settings 6 17 6 10 3 Flags Advanced Tab 6 17 6 1 Direct Connect Use this option to connect to the FB107 via the LOI port You can also directly connect to the FB107 by clicking the Direct Connect icon St on the ROCLINK 800 menu bar Issued Jan 08 ROC Menu 6 1 ROCLINK 800 Us
92. must be unique and is case sensitive 2 Enter four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 to define the operator password More than one user can have the same password 3 Enter the desired access level for the user 0 is the lowest least inclusive access level and allows access to the fewest number of screens 5 is the highest most inclusive access level and alows Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 access to all screens Each access level permits access to screens at that level and any inherited from lower access levels For example an operator ID with Access Level 3 can access screens with levels O 1 2 and 3 Refer to Security Access Levels Security Access Table 3 2 lists the system screens and their system assigned security Levels access levels The Menu Options focus on the activity while you use the Access Levels to increase or decrease responsibility levels within the Menu Options If you enable security on any port at least one operator ID must have the highest level of security level 5 ROCLINK 800 rejects login requests if access levels are greater than device security Menu ROC Utilities Utilities Utilities Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure Configure 1 0 gt MVS Sensor _V O gt PI Points Configure Configure LCD User List Modbus gt Configuration Configure Configure Configure E EE E eee
93. of the component meter Refers either to the process of setting up the software for a given system or the result of performing this process The configuration activity includes editing the database building schematic displays and reports and defining user calculations Typically the software set up of a device that can often be defined and changed Can also mean the hardware assembly scheme In ROCLINK 800 the graphical display that appears when a configuration file opens also Directory Tree It is a hierarchical branching tree style method for navigating within the configuration screens Central Processing Unit Cyclical Redundancy Check error checking The amount of signal that crosses over between the receive and transmit pairs and signal attenuation which is the amount of signal loss encountered on the Ethernet segment Canadian Standards Association See http www csa ca Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Clear to Send modem communications signal Digital to Analog signal conversion Database Glossary Issued Jan 08 dB DCD DCE Deadband Device Directory DI Discrete DMM DO Download DP DSR DTE DTR Duty Cycle DVM DVS EDS EEPROM EFM EIA 232 RS 232 EIA 422 RS 422 EIA 485 RS 485 EMF EMI ESD EU FCC Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Decibel A unit for expressing the ratio of the magnitudes of two electric signals on
94. parameters starting at FST Register 1 Register 109 Register 1 of FST Point Number 1 Register 110 Register 2 of FST Point Number 1 Register 111 Register 3 of FST Point Number 1 Register 112 Register 4 of FST Point Number 1 Register 113 Register 5 of FST Point Number 1 Register 114 Register 6 of FST Point Number 1 Use conversion code 1 Float to Integer Float Scale 1 to convert the floating point value to an integer before the response message returns to the host Once you map a register you can reference it in any Modbus request providing the data type of the TLP is appropriate for the Function Code Note If the native FloBoss data type does not meet the requirements of the Modbus host device conversion codes are available to convert the data to the required data type Refer to Section 7 12 6 Modbus Conversion Codes When a device receives a Modbus request it searches for the referenced register s If it finds a register number match it builds a response based on the device point type and parameter configured in the table If the device cannot find a register number match it returns an error message 1 Select Configure gt MODBUS gt Registers The Modbus Registers screen displays 7 90 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Modbus Registers Table 1 sl Tag i Map 1 1070 1070 DOU Al2 STATUS E Paint All Comm Ports ku ege es fo All Comm Ports o 0 Undefined
95. probe See Section 8 2 2 Calibrating an Input 10 Click Done The Meter Calibration screen displays Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 2 2 Calibrating an Input AN Caution f you have a Multi Variable Sensor MVS refer to the Sensor Calibration section in the FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 for the recommended way to remove restore the MVS from to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may cause sensor damage If you are calibrating a pressure input isolate the sensor from the process Set up the pressure calibrator and make the necessary connections to the sensor If you are calibrating a temperature input disconnect the RTD sensor and connect a decade box or comparable equipment to the FB107 s RTD terminals Following verification you may determine that the input needs to calibrated A standard calibration requires you to define a zero and a span point you can also define up to three midpoints which can represent 25 50 and 75 of the span system retains the previous calibration settings but logs the event in the event log To calibrate an input in this example the static pressure input 1 Select Meter gt Calibration The Calibration screen displays 2 Select a meter input to calibrate Note ROCLINK 800 retains or removes the appropriate inputs from the Meter Calibration screen The following example calibrates a stat
96. r Data Bits stop Bits e None a je Even e H LE Odd Port Owner e ROC Modbus Slave Protocol Modbus Master Seconds Idle Time 30 Millisecands Bacopy ease Update Y OK X Cancel e A Figure 3 4 Comm Port General tab Field Comm Ports Stop Bits 3 10 Communications and Security Description Indicates the specific comm port to be configured Click w to display all valid selections Sets in bits per second the transmit and receive data baud rate for the comm port Indicates whether the communications controller performs parity checks and if selected the parity value odd or even Sets the number of data bits contained in an asynchronous byte or character The default is 8 Sets the number of stop bits contained in an asynchronous byte or character The default is 1 Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Port Owner Sets the communications protocol this port uses Valid values are ROC Modbus Slave Protocol which configures the port to automatically switch between Modbus and ROC Protocol messages and Modbus Master which configures the port to allow the FB107 to poll Modbus devices Key On Delay Sets in seconds the amount of time ROCLINK 800 waits after turning on the ready to send RTS signal before beginning transmission The default is 0 You can change this value to optimize communications The default value should
97. requirements Bytes sent are shown in black bytes received are shown in red Data received since the last good response and before a request are shown in aqua Right click on the display a menu that allows you to Copy highlighted data Clear All data or Unselect You can then paste copied data into a file for analysis me ROC RA SCO Cermuriceliens Mon lo RENE 12940 Figure 9 30 Communications Monitor Utilities Menu 9 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 10 The Tools Menu Use the Tools menu option to configure how your TLP options display and to customize your toolbars Options i Figure 10 1 Tools Menu In This Chapter 10 1 OS e nt EE 10 1 102 OPI E 10 1 10 1 Customize This ROCLINK 800 menu option is currently unavailable 10 2 Options ROCLINK 800 enables you to display TLP selections as either text or numbers see Figure 10 2 Select TLP Select TLP Point Type Logical Number Parameter Point Type Logical Number Parameter Undefined PI 1 SlotO Point Tag ID Undefined PIN 13 PI 1 Slot Point Tag ID 1 Discrete Inputs F PI 2 SlotO Units 1 Discrete Inputs PIN A14 PI 2 Slot0 nits 2 Discrete Outputs PI 1 Slot2 Rate Flag 2 Discrete Outputs PIN B13 PI 1 Slot2 Rate Flag 3 Analog Inputs Pl 2 Slot2 Hate Period 3 Analog Inputs PIN B14 PI 2 Slot2 Rate Period 4 Analog Outputs PI 1 Slot4
98. sample without discarding any samples by first multiplying the sample by a flow value square root of the differential pressure measured during the sample period and then calculates a linear average by dividing the sum of the flow weighted sample by the sum of the flow values This results in minute and hourly _ values t that are more reflective of short periods of high flow e Combines the flow weighting action with the formulaic averaging technique both of which were described previously Averages one second samples to compute minute periodic and daily values SAUSNERSESEAERSESEAESSESESESESEAOESESERSESESEEOESERUEOESERUESESESUESESESUSNESERUREEAOROESERORSESEESESESESSESESEESESESUESESESOESESESSESESUSUESESEOESESUESESOSUSSESOSUESESOSUSSESOSUSSESOSUSEESUSUSHOSOSESHOESENSHOESESERRSESESOESESUESESERESSESESUESESERESESESUESER TTT Sums one second samples of a per second rate value over the logging interval to compute the archived value Select this archive type when the _ History P Point being archived is a rate in EUs second Converts the one second samples ofa per minute rate value to a per E second rate and sums them over the logging interval to compute the archived value Select this archive type when the History Point being archived is a rate in _ EUs minute Converts the Se second samples are 3 er hour anes See SH oer ee second rate and sums them over the logging interval to compute the archived value Select this arch
99. scanning 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 3 2 AO Advanced Tab 7 3 2 AO Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as resetting and RBX Alarming for the analog output 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays 7 18 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Analog Output Analog Outputs 1 AQ 1 Go Tag AD 1 Glo Raw D A Output 0 Adjusted Val 0 Adjusted DAS 100 3250 RBs Alarming Value on Power Reset C Low EW fe Retain Last alue Disabled C On Alarm Clear O On Alarm Set io 0n Alarm Set and Clear ZlUpdate Y OK X Cancel Oh Figure 7 16 AO Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Raw D A Input This read only field shows the current counts written to the digital to analog converter The D A value set to the AO is the raw D A output The default value is Adjusted D A 0 Sets the count the digital to analog converter uses for zero percent output This value is also used to scale the output to engineering units The default is Adjusted D A 100 Sets the count decoded by the digital to analog converter for 100 percent output This value is also used to scale the output to engineering units The B PE a e Value on Power Sets what value the system uses on a power restart Reset or a warm start Valid values are Low EU sets
100. should automatically create a desktop shortcut on your computer To manually create a desktop shortcut 1 Double click the My Computer icon Issued Jan 08 Introduction 1 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Navigate to the C Program Files ROCLINK800 folder or the folder where you installed ROCLINK 800 3 Right click the ROCLINK exe file 4 Select Send To and Desktop from the drop down menu 5 The icon appears on your desktop 1 4 2 Un installing ROCLINK 800 To remove ROCLINK 800 from your PC Click the Windows Start button Select Settings gt Control Panel Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select ROCLINK 800 Click Add Remove Follow the displayed instructions 2 0 S SY 1 5 Starting ROCLINK 800 Software To use ROCLINK 800 to configure a hardware device you must first properly connect the device to power Refer to the appropriate hardware instruction manual You must also connect the PC to the device s Local Operator Interface LOD serial or modem port To run ROCLINK 800 perform one of the following steps Double click the Desktop Shortcut Select Start gt Programs gt ROCLINK 800 gt ROCLINK 800 The software loads and initializes 1 4 Introduction Issued Jan 08 1 5 1 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Logging On To log on to ROCLINK 800 software 1 Connect the FB107 to the Local Operator Interface LOI Local Port and launch ROCLINK 800 ROCLINK 8
101. signal A device that uses Pitot tubes to measure the gas flow rate within a pipeline The gas volume is calculated from the difference between the flowing pressure and the static pressure of the gas Absolute Pressure American Petroleum Institute See http www api org A user defined grouping of database entities A movable pipe or hose assembly used at a tanker truck loading island also swing arm loading arm The arm can be designed for either top loading or bottom loading to the tanker compartments A swing arm can be positioned to load at either side of the loading island or the parked state American National Standard Code for Information Interchange A parameter that provides information about an aspect of a database point For example the alarm attribute is an attribute that uniquely identifies the configured value of an alarm A preset quantity based product delivery or blended component delivery of a single recipe A product stream blended of both gasoline and ethanol Glossary A 1 Blending BMV BPS BTU Built in I O CID2 CF CMOS Coil COL COM COMM Comm Module Component Configuration Configuration Tree CPU CRC Crosstalk CSA CSMA CD CTS D A DB A 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 The process of mixing two or more liquid components to form a composite delivered stream The DL8000 controls blending based on a predetermined recipe by either the sequential automatic or
102. specified device You can also configure a discrete output as latched momentary toggle Timed Duration Output TDO and TDO toggle Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points The Discrete Output screen displays 7 26 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Discrete Output Discrete Outputs misec Ei 3 Tag Do Glo General Advanced TOO Parameters Alarms Point Mumber SE State Momentary e On tC Off fa e OOUT Type Scanning Alarming Latched e Toggle Enabled Enabled C Time Duration TOO Toggle Disabled Disabled Active Alarms D ZlUpdate OK X Cancel Figure 7 21 Discrete Output The Discrete Output screen has four tabs Use each tab to configure a component of the output Use the General tab to set the basic parameters for the DO point Use the Advanced tab to configure accumulated value and state for reset for the selected DO Use the TDO Parameters tab to configure time duration parameters Note This tab does not display if you choose Latched in the DOUT Type field on the General tab Use the Alarms tab to set the alarm parameters for the DO point Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 5 1 DO General Tab The Discrete Output screen initially displays the General tab Use t
103. tab The Advanced screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Discrete Input Discrete Inputs 1 DI1 Slots e Filter Intervals fe 0 1 Seconds Filter Accumulated value l On Counter Off Counter 15 0 Seconds Tag D 1 Slots Input fe Mormal 0 Inverted lUpdate Y Ok X Cancel Figure 7 19 DI Advanced tab 2 Review the following field for your organization s values Field Filter Intervals 7 24 Configure Menu Description Sets with the Filter parameter the amount of time that the discrete input must remain in the On high state before it is recognized as such Valid values are 0 1 Seconds and 15 0 Seconds Enter the Filter value as a number from 0 to 255 the Filter Intervals selection determines the time basis The discrete input returns to the Off state immediately upon detection of the On to Off transition there is no filtering for this transition Sets the state of the input Valid values are Normal field input operates normally so that On is On or Inverted inverts the field input in the Status field so that On becomes Off and vice versa In the Inverted state an open circuit in the field would then be indicated as On in the Status field and closed contacts would be indicated as Off Sets in conjunction with the Filter Intervals field the amount of time that the discrete input must remain in the On high state bef
104. the Conversion field set in the Modbus Registers definition configuration to a Convert Code from 1 to 8 The system uses the following equations to convert floating point values to integers Float Range High Value Float Scale Low Value Float Scale for example 100 0 120 0 20 0 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Integer Range High Value Integer Scale Low Value Integer Scale for example 6000 7000 1000 Adjusted Reading Float Reading Low Value Float Scale for example 50 0 70 0 20 0 Integer Integer Range x Adjusted Reading Float Range Low Integer Scale for example 3500 6000 x 50 0 100 0 1000 The system uses the following equations to convert integers to floating point values Float Range High Value Float Scale Low Value Float Scale for example 100 0 120 0 20 0 Integer Range High Value Integer Scale Low Value Integer Scale for example 6000 7000 1000 Adjusted Integer Integer Sent Low Value Integer Scale for example 3000 4000 1000 Float Value Adjusted Integer x Float Range Integer Range Low Float Scale for example 70 0 3000 x 100 6000 20 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 12 4 Modbus Registers 7 12 4 Modbus Registers Point Indexing Issued Jan 08 Example Use Modbus Register tables to map Modbus registers to specif
105. the MCU Figure 7 2 shows the positions of point numbers on the racks Hr ATAI4 CPU o 1 B1 B8 Com I O or Smart Module 2 B9 B16 Com I O or Smart Module 3 G WO or Smart Module _ 4 C9 16 VO or Smart Module 5 D1 D8 VOorSmart Module 6 D9 D16 I O or Smart Module TI M SmartModule 7 B1 B8 1O if no I O in slot 1 Slot 1 or 2 Slot 3 4 5 or 6 Com I O or Smart I O or Smart Slot 7 Slot 0 CPU UO or Smart Figure 7 2 FloBoss 107 I O Module Racks 1 2 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 7 1 1 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note Slot 1 and Slot 7 share the I O file rack address The address of slot 1 B1 B8 is valid as long as no I O module is installed in slot 7 The address of slot 7 B1 B8 is valid as long as no I O module is installed in slot 1 You can configure many items for the I O points in the FloBoss 107 For more information on the types of I O available and their functions refer to the FloBoss 107 Flow Manager Instruction Manual Form A6206 Note You may also refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface and Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module in this manual The graphical interface display shows the current settings of the point including alarms and integrity I O Interface General Tab You can navigate FloBoss 107 options using the I O menu options or by clicking on the FloBoss 107 graphic and selecting a tab or button The graph
106. the Start Register and Ending Register numbers 400 through 700 End Register Sets the last register in the address span Compute the value for this field by adding the total number of registers used to the Start Register number and subtracting 1 Device Parameter Defines the parameter of the point types to set or to acquire Be aware of the different data types Character Integer Long Float and the size of the data types Use the TLP button to select parameters This field indicates the type of data associated with an address defined by the Start Register through the End Register When the host requests a valid range of register numbers the function code tells the slave what to do and between which registers Start Register through End Register 7 92 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 7 12 5 Modbus History Table Issued Jan 08 Field Indexing Conversion Comm Port ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets a block of register values as successive Logical Point Numbers or Parameters without having to define each separately Valid values are Point Indexing or Parameter Indexing Point Indexing maps the Start Register to the selected Device Parameter Subsequent registers through the End Register are mapped to the same Point Type and Parameter and increment the point Logical Number Parameter Indexing maps the Start Register to the selected Device Parameter Subsequent registers through the End Regi
107. these applications and is the property of the individual vendor shown in the Vendor Name field on the License Key Administrator screens 9 2 1 Distributing Software Licenses Key based RAS and other authorized vendors can distribute software licenses either on security enhanced universal serial bus USB drives known as keys or as 105 character strings FB107 software licenses delivered on security enhanced USB keys which connect to the USB port on your PC have both benefits and limitations RAS uses encrypted USB keys to distribute software licenses This prevents unauthorized access to software licenses if the keys are lost or stolen Typically key based licenses do not have an expiration date since they are intended to provide permanent access to an application USB keys can contain up to 255 iterations of a program and up to four different programs Using ROCLINK 800 you can install or remove these iterations onto a number of FB107s or even move the iterations to other encrypted USB keys The security enhanced USB key provides an excellent medium for quickly and securely distributing software licenses to a large geographic area Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 String based FB107 software licenses delivered as 105 character strings or files also have both benefits and limitations First these strings are encrypted and can be safely emailed for rapid receipt Typically
108. to connect using the parameters currently set for that port ROC gt Connect Select a comm port icon on the Device Directory and select menu options from the ROCLINK 800 menu bar Note Once you are connected on line ROCLINK 800 displays the Configuration Tree screen Direct Connect Click the Direct Connect icon to establish a connection with a FloBoss ROCLINK 800 attempts to establish communications through all PC comm ports PC at various baud rates If unsuccessful the program then attempts to establish communications through the remaining comm ports on the PC successively until it receives a valid reply By default ROCLINK 800 tags the LOI Port as the local port comm 1 as shown on the Comm Port screen ROC gt Comm Ports Communications and Security 3 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 For the Direct Connect option to work security conditions must be met and the PC must be connected to the Local Operator LOI port of the device with communication settings of 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit No Parity When you click Direct Connect ROCLINK tries to initiate communications with the device by performing a search of the PC communication ports at various baud rates ROCLINK then locks on to the first comm port and baud rate that are successful in communicating with a device To use Direct Connect 1 Physically connect cable to the FloBoss 2 Launch and log into ROCLINK 800 3 Do one of t
109. transitions and the time accumulated in the on or off state Select Configure gt I O gt DI Points The Discrete Input screen displays 7 20 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Discrete Input Discrete Inputs AT Tag D11 Slot General Advanced Alarms Point Humber cr Scan Period i DIN Type m Status e Standard C Latched C On Of Scanning Alarming fe Enabled i Disabled t Enabled ie Disabled Active Alarms o Blupdete Y Ok X Cancel Figure 7 17 Discrete Input The Discrete Input screen has three tabs Use each tab to configure a component of the input Examine the default settings and adjust the parameters to suit your application on each of the tabs in the order given below Use the General tab to set the basic parameters for the DI point Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as filtering input inversion and counter values for the discrete output Use the Alarms tab to set alarm parameters for this DI point Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 4 1 DI General Tab The Discrete Input screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to set the basic parameters for the discrete input point Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107
110. use Window Help Hi z zf Direct Connect E Device Root ty en Devis kb COM Deyi Properties Modem De Connect Ethernet De ROC Field 5 AUCH POCS27F Delete Device FB107 Ethermet Hew Group ty New Device ty New Device Rename Figure 2 3 Device Pop up Menu 2 Select Properties The ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters screen displays ROCLINK 600 Communication Parameters Tag COM1 Device SF Connect Destination Source Device Address 1 Host Address Device Group 2 Host Group Use e Comm Port Modem IEPIF PE Comm Fort Comm Fort 1 e Baud Fate 19200 MM Modem Parameters Modem Phone Number e EN TCP IP Addressing ID Address Fort Number w OK 8 Cancel Figure 2 4 Communication Parameters Issued Jan 08 Device Directory and Device Root 2 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Configure the ROCLINK 800 communications parameters refer to Chapter 3 Communications and Security for a complete discussion of this screen 4 Click Apply You are ready to connect to the FB107 2 2 Device Root The device root graphically represents the devices and their organizational structure on the Device Directory screen When you open ROCLINK 800 the device root displays the default device labels Using the Communication Parameters screen you can modify the communications setup configurations for these devices or add new devices with new conf
111. variable 32 bit floating point Current alarmed value of variable 32 bit floating point 17 to 20 Current New value of variable 32 bit floating Unused at the current time zero filled when _ point _ transmitted to the Master Table 7 13 Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Contents Bit Operator Change Bit Map Alarm Change Bit Map 0 Fixed value change to an EU value on an I O point in Manual Mode Not Used ES Zero scale change to the 0 Adjusted on an AO or Al _Not Used ES Full scale change to the 100 Adjusted onan AO or Al Not Used e 3 Operator e entry work value change to any parameter other than those _ oe Not Used t t tS described A l Boolean fixed bit change to Status in DO or DI Not Used fp 5 Fixed variable fl flag change to Manual Mode for an I O point e Manual Alarm a D e Table entry change change to Modbus Function Tables Status Change Alarm E E T System command change events logged by system Power up No Flow Alarm Ee 8 NotUsed 2 222 2 22 Point Fail Alarm Cen ES Event E identifier bit EE To SS Alarm Ge 7 10 Low Low Limit change to Low Low Alarm parameter _ Bn Low Low Alarm Oo ui Low Limit change to Low Alarm parameter Low Alarm RE ER High Limit change to High Alarm parameter High Alarm DN 43 High High Limit change to High High Alarm parameter High High Alarm ae 7 14 d Rate of Change Limit change to Rate Alarm parameter Rate Alarm KE Set C
112. ven ROCLINK 800 IO Monitor DAR File Edit View ROC Sage Meter Utilities Tools Window Help 0 X D gH E T o PE e a Ue 2 Analog Fees A410 B9 B10 C10 D1 D2 D Point Tag ID T Ald oT Al 2 Slot Al 1 Slot2 Al 2 Slot2 Al TT Al 2 Slot4 Al 1 Slot5 Al 2 Slot5 Al 1 Slot6 Al x Units fiteedeuVee oof ool oo ool o o o e o Analog Outputs All B11 C11 D3 D11 Point Tag ID AD 1S0 AO1Slot2 A01 Slot4 A0155 AD 1 Slot6 i WEE SE ey E EU Value Pulse Inputs Point Tag ID Units EU Value Accumulated Value Current Rate Today s Total Yesterday s Total Frequency cR AGA Flow Calculation Values Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4 Differential Pressure Uncorrected Flow 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 POT oo A0 D Static Pressure Temperature Instantaneous Flow Instantaneous Energy Flow Today Energy Today Flow Yesterday Energy Yesterday hwPf Uncorrected Flow Rate _ oo IMV BMY 783 9636 oof D od Sample Time ooo DO _ oof od Select New Stop Scan Close RIN 1124 AM Figure 5 26 I O Monitor 5 8 Toolbar Select View gt Toolbar to display or hide the ROCLINK 800 toolbar A checkmark appears next to the menu option when the toolbar is available For information on buttons in the toolbar refer to Section 1 6 4 Toolbar Buttons Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 43 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 44 View Menu Issued Jan 08 Chapter 6 The ROC Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Use the ROC
113. verification to demonstrate to the customer that the measurement results are now within contractual parameters 8 2 3 Zero Shift Offset and RTD Bias Use these buttons on the Meter Calibration screen to make adjustments to calibrated values These allow you to adjust the calibrations at flowing conditions The following example shows a zero shift adjustment Note Because these adjustments can affect the contractual delivery of product exercise caution in using these options 1 From the Meter Calibration screen click Offset The Set Zero Shift Offset screen displays 8 32 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Set Zero Shift Offset Point Static Measured Pressure Reading 0 0 Live Reading 0 036 Pressure Offset 0 0361 I Set Offset Figure 8 27 Set Zero Shift 2 Complete the Measured Pressure Reading field with a line pressure value obtained from an independent pressure measurement device and begin monitoring the value in the Pressure Offset field Each second the system compares the live reading against the value you enter When the value in the Pressure Offset field stabilizes press Set Offset ROCLINK 800 sets the pressure offset and adds a line to the calibration log Set Zero Shift Offset Paint Static Acton 4s Found As Lett Deviation 4 Deviation 1 Set ero Shift Offset 0 036 0 000 0 036 0 0360 Measured Pressure Reading Dis Live Reading 0 000
114. 0 Span 3 Midpoint A Manon ee ssss s 5 Midpoint e Zero Shift 3 Click OK to display the FB107 graphic screen 9 7 MVS Input Calibration Values Use this option to display a screen that shows all the current calibration values for MVS sensor points 1 Select Utilities gt MVS Calibration Values The MVS Calibration screen displays Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 MVS Calibration Values MVS Sensor AEN v Differential Pressure Manual Value Cal Value 1 Cal Value 2 Cal Value 3 Cal Value 4 Cal Value 5 0 Static Pressure Manual Value Cal Value Cal Valuee Cal Value3 Cal Valued Cal Valued Sensor Tag MVS 1 Temperature Manual Value Cal Value 1 Cal Value 2 Cal Value 3 Cal Value 4 Cal Value 5 e Ge Gm Ge Gg Gem Gem Pressure Effect HU Pressure Offset 0 RTD Bias Set To Factory Defaults Blupdete Y Ok XCancel Figure 9 29 MVS Calibration Values 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description MVS Sensor Click w to select the MVS sensor point Sensor umber to view Sensor Tag This read only field shows the label associated with the chosen MVS sensor point These read only fields display the Differential Pressure calibration values the selected MVS sensor currently uses Note Manual Value represents the value of the input at the time of the last meter Fr
115. 00 Configuration Software User D Password OF Cancel Figure l 1 Logon 2 Type your assigned 3 character identifier in the User ID field and press Enter or Tab Note The User ID is case sensitive Typically your initials are your user ID If user IDs have not yet been assigned try using the default user ID of LOI You assign user IDs by using the ROC gt Security features of ROCLINK 800 3 Type your assigned 4 digit password and click OK For added security the software displays an asterisk for each number that you type If passwords have not yet been assigned use the default password of 1000 valid only with the default user ID of LOD ROCLINK 800 validates the user ID and password you enter against a predefined list If the log on is not valid a dialog box appears Click OK and re enter the user ID and password You can repeat the procedure as many times as needed until you successfully enter a valid User ID and password If the log on is valid ROCLINK 800 displays the Device Directory screen see Figure 2 1 To exit the log on screen click Cancel or press Esc This closes ROCLINK 800 and returns you to the point where you started ROCLINK 800 Introduction 1 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 1 6 User Interface Basics 1 6 You interact with ROCLINK 800 using various displays on the computer monitor keyboard and pointing device The major components of ROCLINK 800 user interface are
116. 00 03 17 2007 15 35 50 09 17 2007 15 35 47 09 17 2007 15 35 47 08 17 2007 15 35 38 09 17 2007 15 35 35 09 17 2007 15 35 13 09 17 2007 15 35 09 20 o Re Issued Jan 08 Type FLG 1 MV MV AOL B11 Initialization Sequence All Power Removed AOU B11 Initialization Sequence All Power Removed Initialization Sequence All Power Removed EEN Initialization Sequence All Power Removed Initialization Sequence All Power Removed Initialization Sequence All Power Removed AIN A3 AIN 410 AIN 410 AIN 410 AIN 410 AIN 410 AIN A10 AIN A AIN ATO You can view a log of all events on your connected FloBoss 1 Select View gt Events gt From Device An events preview screen displays Old Value 35 48 4 U 20 00000 144 126 d 25 12500 0 100 0000 0 16 0 KI 2 OR 2 e Mew Value 60 16 126 10 00000 16 U 4 0 0000000 B 25 12500 2 Description Flag 29 DP Mode Poll Mode Mode 10711 2007 12 26 36 EU Value 10710 2007 14 20 26 10 02 2007 13 35 25 Force End of Day 097 2172007 15 50 34 09 7 2007 16 18 56 097172007 16 09 19 Mode Mode Calibration Mode Set ero Shift Calibration Type Set Value f 1 0 Calibration Mode Mode Mode f 1 0 f 1 0 f 1 0 f 1 0 Save Print Preview Cijse Figure 5 15 Events Preview 2 Review the events preview and click Close to return to the FB107 graphic display Note Click Print Preview t
117. 00 33 FT 40 2F 44 2E 00 32 Z 00 oh 2E on 31 28 01 08 ZE op J ps ic op e op ac oo op op Ap 10 04 04 03 OL B4 1 09 22 00 2D 2E 00 2F 28 00 ag 2g 00 58 Je 00 59 ap 00 57 26 op 25 28 00 07 2E 0O OA A4 52 ee g0 01 04 04 B4 39 op 2E D 2D op op op on 2E op ZF 0O op op JE OD Bar 00 ap 00 Sh on 2e 00 59 Ae 70 7D ar ae 00 57 0a 00 pop op 2 OD Lee pa pn zs Am ae Dn An pn aa pp An pn Di FA Ap De aS Fer retz rsta rsta rsrs rsra Figure 11 3 Tile 11 3 Active View To switch between active views in ROCLINK 800 select Window gt View A check mark appears next to the active view as shown in Figure 11 4 A view must be active before you can alter information on that screen mam ROCLINK 800 On Line Com1 FB107 File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Dah ts Se Siae e el A EL i On Line Comi FR 10 M Modules t LA Control H Meter Bi System SS History Bal User Program EEE laer Disnlau Job x ieee Help a Cascade Tile 1 Device Directory g vw 2 OnLine Comi FB107 ii Figure 11 4 Active View 11 2 Window Menu Issued Jan 08 Chapter 12 The Help Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Use the Help menu to access the on line help system and view the About ROCLINK 800 screen In This Chapter 12 1 Help Topics k Help Topics E About ROCLINK 800 122 ADOuUt ee BEE 12 2 12 1 Help Topics ROC
118. 065 U S A Pickering North Yorkshire UK Y018 7JA EMERSON Website www EmersonProcess com Remote l 14 Index Issued Jan 08
119. 07 w E Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display Frame Adds an organizing frame which you use to group similar user selections Once a frame is in place drag and drop objects onto the frame This object has the following properties Framef1 Allow Data Entry Property Description Caption Sets a label or caption for the object The default is Frame 1 the system uniquely names each object until you rename it Allow Data Entry Sets whether the user can edit the object Click v which displays when you click in the field to display the valid values Yes Allows editing This is the default No Does not allow editing Expression Editing is allowed based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the data entry is allowed Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object SE aoa EES version of th
120. 07 1 Select the I O Points tab The I O Points screen displays General VO Setup kO Points POINT TAG CONFIGURATION INTEGRITY ACTIVE ALARMS PIE RANE AT Glo Al 2 Glo AQ 1 Slot DO 2 Glo HI Slot0 Pl 2 Glo Auto Scan Update Figure 7 5 I O Interface I O Points tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Point Defines the database point to be one of the possible types of points available to the system The point type determines the basic functions of a point Point type displays the database points associated with the installed hardware and CPU The point type indicates the location of the point at the slot number of the I O module and channel number For example DO 2 indicates the point number for a discrete output at module slot zero channel two Tag Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Configuration Click the TLP button to display a configuration screen you use to configure the point associated with the hardware Integrity This read only field shows Displays the status of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Alarms display on the user interface indicating the state of the hardware including the CPU I O modules CPU I O assembly MVS modules communication modules and smart application modules You can mouse over an alarm icon to display the
121. 08 Issued Jan 08 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Click Browse to select or specify a file name the system uses to save and restore the system configuration file The default location is C Program Files ROCLINK800 The default file extension is SOU Note You can also save the configuration to Flash memory using the Flags screen ROC gt Flags In the Firmware Image to Download frame click Browse to specify the location of the updated firmware code The default file extension is bin Note You can obtain firmware updates either from your factory representative or from the Remote Automation Solution SupportNet website access www EmersonProcess com Remote and select the Support option Regardless of source you must store the firmware update files on your PC before you can apply them Once you select a firmware upgrade ROCLINK 800 completes the lower portion of the Firmware Image to Download frame with information related to that upgrade Review the information to make sure you want to apply that upgrade 7 Click Start The system displays a confirmation dialog box 8 Click Yes to confirm the firmware update When the firmware load completes a completion dialog box displays Click OK to accept the dialog box ROCLINK 800 automatically loads the configuration files into the FB107 Gf you selected the Restore Device Configuration option and records the actions in the event log When the backup relo
122. 0RH_HM 6 __ h 2 Update Close Figure 9 23 User Program Administrator 9 22 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 4 Click Download amp Start to download and automatically start the selected user program or click Download to download the user program without starting it A message dialog displays Confirm Download P Download amp Start User Program 5 Figure 9 24 Confirm Download Note ROCLINK 800 automatically assigns the program number 5 Click Yes to begin the download During the download the program performs a warm start creates an event in the Event Log and when the download completes displays the following message ROCLINK 800 Figure 9 25 Successful Download Confirmation 6 Click OK The User Program Administrator screen displays see Figure 9 26 Note that The User Programs Installed in Device frame now identifies the loaded program The Status field indicates that the program is running Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 User Program Administrator User Programs Installed in Device No Program Mame 070032 V Cone Flow No Program No Program Version Aew 1 00 Library Version Aew O Tan aS Flow Created 03 30 2007 10 21 51 DRAM Used 16384 No Program CAC 08084 FLASH Used 11121 Enty Pe Ox5E0000 Displays 23 Status Running Download User Program File F Frogram Files
123. 11 The Window Menu 11 1 Iel SEA CAG EE 11 1 PEZ Date eebe 11 2 ee Get 11 2 Chapter 12 The Help Menu 12 1 12A UOMO ele e 12 1 Eeer eege a aa ENE NR 12 2 Appendix A Glossary A 1 Appendix B The FST Editor B 1 Bel ROT Editor Overview EE B 1 BAA USING Ine ro Re EE B 3 B2 POV EADGU e EE B 4 SE Fol Command Field EE B 5 Bal Fol Argument Field EE B 5 Bal Fol Comment Eege tet a enken B 6 BAG Fol storage and E EE B 7 See an A EE B 7 B 1 8 Creating an FST from anEvstnngtie B 8 B 1 9 Compiling to Build and Viewing an EG B 8 B 1 10 Downloading the FST to the FloBOSS nnnnnnnennnnnannnnennnnsrnnnnnnrnnsrnnrnsrrnrsnrrnsnrrrsrnrrennne B 8 SE Ee Te In REN B 9 BD li eo ea OMG F ST KE B 9 a ee ES 816 810 Bee ug mon Renner ce eee ee eee eee ete ene nee Oren nce etter ene E nee ae errr eee ere B 9 B 1 14 Deleting an FST using e TEE B 10 Bl 15 Reading an FST From DoyviCtinesscduicenanun eaan a A B 10 B 1 16 Reading an FST Fron Flesssnssscrscnnang iunn E a B 10 SEN BA e En H EE B 10 BAIS PRANING ANF EE B 10 Bie KEE Els Le Ee WEE TEE B 10 Bul 20 Troubleshooting ali Fs EE B 11 BZ E Reie ie gt MOGE EE B 11 Bid DEST Trace ee EE B 13 B4 Pot Comimana RENE B 14 BK FST Control Related Command eege eege ee B 16 B42 Delining a FST History Fester ee eer ea Ee As B 24 Bo un ei at Xl EE B 26 Index l 1 Issued Jan 08 Contents yii ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 viii Contents Issued Jan 08
124. 12 records The following paragraphs detail how ROCLINK 800 places event log and alarms log information in Modbus event and alarm messages and how or what is generated upon the event or alarm condition Normal Event Record Following is a normal event record format 7 100 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Bit Map Date as float _ Old Value as float New Value as float CO IE ase EAEI EECHER System Text Events When you set the System Command Change Bit bit 7 in the Operator Change Bit Map of the event it sets the register number for all System Command Change events to the Event Alarm Register number default is 32 o Date as fot on ts PaaS Lees ema ow ele el a ROCLINK 800 uses this format for the following event codes 144 Initialization Sequence 146 Initialize From Defaults 147 ROM CRC Error 148 Database Initialization 150 Program Flash 248 Text Message 249 Download Configuration 250 Upload Configuration 251 Calibration Timeout a 252 Calibration Cancel 253 Calibration Success FST Events For FST Events the code is the FST number 1 to 6 Unused 1s set to zero Bit Map Date as fioa Value as foat_ SSES ee oe a fs ee Time Related System Events Time represents the number of seconds since January 1 1970 Unused is set to zero Bit Map Date as float poe Pane he Dee io aia ie ie fs eT le Events are formatted as 145 All Power R
125. 19 Select EFM Files to Convert 9 18 9 20 Select Folder for Converted Files 9 19 9 21 User Program Adminstrator 9 20 9 22 Select User Program Ee 9 22 9 23 User Program Administrator 9 22 9 24 Confirm Download 9 23 9 25 Successful Download Confirmation 9 23 9 26 User Program Administrator 9 24 9 27 ROCLINK 800 Security ee 9 25 9 28 Al Calibration Values 9 26 9 29 MVS Calibration Values 00 000n0ann 9 28 9 30 Communications Monitor 9 29 10 1 Tools E BEE 10 1 10 2 TLP Displays ccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 10 3 OPTIONS E 10 2 11 1 Window Menu 11 1 11 2 e LE 11 1 T153 RE 11 2 Ke dE 11 2 CN Se Ee En LEE 12 1 12 2 ROCLINK 800 Software Help 12 1 12 3 About ROCLINK GO0 cee 12 2 SE coo Ap re E B 3 SN GR Editor Toolbar EE B 9 SN e Ee SClUD DEE B 26 BA Sample EE B 27 B 5 panpe EE B 27 B 60 Compiled FS WEE B 28 SE B 29 B90 Fol RR UE B 29 B 9 FST Download completed 0 00000000n B 30 SUE EE 4 1 te AEAEE ETE east EAE E 7 10 7 24 Salle e EE 1 24 PATI W ANC Parent ccc aa chen ohee oe toca ele 9 2 FAO EE 6 14 Advanced TaD hres beech sia ec cites Aiden pei 6 17 General TaD EE 6 14 let 7 88 FloBoss GIRG CGC E 6 18 DISCONNECT EE 3 17 Flow Dependant Formula 8 6 Flow Dependant Lumear 8 6 Flow Weighted Formulaic ssesssenssennsenseenneeenns 8 6 Flow Weighte
126. 2007 16 13 04 ATE 09742007 15 54 16 ATO 097142007 15 54 16 ATO 03713 2007 03 20 07 RID 0971372007 09 20 07 ATO 09713 2007 09 19 46 ATE 09 13 2007 09 19 46 ATO 09713 2007 08 15 33 ATO 09 73 2007 08 15 33 ATOE 09713 2007 07 46 33 ATO 3 Press r to remove the effect and restore the original plot 1 Press Shift and hold down the left mouse button 2 Drag the mouse to select the zoom area and release the mouse button 3 Press r to remove the effect and restore the original plot You can view a log of all alarms on your connected FloBoss 1 Select View gt Alarms gt From Device An alarm preview screen displays SetClear Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Set Alarm Clear Alarm Clear Alarm Set Alarm Set Figure 5 14 Alarm Preview pa4OHE LR eE Value 70 07114 70 914 75 0426 70 99974 70 95687 70 02574 70 69714 ford fo fod fo a542 70 69714 79 21153 0 24033 fo 26847 80 88332 TT oboe Tr 45401 Tr 45401 Tr 49687 Tr 45401 Tr 41114 Tr 41114 79 91166 76 30235 6 36255 76 36235 76 36255 6 36255 Zb 36255 6 36255 76 38235 76 36255 Description Point Failure Point Failure Manual Mode Manual Mode
127. 33 7649 25 7095 CO oO on i oo poy Figure 5 11 History from device Note Click the Save button at the bottom of the screen to save the displayed contacts in a file You can then view history logs without being connected to the FB107 4 Review the report and click Close to return to the FB107 graphic screen 5 4 2 Viewing History Logs from a File When you generate a history report you can save it to a file with a filetype of mdb for off line viewing and analysis However you must save the report file to view it ROCLINK 800 provides additional tools you can use to manipulate the data 1 Select View gt History gt From File An Open dialog box displays 2 Select a file and click Open A preview screen displays Note Refer to Section 5 4 History Alarm and Event Log Reports for valid file name extensions for history files Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 wa ROCLINK 800 Minute History C Program Files ROCLINK800 A1G2 mdb File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Dev Bel ala Qi e H aa Minute History 41G2 FB107 Uploaded 11 05 2007 16 11 27 Operator LOI Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Well 100 Date Time MINTDY CUR DP CUR SP CUR TP IMV BMY H wPF FLOWDY ENGDAY TOTAL AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG ACCUM Day ACCUM Da 11 05 2007 16 11 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8821 4620 1900 333 7649 25 7012 26 3437 11 05
128. 4 PI Pulse IN e EC 7 33 Advanced Tab 1 37 Alarms TaD EEN 1 39 PID OO Dias E 7 60 PNCUIN e e EE 6 7 Advanced Tab 7 67 General Tab 7 62 Inputs Outputs Tab 7 66 PID EXAM IG ee 7 69 I 10 Index Pipe Diameter 8 8 8 36 Pipe Matenal 8 11 Plate Change A 8 35 Plate Change noaneoennnneennnnennenennensnnnernnnensennne 8 35 Plate Change kreeze A 8 36 FO GEN 5 12 Point Indexing RE 7 89 7 93 Point Number 7 8 7 17 7 22 7 28 7 35 Point Type aannnannnnnnnennnnennnna 1 16 6 12 7 6 7 44 FAL tee 4 7 Points ROG tel le EE 6 6 PONDO EE 7 86 PONOWNE dee eebe 3 11 Pressure Tap EE 8 11 Pressure Temperature Values 7 47 Primary Process Variable cccccccssccseeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 67 SEENEN 7 64 E 4 9 eege awe aera B 10 Print Configuration nnenennnnaanneneannnnneenennnnn 4 7 Print Preview ccccceccesecsseceseceeeeeeeseeesaeeees 4 7 SEUD EE 4 9 FFOGESS V alla EE 7 65 Proportional Galino dinaa a A 7 65 Proportional Integral and Derivative 6 a aes 7 60 gedoe E 3 11 PUSES H oie siaidtucdete e ianuneweleraeniae ns 7 38 Q 187 EE 9 9 R RT through RIO ioana B 12 SIE 7 66 Rate Max Hollover 7 38 Rate E ge EE 7 15 7 40 RIG e EE 7 38 Raw AD Ne EE 7 10 Raw DANO EE 7 19 RaW UE 9 26 Ki 7 15 7 20 7 26 7 33 7 40 7 56 8 18 Alarm Mile e EE 3 15 TEE ee i ee le ee 3 14 COMM POMS 2ciciies ene 3 13 Host AQA ESS EEN 3 14 leet 3 14 leie 3 14 e EH 3 15 RDB EE B 22
129. 5 7 5 SOO ated i tpeeat ac EE 4 6 4 7 A About ROCLINK 800 0 0 0 ee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 2 ee TEE 8 11 Access EE 3 20 3 23 Accumulated Pulses cccccecseceseeceseeeeeeeeeees 7 36 Accumulated Value 7 24 7 31 FLCCUIMUIATON eane a 8 34 Acknowledging Events amp Alammms 7 103 ACTION ON Faire cies REESEN NENNEN 7 11 7 49 Activating Meter E e CN 6 7 PID ie 6 7 Active Alarms 1 9 7 6 7 9 7 18 7 23 7 30 7 36 7 45 7 47 Active Flow Alarm c cceeeecececeececeseeeeeeeeeeees 8 6 Active EE 11 2 Actual Module 3 8 6 9 7 4 7 43 PNAS eebe adnate ee 1 10 Actual POMOC E 7 68 Actual SOA EE 7 10 Actual versus Installed Module 1 10 Add Wiere NEEN 9 10 Adding DG VIC EE 2 6 Expression to aOhbect 5 39 POUD EE 2 5 Address Device ROOL aose tac aden 2 4 NIN aa E namaste 7 46 ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 3 Adjusted A D 0 EE 7 10 Adjusted A D 20O0fn 7 10 Adjusted D A KEE 7 19 Adj sted RI Eu L i EE 7 19 AGA PACUIVALING E 6 7 Mieter SCUB EE 8 1 Al and RTD Calibration 0 cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 11 Al Calibration Values 9 26 Al O Update Firmware 9 5 Alarm and Event Log B 21 AlAT S tee E ee 1 9 Active 7 6 7 9 7 18 7 23 7 30 7 36 7 45 7 47 Actual versus Installed Module 1 10 Alarm e ei 7 102 Alarm Log Viewing cccceseecseeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaees 5 8 Issued Jan 08 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Analog Inputs 1 9 7 14 7
130. 6 Multi Variable Sensor Calibration tab Freeze Scan Mode Normal Poll Freeze Values Diff Pressure Static Pressure Temperature 0 0563344 14 36786 79 85459 Update Y OK X Cancel 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Freeze Scan Mode Differential Pressures Static Pressure Temperature Description Click to stop the system from updating analog MVS or temperature RTD inputs during verification or calibration Once you click this button the system grays it out as a reminder This read only field shows the input status Normal Poll indicates the system is functioning normally After you click Freeze the software changes the displayed message to Input Freeze for the verification or calibration process and activates all buttons in the Freeze Values frame These read only fields show the values for the differential pressure static pressure and temperature received from the analog MVS or temperature RTD input At this point you can verify or calibrate the values for differential pressure static pressure or temperature ROCLINK 800 displays similar screens for each activity Typically the process is to first perform a verification If the results are within contractual limits the process ends However if the results are not within contractual parameters perform a calibration followed by a repeat verification 3 Click Freeze ROCLINK 800 freezes the input for the se
131. 6 3504 11205 2007 15 53 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5913 4622 2540 333 7649 25 7117 26 3545 11 05 2007 15 52 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5599 4622 5470 333 7649 25 7130 26 3558 11 05 2007 15 51 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5127 4622 2140 333 7649 25 7135 26 3563 11 05 2007 15 50 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5663 4622 1080 333 7649 25 7120 26 3548 11205 2007 15 49 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5834 4622 4720 333 7649 25 7123 26 3551 11205 2007 15 48 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5249 4623 1390 333 7649 25 7148 26 3577 11205 2007 15 47 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 4177 4623 3830 333 7649 25 7178 26 3607 11 05 2007 15 46 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 3784 4623 5210 333 7649 25 7190 26 3619 11 05 2007 15 45 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 3562 4622 8280 333 7649 25 7183 26 3613 11 05 2007 15 44 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 4677 4621 8680 333 7649 25 7140 26 3568 11205 2007 15 43 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6220 4621 7700 333 7649 25 7101 26 3529 11205 2007 15 42 00 125 9600 869 9500 79 6377 4622 1040 333 7649 e 2 om an j F G il Plot Print Preview i E 21 CM Figure 5 12 History from file 3 Review the file Click Close to return to the FB107 graphic display Note Click Print Preview to print the report contents see Section 4 5 1 Print Configuration or Plot to create a graphic display of the report contents 5 4 3 Plotting History For history data from either a connected device or a file ROCLINK 800 provides a
132. 9 25 7036 26 3462 11205 2007 15 55 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 8514 4621 1130 333 7649 25 7035 26 3461 11205 2007 15 54 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 7435 4622 0590 333 7649 25 7077 26 3504 11 05 2007 15 53 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5913 4622 2540 333 7649 25 7117 26 3545 11 05 2007 15 52 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5599 4622 5470 333 7649 25 7130 26 3558 11 05 2007 15 51 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5127 4622 2140 333 7649 25 7135 26 3563 11 05 2007 15 50 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5663 4622 1080 333 7649 25 7120 26 3548 11 05 2007 15 49 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5834 4622 4720 333 7649 25 7123 26 3551 11 05 2007 15 48 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5249 4623 1390 333 7649 25 7148 26 3577 11 05 2007 15 47 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 4177 4623 3830 333 7649 25 7178 26 3607 11 05 2007 15 46 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 3784 4623 5210 333 7649 25 7190 26 3619 11 05 2007 15 45 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 3562 4622 8280 333 7649 25 7183 26 3613 11 05 2007 15 44 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 4677 4621 8680 333 7649 25 7140 26 3568 11 05 2007 15 43 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6220 4621 7700 333 7649 25 7101 26 3529 11 05 2007 15 42 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6377 4622 1040 333 7649 25 7103 26 3531 11 05 2007 15 41 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 5842 4621 8850 333 7649 25 7112 26 3540 11 05 2007 15 40 00 1 0000 125 9600 869 9500 79 6192 4621 8050 333 7649 25 7103 26 3530 11 05 2007 15 39 00 125 9600 869 9500 79 6320 4621 5400 3
133. 9 4 CPU Information Meter Points Tab Uset the Meter Points tab to configure the meter run for the FloBoss 1 Select the Meter Points tab The CPU Information Meter Points screen displays 6 12 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 METER TAG CONFIGURATION ACTIVE ALARMS 1 Meter H eB Auto Scan 2 Update Figure 6 12 CPU Information Meter Points tab 2 Review the following fields Field Description Meter This read only field shows the number associated with this meter Tag tis Displays the tag associated with each point type Configuration Click to display a Meter Setup screen you use to _ configure the meter 3 For information on active alarms refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 4 Proceed to Section 6 9 5 CPU Information Diagnostic Tab 6 9 5 CPU Information Diagnostic Tab Use the Diagnostic tab to display hardware statistics about the CPU 1 Select the Diagnostic tab The CPU Information Diagnostic screen displays CPU Aus Pwr In 1 453389 m i Average 10 Scan Time DO 0625 seconds Good d SPI Messages 33989 Bad 1 0 SPI Messages D Auto Scar E Update Figure 6 13 CPU Information Diagnostic tab 2 Review the following fields Field Description Aux Pwr In This read only field shows the current input power the FB107 is acquiring at the battery Issued Jan 08 ROC Menu 6 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Average I O S
134. 9 5 CDS LOAN KEE 7 49 8 11 USB Key Licenses nnoannnoeaneneenensenneone renerne 9 6 USB License Jegen e RE 9 7 Use ROCLINK 800 Communtcatons 3 3 User Correction Factor cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 Bel RE 1 5 User Interface HBasce 1 6 User list parameter text NEEN 7 106 SE E 7 106 User JEE e EES 7 105 User Programs Administrator dee ee Eed 9 20 Issued Jan 08 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Installed in Device 0 eee ceeecececececececeeeeees 9 20 License Key Administrator 9 6 Usor RAD TEE 3 22 Bert Menu EE 9 1 V E WEE B 22 Valid Receive Counter 3 11 NC eene 7 8 7 17 Value on Power Heset 7 19 Values VE eee cece ti athe ei alle 8 34 Vanable K ee 8 9 Vendor NaMe EE 9 9 Verslo EE 7 58 9 9 Version NaMe EE 6 7 Ve Te e GE 7 81 View WIC IU ett a 5 1 Viewing Calibration Hepnort 5 7 Bel 5 18 EFM REPONS cosinus insite 5 2 5 3 ENEE 5 14 History Logs from atie 5 11 Logs and Reports from a Device 00001000 5 9 EEN 8 14 Vie EE 6 11 7 47 eil ue 8 5 W ECG RE B 20 WDE aaa a A B 22 UE 8 13 Windows Menu 11 1 RR BEE B 22 X KEENT 4 7 Y Yesterday s Total 7 36 Z ZECO SAI EE 8 32 l 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 If you have comments or questions regarding this manual please direct them to your local sales representative or contact Emerson Process Management Remote Automation Solutions a Marshalltown IA 50158 U S A SS Houston TX 77
135. A legend at the bottom of the graph corresponds with the lines within the graph Use the scroll bar to the left of the graph to change the Y axis Graphics zoom enlarges the selected area of a chart while not necessarily showing the axes Axis zoom changes the minimum and maximum data values to those selected and redraws only that data with the axes Graphics Zoom To zoom into an area of the plot Issued Jan 08 an Area 1 Press Ctrl and hold down the left mouse button 2 Drag the mouse to select zoom area and release the mouse button View Menu 5 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 1 File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help AH ve fy HP E Alarms A1G2 FB107 5 4 4 Viewing Alarm Logs KM Axis Zoom To zoom into a particular axis of the plot the Chart Gt Uploaded 17 05 2007 17 18 09 Operator LOI D0 on ee m 5 14 Date Time Tag 0971772007 16 09 24 ATO 0971772007 16 09 22 ATE 095 7772007 15 36 19 ATO 0971772007 15 35 48 ATO 097772007 14 31 35 ATO 0971772007 14 30 47 ATO 09371772007 14 19 43 ATE 0371772007 14 13 35 ATO 0971772007 14 17 40 ATO 097772007 13 40 31 ATE 097772007 10 41 21 ATO 0971772007 09 27 17 ATO 0371772007 03 21 27 RTD 0971772007 09 11 05 ATO 093 472007 17 08 04 ATE 0542007 16 37 13 ATO 0971472007 16 33 05 ATO 0971472007 16 34 02 ATO 097142007 16 3456 ATO 0937472007 16 3453 ATE 095 1472007 16 28 13 ATD 097142007 16 27 53 ATO 09747
136. BATO Geier EE B 10 B 1 19 Altering an FST Men B 10 B 1 20 Troubleshooting an EST B 11 B2 FST Monitor llegro geet e B 11 B FST Facetten B 12 BA FSt Command Library EE B 14 B 4 1 FST Control Related Commands c ccecceeeseeeeeeeees B 16 B 4 2 Defining a FST History bot B 23 SR unge FS EE B 25 B 1 FST Editor Overview You can write FSTs specifically for applications that require special control features such as logic sequencing capability For example you can use an FST for emergency shutdown control when a parameter exceeds a low or high limit or in any application that requires logic sequencing capability You program and configure FSTs using the FST Editor which is included in ROCLINK 800 Utilities gt FST Editor An FST defines the input to output I O relationships in the FloBoss through a set of user selected instructions called functions Functions define the specific actions to be performed and are executed in their specified sequence Functions normally execute in top to bottom order however the sequence may be altered by certain decision making functions Functions consist of a command an argument and an optional label Issued Jan 08 FST Editor B 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 You build an FST from a library of commands that provide mathematical and logical operations database access operations historical commands testing branching operations and control related operations Table B dis
137. CTLM correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the meter times CPLM correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the meter Signal Value Analog Stored in the Results Register it is the analog value that is passed between functions in an FST Signal Value Discrete Stored in the Compare Flag it is the discrete value that is passed down the sequence of functions in an FST Configured parameters that describe the ROC set using ROCLINK software Thermocouple Input Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Time Duration Input Time Duration Output Flowing temperature Type of point Logical or point number and Parameter number Group of one or more consecutive batch deliveries for accounting purposes The batches that comprise a transaction always use one recipe one additive selection and one loading side An example of a transaction is the delivery of multiple batches to different compartments in a single tanker vehicle A device used to measure flow rate and other parameters Transmitted Data communications signal Glossary A 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 U Upload Send data a file or a program from the ROC to a PC or other host V Z V Volts Volume The actual space occupied by the product measured indicated in one of the following actual units cubic meters liters barrels gallons Wild Stream Wild stream is the uncontrolled stream often referring to the ga
138. DHV DHT PHV PHT and MHV commands select the History Segment and the corresponding History Point that you desire to log in Argument 1 In Argument 2 select either a database point or a constant value which is the actual History Index where the data resides in the historical database The Minute History Value MHV History Index is the same as the minute of the hour Read the clock s minutes to get the last History Index value For example if it is 8 10 then the History Index is 10 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 i Daily History Value ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 For the Extract Time Element GTE command select the database point or a constant value which is the actual History Index value where the data resides in the historical database In Argument 2 select the Time Element to log the exact time of the database point or History Index value The GTE command is used to extract the time element from the time stamp received back from the CHT and PHT commands For DIS DIN PIS and PIN commands select the History Segment and the corresponding History Point that you desire to log in Argument 1 In Argument 2 select the Month and Date on which to log the History Index value To acquire the Daily History Value DHV perform a Starting Daily Index DIS command to locate the starting History Index value for a specific day Using the DIS History Index value use the DHV command to locate the Daily History Value To find specific d
139. EINY EE 8 23 8 15 Dead Weight Tester Value 8 24 8 16 Verity Log EMY eegne eege ee ten 8 24 8217 Verity Og EAUY EE 8 25 8 18 Turbine Meter Calibration 0 8 26 8 19 Calibration Frozen Values 8 27 GS 20 PSC e WEEN 8 28 8 21 Dead Weight Tester Value 8 28 E Ee EE 8 29 E 560 SPAM EE 8 30 O24 SOt SP aM EE 8 30 8 25 Set Midpoint 1 8 31 8 26 Set Midpoint A 8 32 8 27 SEU Zero E TEE 8 33 re E EE 8 33 8 29 Set Zero Shift EE 8 34 8 30 Meter Values cece cececeececeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 8 34 8 31 Plate Change ccccccssseeeseeeeeeees 8 35 9 1 Utilities Men 9 1 9 2 Update Fmmware 9 2 9 3 Update Firmware CPU ob 9 5 9 4 Update Firmware Additional tabs 9 6 9 5 Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Eege BEE ele 9 7 9 6 Ucenseinstalled eeeeeeeeeee ees 9 8 9 7 License Moved Gotha Staton arr Cutan 9 9 9 8 Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a VE 9 11 9 9 Enter License Ging 9 11 9 10 Installed String based License 9 12 9 11 Transfer Licenses Between Keys 9 13 9 12 Number of Uicenses ee 9 13 9 13 License froansterred 9 14 l 6 Index 9 14 Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a KEV romiar O 9 15 9 15 Confirm Remove License Dialog 9 15 9 16 Confirm Removal Dialog 9 15 9 17 License Removal Completed 9 16 9 18 Convert EFM File aannnannnannnannnnanan 9 17 9
140. Editor utility the period in which the data is logged can be placed under FST program control Note Configure the History Points for each meter run to allow the EFM Report utility to properly access data Select Configure gt History Points The History Setup screen displays History Setup Archive Type Archive Point Totalize 47 0 41 Avg Flow Dependant Linear 46 0 51 6 0 52 6 0 53 7 0 16 704 7 0 0 701 3 Undefined 009 10 Undefined 001 11 Undefined 00o S 12 Undefined 00o S 13 Undefined ooo S 14 Undefined 000 S 15 Undefined ooo Le 2 Update vw OK X Cancel Figure 7 49 History Setup i Use this screen to define the History Points archived for any numeric parameter in the FloBoss and to select which archiving method the system uses for each parameter Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 71 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 10 1 History Setup Setup Tab ROCLINK 800 saves history information to either of two databases Standard and Extended History Use the Setup tab to configure what information the system saves to which database For that reason we discuss the Setup tab before discussing the Standard History or Extended History tabs History is one block of memory divided into two areas one for standard history and one for extended history Standard history uses all of the memory that it requires for the configured number of points Extended history only receives the surplus memory n
141. Enabled O Enabled Scan Period 5 Secs oe E Accum d Pulses 0 Disabled e Disabled Today s Total OO Yesterday s Total OO o Current Rate OO o Active Alarms SST SEI Ba Copy e Update Y OK ACancel Figure 7 27 PI General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Pulse Inputs Tag Point Number EU Value Issued Jan 08 Description Selects the pulse input to be configured The inputs are listed by both Point Number and Tag Note The selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen This read only field identifies the rack location for this point Sets the value for engineering units EUs The EU Value is dependent on how you set the EU Options on the Advanced tab If you set up the PI as a Rate Max Rollover then the system assigns the Current Rate to the EU Value If you set up the PI as an accumulator using Today s Total Max Rollover then the system assigns Today s Total to the EU Value If you set up the PI as an accumulator using Running Total Entered Rollover then the EU Value corresponds to the accumulated pulses times the Conversion The system compares the EU Value to the value entered for the Rollover Value If the EU Value is greater than or equal to the entered Rollover Value t
142. Enter Double click a device in the Device Directory Select a device from the Device Directory and click Connect on the toolbar Select ROC gt Connect to connect to the device currently selected in the Device Directory 3 5 4 Successful Logon A successful logon produces an on line connection and displays both a tree representing the configuration in the FB107 and the FB107 graphic Refer to Configuration Tree Menu ven ROCLINK 800 On Line Comi FB107 C Be gdt vew ROC Configure Meter tines Took window Hep DG RH w TE Ya WR FROGAQBGL GF o d On Line Comt FB107 m ES m e amp Control General Advencnd YO Points Moter Grat Diagnostic Installed Module CPU Actua Module CPU Description Application Firmware Revision Reio Pannumbar M SC Det Dara Serial Number Jeng zamz C0200049 Boot Revision Revit o Boot Build Dato Now 17 2006 832 ek 1 Dara Figure 3 7 Successful Login 3 5 5 Disconnecting from a FloBoss To disconnect an on line connection close the screen by clicking the lower of the two Close buttons x located in the upper right corner of the device screen select the Disconnect button Cel located on the Toolbar or select File gt Close This automatically closes the connection Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 6 Troubleshooting Connection Errors Several events can cause a connection problem
143. FOT OF vcore bin Browse Name OFQ032 Cone Flow Download amp Start Download Version Rev 1 00 Created 3 30 2007 10 21 51 AM CAC 0805A Size 11121 Figure 9 26 User Program Administrator 7 Access ROCLINK 800 s Flags screen ROC gt Flags click Save Configuration and click Yes This ensures that the program automatically restarts after a cold start 9 5 ROCLINK 800 Security Use this option to access a table and define up to 32 user IDs with passwords and levels of system access For a complete description of system security refer to Section 3 7 Security 1 Select Utilities gt ROCLINK 800 Security The ROCLINK 800 Security screen displays 9 24 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 ROCLINK 800 Security Lol 1000 5 WE REG EN WEE WE _ HE 2 E WEE EE E E a Figure 9 27 ROCLINK 800 Security Note The default Operator ID is LOI The default Password is 1000 and the default access level is 5 2 Enter three alphanumeric characters for the Operator ID which 1s typically the initials of the person who operates the device Each Operator ID must be unique and case sensitive 3 Enter four numeric characters between 0000 and 9999 to define the password for this ID More than one user can have the same password 4 Enter the desired access level for the operator ID 0 is the lowest least inclusive access level and allows access to the fewest number of scree
144. FST file with the FST extension 4 Edit each step with the appropriate command label and arguments The Label field is optional but are may be required if you are using the label within a command Enter all required labels to prevent a compile error When you select the Command field the E button appears Click this button to display a list of commands from which to choose Alternately you can type the three character command in the Command field Depending upon which command you choose the Argument fields prompt you to type in a label choose a TLP or enter some other data Place an End command at the end of your FST B 1 9 Compiling to Build and Viewing an FST To build and compile an FST Select FST Build gt Compile or click Build The compiled file displays in the Output FST field If invalid points exist in the FST during compilation you receive an error indicating which Point Number is missing Note If an error occurs during the compile process the Output field lists the error type and the cell in question turns red Correct all errors and recompile Compile errors occur when you Enter invalid arguments or commands in the FST Perform a compile The error displays in the Output field Open an FST from a FloBoss or disk file B 1 10 Downloading the FST to the FloBoss To download the FST to FloBoss memory 1 Click Download on the toolbar or select File gt Download B 8 FST Editor Issued
145. Filter Time 4 Analog Outputs PIN C13 PI 1 Slot4 Filter Time p PI 2 Slot4 Scan Period p PIN C14 PI 2 Slot4 Scan Period 7 AGA Flow Parameters PIN D5 PI 1 Slot5 Conversion 7 AGA Flow Parameters PIN DS HI Glo Conversion 8 History Parameters Low Alarm EU 8 History Parameters Low Alarm EU 10 AGA Flow Calculation Values PIN D13 PI 1 Slot6 High Alarm EU 10 AGA Flow Calculation Values PIN D13 PI 1 Slot6 High Alarm EU 12 Clock PIN D14 PI 2 Slot6 Low Low Alarm EU 12 Clock PIN D14 PI 2 Slot6 Low Low Alarm EU 13 Flags 10 Hi Hi Alarm EU 13 Flags 10 Hi Hi Alarm EU 14 Comm Ports 14 Comm Ports 11 Rate Alarm EU 15 System Variables 15 System Variables 12 Alarm Deadband Rollover Maximum E 16 FST Registers 16 FST Registers 13 EU Value 17 Soft Point Parameters 17 Soft Point Parameters 14 Mode 19 Database Parameters x 19 Database Parameters 15 Alarm Code 20 Module Information 16 Accumulated Value 20 Module Information 16 Accumulated Value be LOD a zJOO wWwMN oO OO JO O P wN CH T Show All Point Types and Parameters Show All Point Types and Parameters PIN D6 RATEAL E ae 5 53 11 FL z OK X Cancel Figure 10 2 TLP Displays Select Tools gt Options to display the Options dialog box Issued Jan 08 Tools Menu 10 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB07 Options Display TLP C As Number eo 103 96 21 Auto Scan Update Interval 1 000 Seconds Y OK K Ca
146. Fixed Number The default value for RBX Attempt 1 is 1 for RBX Attempt 2 is 2 and for RBX Attempt 3 is 3 Select Fixed Number to set how many times ROCLINK 800 retries sending a message after the first unsuccessful attempt If you enter 0 no retries occur Select Continuous 255 to start continuous retries that stop only when the host acknowledges the SRBX alarm Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Extra Key On Delay Indicates whether ROCLINK 800 adds additional delay time to the amount of time it waits after turning on the ready to send RTS signal before sending an RBX message Valid values are Disabled the default or Enabled If you select Enabled you must also indicate the number of seconds for the extra delay Note This parameter may be required for radio communications RBX Alarm Index This read only field shows the alarm currently being 8 reported through RBA RBX Status This read only field shows the status of RBX messaging Valid values are Active an RBX alarm is being processed or Inactive 3 5 Connecting to an FB107 3 5 1 Issued Jan 08 Once you have configured ROCLINK 800 communication parameters you can connect to the FB107 using any one of the following methods Direct Connect Click the Direct Connect icon on the ROCLINK 800 tool bar to connect to the FB107 Device Directory Double click the device icon on the Device Directory
147. Flow Dependent Formulaic Flow Weighted Linear C Flow Weighted Formulaic Active Flow Alarms Ea Copy Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 8 2 Meter Setup Note You can also access this screen by clicking an individual meter icon on the configuration tree Configure the parameters on each tab as they relate to your application Use the General tab to set basic parameters for the meter Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 8 1 1 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Use the Inputs tab to define the field inputs for differential pressure AGA3 ISO 5167 uncorrected volume or mass AGA7 static pressure and temperature to be used in the flow calculation Use the Advanced tab to specify additional parameters for the meter Use the Fluid Properties tab to define the mole percentages for up to twenty gas components as well as the Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity Use the Sampler tab to set up the discrete output DO 2 of the FB107 to send a pulse output to another device such as an odorizer and control a gas sampler for a meter run Note To use this feature select Enabled under Sampler Control Use the Calibration Factors tab displays parameters that allow you to select and perform calculation of optional flow adjustment factor to compensate for the difference in condition between the meter location and the location where the calibration instruments were certified
148. Form Number A6217 Part Number D301249X012 January 2008 ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software User Manual for FloBoss 107 s Remote Automation Solutions EMERSON ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software User Manual FloBoss 107 Revision Tracking Sheet January 2008 This manual may be revised periodically to incorporate new or updated information The revision date of each page appears at the bottom of the page opposite the page number A change in revision date to any page also changes the date of the manual that appears on the front cover Listed below is the revision date of each page if applicable Page Revision Initial issue January 08 NOTICE Remote Automation Solutions RAS division of Emerson Process Management shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors in this manual or omissions from this manual RAS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL AND IN NO EVENT SHALL RAS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PRODUCTION LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF REVENUE OR USE AND COSTS INCURRED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR CAPITAL FUEL AND POWER AND CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES Bristol Inc Bristol Babcock Ltd Bristol Canada BBI SA de CV and the Flow Computer Division are wholly owned subsidiaries of Emerson Electric Co doing busin
149. Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 9 1 Update Firmware 9 2 A Caution Use the Update Firmware option to update the internal software stored in Flash ROM of FB107 components by loading the update from a file The Update Firmware option disables measurement and control while updating It is a good practice to preserve the contents of the event and alarm logs Save them to a file Collect Data BEFORE you update any firmware You cannot reload event logs or alarm logs 1 Create a backup copy of the firmware update disk or download the firmware file from the Remote Automation Solutions website www EmersonProcess com Remote Read the README text file included with the firmware update Select Utilities gt Update Firmware The Update Firmware screen displays WW Update Firmware Aux BPI mws Device Configuration W Save Device Configuration Before Firmware Update iM Restore Device Configuration After Firmware Update File Name Browse Firmware Image to Download File Hame Browse E Statue Start Close Figure 9 2 Update Firmware Note By default the system selects the Device Configuration options Save Device Configuration Before Firmware Update and Restore Device Configuration After Firmware Update This saves your current configuration calibration communication settings and FSTs to the file name you specify Utilities Menu Issued Jan
150. Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Ifthe FST currently loaded is operating you will be prompted to stop the FST and continue with the download or to stop the FST without downloading 3 Enter the Version number and Description of the FST for later identification and click OK Following the download you will be prompted to start the FST or you can start the FST in Monitor Mode or the FST Register screen To verify the FST logic you may desire to start the FST in Trace Mode B 1 11 Saving an FST To save the FST as an individual disk file 1 Select FST gt Save as or click the Write to file button in the FST Editor see Figure B 1 2 Enter the File name and click Save The FST file will be saved with an fst extension wa ROCLINK 00 Function Sequence Table 1 Workspace FST Edit View Build Monitor Window TH CG St AN H aw VM Ki El e d i Figure B 2 FST Editor Toolbar B 1 12 Starting the FST Once an FST is compiled Build gt Compile without errors and is downloaded to the FloBoss you must start the FST before it can run 1 Connect the FloBoss to the computer running ROCLINK 800 2 Select Configure gt Control gt FST Register 3 Select the desired FST from the drop down list box 4 Select the Status Enabled radio button 5 Click Apply and click OK B 1 13 Stopping an FST To stop the execution of an FST 1 Connect the FloBoss to the computer running ROCLINK 800 2 Se
151. LINK 800 communicates with a group of devices either by radio or by other multi drop communications you must define unique host address for each device to avoid multiple responses The host address must also be different from any other host system that may access the communications link Use the following host group and host address conventions 0 and 240 are reserved Host Group Identifies the PC s host group which by default is 1 When using ROC Protocol the group address must match the address defined at the destination device in order for communications to properly transmit Use the following host group and host address convention 0 and 240 are reserved Use Sets the type of connection Valid values are Comm Port Modem or TCP IP Note If you select TCP IP ROCLINK 800 applies only the Time Out parameter you define on the Advanced tab No other parameters defined on that tab apply PC Comm Port Sets the comm port on the PC ROCLINK 800 uses for this setup The FB107 can communicate through any of the PC s configured comm ports The default comm port is 1 Note This field is available only if you select the Comm Port option Before you select this parameter check to see which communications ports are assigned in the PC DT Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description PC Baud Rate Sets the baud rate ROCLINK 800 uses to communicate with the device through
152. LINK 800 has a comprehensive help system To acquire help using the menu structure click Help Topics from the Help menu To display context sensitive help on a specific issue select the item parameter field or button and press F1 When you select Help gt Help Topics you display the ROCLINK 800 main help screen A table of contents for all help topics appears on the left of the help topic contents The Help Topics consist of parameter names and menu options Note that some topic names have been abbreviated For example analog input functions appear with AI in front of the name such as in AI Alarms AI Scanning or Al analog inputs ROCLINK 800 Software Va gt gt Hide Back Forward Refresh Contents Index Search Glossary a Welcome to ROCLINK 800 ROCLINK 800 Software Bas Device Root and Device Dire o Configuring Communication The File Menu The Edit Menu The View Menu The ROC Menu o GW The Configure Menu The Meter Menu The Utilities Menu The Tools Menu The Windows Menu The Help Menu Glossary ROCLINK 800 Software Basics Welcome to ROCLINK 800 This help system describes how to use the ROCLINK 800 Configuration Software to configure and monitor ROC800 Series Remote Operations Controllers ROC300 Series Remote Operations Controllers ROCs and FloBoss 103 104 107 407 503 504 Flow Managers Refer to Software Installation Starti
153. List BLM rcc 7 13 9 LGD User List Cart a Chapter 8 The Meter Menu 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 Configuring the Meter Gen 8 1 1 Meter Setup General Tab 8 1 2 Meter Setup Inputs Tab 8 1 3 Meter Setup Advanced Tab 8 1 4 Meter Setup Fluid Properties Tab 8 1 5 Meter Setup Sampler Tab 8 1 6 Meter Setup Calibration Factors Tab 8 1 7 Meter Setup Alarms Tab leie ei WEE GEN WW eh dl Le in INPUT EE SR e Mee le fie El ul E EE 8 2 3 Zero Shift Offset andhRIDBuas eee eee eens Meter WEE SNE O a o Le EE Chapter 9 The Utilities Menu Vi 9 1 9 2 Elei EN luet 9 1 1 Update Firmware CPU Tab 9 1 2 Additional Update Firmware Tabe License Key Administrator ue 9 2 1 Distributing Software Licenses 9 2 2 Installing a cense bevbased 9 2 3 Installing a License Girmng based 9 2 4 Transferring LICENSES ccccceecceecseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseaees 9 2 5 REMOVING alicense Converting EFM Report Eiles User Program Admimtsirator 9 4 1 Downloading a User Hrogram ROCLINK 800 SeCUTrity ccccceececcssceeceseeecseeeecseseesseeseeessaaeees Analog Input Calibration Values MVS Input Calibration Values ccccccccccccseeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees OM Communications Monitor nsaennnnsennnnennesnnnnnenrresrrrennnrresrrrrsenrnnne Contents Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FloBoss 107 Chapter 10 The Tools Menu 10 1 OS A un EE 10 1 Ze lee at Selatan ie ton EE 10 1 Chapter
154. Master Register EE 1 99 Integrity Failure 0 ccccccccceseesseceesesseseeeee 1 9 Master Table Pe E B 12 MODUS EE 7 98 Maximum Custom Displays cccccecceeseeeees 5 18 l 8 Index Issued Jan 08 lee 6 4 Menu ele E 7 1 GOVAN eebe 7 56 EE 4 1 le eege e ee ee ee 12 1 OT EE 8 1 PROC az aati cities ieee te a 6 1 ele EE 10 1 Bue 9 1 Ce eebe 5 1 Ke Tele EE 11 1 Mesg 1 and Mesg hi 7 59 Ke Coenen eee ieee eres ee ee nee ee eee See B 21 Meter Activating TEE 6 7 Advanced Tab EEN 8 9 Alarms Tab EE 8 17 Calibration Daece 8 20 Calibration Factors Tab 8 16 CPU Information aca neran 6 13 DESCHDUON Mis win eae ei ee ea 8 4 Fluid Properties Tab 8 12 General Tab 8 3 HISTO EE 1 71 HPU PAD E 8 7 Mentsen a 8 1 Kiel 8 4 Pipe Diameter accan tence ieee cede 8 8 ie e CC fates tiie eed iene ater 6 12 el 8 14 oe EE 8 1 TAG HE 8 4 WANS ee 8 34 Meter Runs PACUIVAUIING BEE 6 7 Minute AIS ONY EE 5 8 NISC PILO T EE 7 59 MISC 1 through MISC A B 13 le tele EE 1 82 Acknowledging Events amp Alarms 7 103 COMPO EE 7 84 Continuous Polling sennneeannenennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 7 87 CONV El SION EEN 7 96 Events and Alarms A 7 94 Events and Alarms Functionality 7 100 General Tab 7 83 History Conversion sssnnssnnnesennnnsnreesennnenne 7 96 Histon e EEN 7 93 Of E EEN 3 11 Master Table A 7 98 POM OWNEN atia A 3 11 F FOTOCON BE 3 11 Reading Events and Alarms 0008 7 102
155. Moau ule General Cab EE 7 42 76 2 MYS Moaule VO POINTS Ta SEENEN 7 44 7 8 3 Multi Variable Sensor General Tab 7 45 7 8 4 Multi Variable Sensor Advanced Tab 1 48 7 8 5 Multi Variable Sensor Calibration Tab 7 49 7 8 6 Multi Variable Sensor Alarms Tab 7 55 CO WS eet e RE EE 7 56 7 9 1 Function Sequence Table FST Registers ccceccecseeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeesaeeseesaeaeees 7 56 7 9 2 Proportional Integral and Derivative PID Loop 7 60 7 10 COMMOUrING AISTORY PONS EEN 7 71 Issued Jan 08 Contents V ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 10 1 History Setup Setup Tab 7 10 2 History Setup Standard History Tab 7 10 3 History Setup Extended History Tab 7 10 4 Configuring History An Example saaaneennnnnennnnnnnnenennnnnnne elle ee Table EE Modbus COMMUNICATIONS ccccceeeccceeeeeeaeeeeceeceseeecesaeeeeseeeeseees 7 12 1 Modbus Configuration ccccccccecsseeeeeseeeeeeeueeeesaeeeeessaess 7 12 2 Modbus Configuration General Tab 7 12 3 Modbus Configuration Scale Values Tab 7 12 4 Modbus Registers uk 7 12 5 Modbus History Table NEEN 7 12 6 Modbus Conversion Codes ccccccecceccseeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeesnees 7 12 7 Modbus Master Table nnaannnnnnannnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnne 7 12 8 Modbus Events and AlarmS annnannanneannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna Pe US Ce ahs etree cs hen oes ceca teense E 7 13 1 LCD User List t Gtandard 713 2 LCD User
156. Multi Variable Sensor MVS f1 MUD v Tag S MUD General Advanced Calibration Alarms MYS Yalues Address 20 Pressure Temperature Values Diff Pressure 0 0369315 Reverse DP Pressure Pressure ver 0 0369315 14 3680 PSI Temperature 79 53137 Deg F Active Alarms Diff Pressure Temperature Sensor Configuration Write Read Scanning e Enabled C Disabled Normal Poll Sensor Alarms Enabled e Disabled EE Voltage 3 D 62683 InH20 InH20 Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 34 Multi Variable Sensor General tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Note If you change any values on this tab or on the Advanced Calibration or Alarms tabs other than the MVS or Tag fields you must click Write in the Sensor Configuration field to apply those changes to the sensor configuration Field MVS Description Selects the MVS sensor to configure Each MVS has a unique address number to differentiate it from other MVS units because MVS sensors can be multi dropped Address 7 46 Configure Menu Sets the ten character identifier that resides in the MVS Sets the unique address for this device used in the device communications protocol The default address is 1 If the MVS is used in the multi drop mode each MVS must have a unique address Address 240 can be used to poll the sensor to determine the address of the connec
157. NSE KEY PRESENT License Key Event Log Serial Number Figure 9 8 Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key 2 Click Add License The Enter License String dialog box displays Enter License String Enter the 105 Character License String and then click OK We K Figure 9 9 Enter License String 3 Enter the 105 character license string in the dialog box and click OK ROCLINK 800 immediately installs the license on the FB 107 Note Use the Windows Copy and Paste functions to decrease the chances of mis keying the character string Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY Licenses on DEVICE Application Name App Code Version __ Quantity License Source RAS 1 1 00 0 1 Temporary 05 31 2007 11 59 59 PM 05 31 2007 09 56 39 AM Connect to KEY Add License Remove Licenses on KEY i INO LICENSE KEY PRESENT License Key Event Log Serial Number Figure 9 10 Installed String based License 9 2 4 Transferring Licenses With sufficient security authority you can transfer moveable licenses from one USB license key to another This is helpful when you need to perform field upgrades You must have two available USB ports on your PC and use enhanced security USB license key drives To transfer a license from one license key to another 1 Insert the USB license keys in available USB ports on your PC Note ROCLINK 800 designates the first
158. O Interface UO Setup Tab Use this tab to assign types of I O to each channel before you configure the I O points This applies to the software selectable AI DI DO and PI DI channels only 1 Select the I O Setup tab The I O Setup screen displays 1 4 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General WO Setup VO Points 0 Type e AL C DH e Al 2 Dk2 AO 1 C DO e DO 2 e Pi DE e Pl2 C Dl 4 250 Ohm Resistor Installed Al 1 Yes No Al2 Yes No Auto Scan Update Figure 7 4 I O Interface I O Setup tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field UO Type 250 Ohm Resistor Installed Description Sets the types of I O assigned to each channel be before you configure the I O points This applies to the software selectable Al DI DO and PI DI channels only Indicates whether a 250 ohm resistor is used for the analog inputs Valid values are Yes configures inputs to 4 to 20 mA or No configures inputs to 0 to 5 V dc input The default is Yes A 250 ohm resistor is required for use between the and analog inputs when you implement 4 to 20 mA inputs Note This field displays only if you select Al 1 or Al 2 as an I O Type 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 1 3 I O Interface I O Points Tab 7 1 3 I O Interface I O Points Tab Use the I O Points tab to configure assigned points on the FB1
159. OESEROESESEROESESOSUESESOEOESOSOSSESOSUSESSORSSUSESASENESORSESESURSESESSESESERSESESUESESERUESESEASESES TTT 7 84 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Comm Mode Sets the communications mode for the selected comm port The Modbus protocol supports two modes of transmission ASCII and RTU RTU is the default Note You must configure all devices in the same communications network with the same mode of transmission Additionally In either ASCII or RTU mode the transmitting device places the Modbus message into a frame that has a known beginning and ending point See Table 7 4 Modbus Message Framing ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange mode represents each 8 bit byte of data as two ASCII characters that are the hexadecimal representation of the value This allows the messages to be read with the use of a dumb terminal but uses twice as many characters as the RTU mode Each character sent is composed of a start bit 7 or 8 data bits and one or two stop bits with Even Odd or No parity ASCII mode uses Longitudinal Redundancy Checking LRC error checking RTU Remote Terminal Unit mode allows for greater character density and better data throughput than ASCII for the same baud rate Each message is transmitted in a continuous stream Data is sent in 8 bit binary characters RTU mode uses Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC error checking By default RTU is enabled Ta
160. ON esr dees 3 23 p LO EE B 21 End Register E 1 92 Ending History Point ccceceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 95 Erase Workspace onnnennnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnennnne B 11 EE aorangi atosineiacincdentt atest 7 38 SR 7 32 7 35 9 26 aU EE 7 38 EE 7 38 Elte 7 38 S E 7 38 eV GU OG EE 9 15 7 102 Klee ei EE 7 100 EE 5 8 Event LOGGING saraet 7 86 Example PID OOD EE 7 69 Examples FOT FUNGUON sciences R B 6 EX CO EE B 10 Eege eege ee 4 10 XDI QUOM WEE 9 10 Sei Lee ics hac ste ieee neuen eee enero ear 5 39 Extended History kk 4 4 7 73 Extended History Tab ee 7 79 Extended Index ue 1 94 Extra Key On Delai 3 15 F See RE 8 34 FB107 ComM POPS eaa 3 6 3 9 COnNECUNG norski a 3 15 SECUN eee ee eee eekleg 3 21 Software Licenses n nnnnannennnnnnnnennnnnneenne 9 6 Figures lea LOC OM EE 1 5 1 2 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 1 8 1 3 Integrity Alarm cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeenees 1 8 1 4 Configuration Tree nnnennsesennenennnnnni 1 13 TDs OCICS TEP E 1 16 2 1 Device Directory and Device Root 2 1 2 2 Configuration Tree 2 2 2 3 Device Pop up Menu 2 3 2 4 Communication Harameters 2 3 2 5 Device Root 2 4 2 6 Delete Group 2 5 2 Delete Device A 2 6 2 8 Delete All Devices ce ecceeccseeeeeeeees 2 6 3 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications General EE 3 2 3 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Advanced 1 e ae ee A E ere eee eg inert ee 3 5 3 3 Communications
161. OWDY MCF Day LWNEW 1 ENGDAY MMBTU Day Undefined ndetined Undefined 1 2 H S E f H J ndetined Undefined e m ndefined L L ndetined Undefined Undefined z Undefined fe Undefined fed 2 Update Y OK K Cancel Figure 7 61 LCD User List ea P dd DJ 1 1 1 am om P 2 Complete the following fields to define the contents of each user list Field Description List No Sets the number of the LCD User List you want to configure Click w to display all defined lists You can define up to four user lists Title Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for the 8 ees Scroll Time Indicates the number of seconds the Touchpad displays each parameter set before scrolling to the next parameter set Typically the Touchpad displays two parameters at atime Valid values are 0 do not scroll to 255 Note If you set this value to 0 you must use the and keys on the Touchpad to manually scroll through the parameters defined in the list Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 105 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Device Parameter Description Sets the parameter that you want to display on the Touchpad Click to display a Select TLP screen you can use to define the parameter Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for the parameter This read only field shows the engineering units for the associated parameter
162. PU I O assembly MVS modules communication modules and smart application modules You can mouse over an alarm icon to display the definition Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface Active Alarms This read only field shows any alarms that are active for this point When you enable alarming any active limit alarms Such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm appear If you disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 8 3 MVS General Tab to configure the point 7 8 3 Multi Variable Sensor General Tab The Multi Variable Sensor MVS screens provide you with an interface to configure a multi variable sensor Note If you have a dual variable sensor DVS attached to the MVS module you configure it as part of the MVS module If you attach the DVS to the DVS connector on the FB107 base unit you configure the DVS as an analog input Refer to the ROC Protocol Configuration Manual Form A4199 1 Select Configure gt I O gt MVS Sensor The Multi Variable Sensor screen displays showing the General tab Note You can also access this screen by clicking the TLP button on the graphic interface s I O Points screen see Section 7 8 2 Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 45 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107
163. Poit O ll Comm Ports o 0 Undefined Poit O ll Comm Ports o 0 Undefined Poit _ ll Comm Ports o 0 Undefined Fon _ ll Comm Ports o O Undefined Pan ll Comm Ports o Undefined Poit O all Comm Potts o Undefined Fo O0 all Comm Pots o Undefined Poit 0 AI Comm Pots O Undefined Poit O All Comm Pots o 0 Undefined Poit O AI Comm Ports o 0 Undefined Poit O ll Comm Ports o 0 Undefined Poit O AI Comm Ports o 0 Undefined Poit O AI Comm Ports 2 Update w OK Cancel i Apply Figure 7 58 Modbus Registers 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Table Selects a table to which you map regsters You can define up to 12 register tables for an FB107 Each table entry can define multiple registers by using either Point Indexing or Parameter Indexing By making the registers continuous when the Start Register address of a new line is one greater than the End Register address of the previous line you can create a continuous data table for Modbus Function Codes 3 4 or 16 see Table 7 5 up to the limit of 240 bytes per request This type of data table allows access to all its data with one request Map Periodic Hourly or Daily History Index registers to the TLP for the Periodic Index Point Type 124 Parameter 5 or Daily Index Point Type 124 Parameter 6 Table 7 52 Modbus Function Codes Code Meaning Action 01 Read Logic Coil Status Obtain
164. Port 3 8 3 4 Comm Port General ab 3 10 3 5 Comm Ports Modem tab 3 12 Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 3 6 Comm Ports RBX ob 3 14 3 7 Successful LOGIN ccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 3 8 ROCLINK 800 Security cee 3 19 3 9 Device Security 0 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 3 10 Device Security 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 22 4 1 File Men 4 1 4 2 NewtleCGonfgouraton 4 3 4 3 New File Configuration completed 4 4 4 4 Download Contouraton 4 6 4 5 Print Configuration cccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 4 6 Print dE 4 9 4 17 Recent Files a 2c cscs eccesceccsedccdecdeeccsaesdoeee 4 10 5 1 View Menu OptionS annnanneennnnannnennnnnnn 5 1 5 2 Collect Device Data initial 5 2 5 3 Collect Device Data complete 5 3 5 4 View EFM Report 5 4 5 5 Previewed EFM Report 5 5 5 6 Sample EFM Henort 5 6 5 7 Meter Calibration ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeees 5 7 5 8 View Calibration Report cceeeee 5 8 5 9 Calibration Report Print Preview 5 8 5 10 Select History to View 5 10 5 11 History from device ees 5 11 5 12 History from Tier 5 12 5 19 Plotted Ee EE 5 13 5 14 Alarm EE 5 14 5 15 Events Preview c cccccseccsseeseneees 5 15 5 16 Display Adminstrator ccccceeeees 5 16 5 17 Display Adminstrator cccccceeee 5 17 5 18 Display Admins
165. ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description On Alarm Gei When the point enters an alarm condition the FB107 generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm When the point leaves an alarm Clear condition the FB107 generates a Spontaneous Report by Exception message to the host On Alarm Set In either condition an RBX and Clear message generates to the host Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Click OK to display the FB107 graphic This completes the process of configuring the meters Proceed to Section 8 2 Calibration Basics Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 2 Calibration Basics Use the Calibration option to verify the accuracy of your input within contractual parameters to calibrate those inputs to desired parameters or to establish calculation adjustment factors to assure the inputs are within desired parameters The calibration routine provides Verify Calibrate and Zero Shift Offset RTD Bias functions for AI MVS and RTD inputs You can calibrate differential pressure orifice metering may be High or Low Differential Pressure depending on the device static pressure or temperature readings for each meter run Calibration parameters include zero span and up to three midpoints The system automatically logs all new calibration values in the Event Log and optionally to a calibration log Select Meter gt Calibration The
166. Read SE B 8 Reading Events amp Alarms Register 0ccceeeeees 7 102 FS PROM DEVICE anain a B 10 Issued Jan 08 FST From File E B 10 Recent Files cccccceccssseeeeseeeseseessseeesenenenees 4 10 Reference emp 7 49 8 11 Register Number 7 95 Registers e EEN 7 56 Vilele ei CET 7 89 FR TORO EE 7 58 Remove LiCGensekey 9 10 REMOVE Hrograms 1 4 Removing a License EE NOG Eeer 9 14 Renaming Group OF Device cccceececeeeeeceeeeeeneeseeeeees 2 7 Report Pressure AS naannannnnnnnnnennonnnnnennnnnnne 7 49 Reports Calibra WEE 5 6 EF d EE 5 2 Event LOG erene a a aay 5 15 History Alarm and Event Loge 5 8 POL GE 5 12 Viewing from a Device 5 9 Viewing History from atie 5 11 KIEREN 1 87 RESOL eoa E S 7 65 Reset RST Switch 6 16 Results Registe egene gge re eegend n 7 59 ETag 7 86 17 FREVISION EE 3 8 6 9 7 4 7 43 REVISION le ut e WEE 6 8 lege B 12 en WEE 4 7 ROC Se EE 6 14 MEMO EE 6 4 ae itelere EE 3 11 ROC WED EEN 6 1 ROC ROOT EE 2 4 ROG SCONE ee e ee ate ev tea oak 3 15 ROC Intormabon 6 4 General E EEN 6 5 Other Information Tab 6 7 PONG Ke WEE 6 6 Revision Info Tab 6 8 ROC USER MED EE 2 4 4 7 ROCLINK 800 MVS la WEE 1 2 Bil En Le DEE 1 4 ROCLINK 800 Communications 2 1 3 2 Advanced LAD NEE 3 5 ROCLINK 800 Gecurtv 3 19 ROCLINK Security annaannnannnaannnannnnnnnennnenenne 9 24 R ll ver TEEN 1 38 ROMS Gil EE 6 8 ebe B 12 Ea
167. Registers E 7 89 Scale Values Tab 7 87 TIMEOUT aO 7 86 Mode Issued Jan 08 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 TR EE 7 64 Modem FIO DOSS EE 3 12 Se ua 3 4 EE 3 13 Kat 3 12 Module Mismatch 1 9 1 10 Module RACK EE 1 2 iere LEE 4 4 COMMUNICATIONS 0 cee eeeeeeeceececeececeeeeeeeuees 3 7 Communications Alamms 3 9 oP AAAS EE 6 10 UD PV gun EE 7 6 I O Interface Alams 7 4 MYS Alarms aaa dciet cee ews 1 43 7 45 Troubleshooting ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 1 9 1 10 Update Firmware o nnannnannannnannnnnnannnnnnnennnnne 9 5 Momenta GE 7 28 IOV MON siesta edad ohana EA AN RE LA wets 5 41 Montor Mode raoe E B 11 Move t RTE 9 10 MPU LO AGING orie ateatal scantiaral Svacioawlagies ss 6 8 EE eegene ee B 13 WAS GS EE B 13 eeh Ee B 13 WIS fcc tundeh cea AES 7 42 ele 1 46 Advanced TaD EE 1 48 Alarms for Module 7 45 Alarms for Modules cccsceceeceeeeeeeeees 7 43 Alarms Ce BEE 1 55 Calibration RIESEN 7 49 Calibration Values c ce ceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 9 27 General Tab WEE 7 42 7 45 HO OMS TaD BEE 7 44 Interface Alarms ccececceccececeececeeeeceeaeeess 7 43 Module Alamms 1 43 Module Interface Alamms 7 43 Mod le Se a a a a a ea Eat 1 10 Set To Factory Defaults 000 00nn00nn0annaann 9 28 Troublesbootmg kk 9 28 Update Firmware nnannoannannnannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnne 9 5 Voka gaeren tec dene tax R sears ceew 1 47 N New Configuration ccc ceeececseee
168. SE SEEEESE SEES EEE SEE SEE SO DR OE HOSE T SE SOS TOE eT E RENO T ORT fen ee RE EE EE EE E EREEREER EEEE KEE FST Editor Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Category Command Action ABS RR Absolute value of RR E E E a INT l RR Integer value of RR LOG RR Log base 10 of RR e LN RR Natural Log of RR SQR ch RR Square root of RR me st aa Logical NOT SVD NOT SVD 0 gt 1 gt 0 gt 0 E AND SVD SVD AND ARGUMENT1 E OR SVD SVD OR ARGUMENT _ sia a XOR SVD SVD XOR ARGUMENT1 Comparison f RR ARGUMENTI go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL RN AA KEE e lt If RR lt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL E lt If RR lt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL NEE gt If RR gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL ee gt If RR gt ARGUMENT1 go to ARGUMENT2 LABEL Time ST Set Timer ARGUMENT1 to ARGUMENT2 100 mSec intervals E CT If Timer ARGUMENT1 gt 0 go to LABEL ARGUMENT2 ee a ee ec Be DWK RR Day of Week 1 Sunday 7 Saturday ee FE eege Control A0 Set AO ARGUMENT1 output ARGUMENT2 EUs ee DO Set DO ARGUMENT1 status ARGUMENT2 H TDO Force discrete output Recalculation Database VAL RR Value specified in ARGUMENT1 e EE NEE RDB Read History Value into RR Gene Genee E WIM Write Current Time to History eS he o DHT Read Daily History Time Stamp into RR PHV E Read Periodic History Value into RR E a ia ae ee MHV Read Minut
169. ST1 FST SEQ 1 _ For all other cases _ R8 the command increments RR out RR in ARGUMENT2 to the next historical SVD out SVD in _ database value and sets it to 0 when the number of archived historical periods are exceeded Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Note Each ARGUMENT2 must be B 4 2 Defining a FST History Point Historical Commands When defining history database points for WDB WTM and RDB you must define at least one History Point as an FST Time type minute or second to provide a time stamp for the values logged The time stamps represent what time each portion of the accumulated data was logged To define an FST History Point 1 Select Configure gt History Points 2 Select the desired History Point 3 Click the Archive Type TLP button and select FST Time or FST Data 4 Click the Archive Point TLP button and select any TLP such as FST Register 2 to contain the data or time stamp The Archive Point selection is ignored by the FST 5 Click OK The FST for a History Point uses one of the historical database commands and two Arguments ARGUMENTI typically contains the history database History Point number with a value between 1 through 200 ARGUMENT72 is the History Index or database pointer to the history storage array The history storage array holds entries taken at either set intervals typically daily hourly and each minute or user configurable intervals For the
170. Security EE 3 21 3 1 Communications Issued Jan 08 Before you attempt to connect to an FB107 you must configure communication parameters in two places ROCLINK 800 Communications Configure device communications on the Device Directory screen see Chapter 2 Device Directory and Device Root This sets the PC s comm ports to communication with a specific device Communication Ports on the FB107 Select ROC gt Comm Ports to access the Comm Port screen and configure the FB107 s communication ports for incoming or outgoing communications Refer to Section 3 3 Communication Ports on the FB107 Communications and Security 3 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications The Device Directory communication configurations allow ROCLINK 800 to communicate to an individual FB107 3 2 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters General Tab The Device Directory screen is the first screen that displays after you successfully log onto ROCLINK 800 but before you connect to a device To display the ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters screen right click on a device icon in the device root and select Properties The ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters screen displays showing the General tab Use the General tab to configure basic communications for the PC running ROCLINK 800 ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters Tag COM1 Device Y Connect Destination Source Device Address i Host Address E Dev
171. Select Configure gt Control gt PID Loop The PID Loop screen displays PID Loop Tag Gas Flow General Inputs Outputs Advanced Scanning Mode Output Type Control Type Enabled Manuel f Analog Priman Ony Override Control f Disabled f Auto Discrete Override Only Primary Override Overnide Type Select Setpoint Dis 0 0 High Process Variable Dis 0 0 Low Loop Selected Disabled Output Change Dis 0 0 Output big Tuning Primary Gain O5 Rezet DIE Rate oo scale Factor a0 Copy Auto Scan Update y OK Cancel Figure 7 45 PID Loop For any given PID point you can define two separate PID loops Primary Only and Override Only You indicate which loop is active with a selection in the Control Type field Primary Only disables the Override Control loop if defined leaving only the Primary loop active Similarly Override Only disables the Primary loop leaving only the Override loop active If you select Override Control in the Control Type field both loops are active The system then selects a change in output based on either a low or high limit selection configured in the Override Type Select field To control the regulating device the PID control loop uses either one analog output or two discrete outputs If you use discrete output control one DO provides open forward control and the other DO provides close reverse control You define these outputs on the PID Loop screen
172. Set and Clear Ba Copy Update Y OK ACancel Apply Figure 8 10 Meter Setup Alarms tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Time Basis for Alarming Alarm Deadband Description Sets how frequently the system generates alarms Valid values are Alarm on Daily Flow Rate or Alarm on Hourly Flow Rate The default is Alarm on Daily Flow Rate Sets the value to which the calculated flowrate must fall to generate a low alarm For the FB107 the system assumes the engineering units for the input to be MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day Sets the value to which the calculated flowrate must rise to generate a high alarm For the FB107 units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day Sets a value that defines an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits This deadband prevents the system from setting and clearing the alarm continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit For the FB107 units assumed for the input are MCF per day 1000 ft day or cubic meters per day m day RBX Alarming Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception RBX or SRBX alarming options for the meter run Note SRBX Alarming requires you to properly configure your communications ports Valid values are Meter Menu Disabled RBX Alarming is turned off Issued Jan 08
173. Signal Value Discrete cccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 59 EE B 12 Slave Register ccccssseeccsseecceeseeeseeseeessaaees 7 99 Sleep MOOG E 6 11 Slow Pulse Filter Time a0nnnannnnannannnnannnennnna 7 38 SOM OMS ee E 7 41 Software Installation cccecceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 1 2 Sp Heat Ralio WEE 8 14 SP Ramp Rate osceuci de idec foedceutictancidediestiehnaiads 7 69 SPCC EE EE 8 14 UWS SSG CS eege 6 14 Slacked Ee eer dee 8 9 Standard History ccccccsseeeeeseeeeeeaeeeees 4 4 7 73 Standard History Tab 7 74 voy leg te a oaea 7 86 Start e ET EE 7 92 Start User Program dee eege 9 21 Starting FS RE B 9 ROCLINK 800 Software aaannnnnnnnnannnnennnnnni 1 4 Starting History Point nnaaannnnennnnnannnennnnnennnn 7 95 Starting Heouest 7 86 Eeer eeneg ee Ee 7 28 Static K FactOr EE 8 8 Static Pressure scheint tees 8 8 9 28 Eegeregie 7 22 7 58 9 21 Status on Power Heset 7 31 Eeer B 4 SOD BIS en ene et int er eee ee cr te N 3 10 Stop User Programa eege ee 9 21 Stopping Se KEE B 9 ele BEE 1 16 Sring LICENSES EE 9 7 String based License fe lee WEE 9 10 Seege 7 59 E EE 7 59 System PONE EE 6 12 T UE ge de 7 91 Table EE 7 81 Tables 1 1 Menu Listing for ROCLINK 800 1 6 3 1 Communications Ports for the FB107 3 7 3 2 Security Access level 3 20 7 1 AGA 3 EFM History Ponts 1 15 7 2 AGA 7 EFM History Ponts 7 16 7 3 Archive Types an 1
174. Standard Quantity SVA SVD System Variables T C TCP IP TDI TDO Tf TLP Transaction Turbine meter TX or TXD Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Scientific Apparatus Maker s Association An uncompiled text file Such as keystrokes for a macro that a program interprets in order to perform certain functions Typically the end user can easily create or edit scripts to customize the software The controlled stream often called the ethanol product The side stream is metered and can be controlled and measured A mix component measured by both a side stream meter and a primary blend stream meter Ethanol is often referred as a side stream component A meter that measures the side component ethanol A module typically for the ROC800 Series or FloBoss 107 devices having an on board processor which can execute a program A type of ROC point with generic parameters that can be configured to hold data as desired by the user Setpoint or Static Pressure Slow Pulse Input Speaker Static Random Access Memory Stores data as long as power is applied typically backed up by a lithium battery or supercapacitor Spontaneous Report By Exception SRBX always refers to Spontaneous RBX in which the ROC contacts the host to report an alarm condition The gross quantity corrected to standard temperature and or pressure This is a quantity measurement Calculation standard quantity gross quantity times
175. Start amp Clear All 1 10 Introduction Issued Jan 08 1 6 3 Standard Buttons Several buttons appear on most ROCLINK 800 screens Button 1 6 4 Toolbar Buttons The following buttons appear in the ROCLINK 800 toolbar ROCLINK 800 grays out a button if it is not applicable to the current screen Issued Jan 08 Button Opens an existing configuration file You create configuration files using the New Device or Save Configuration functions Tl Saves the current configuration of the connected device to a disk file ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Minimizes and hides windows Expands options listed in the Device Directory or Configuration Tree Menu Hides options listed in the Device Directory of Configuration Tree Menu Prints the active display closes the active window A Confirm Save dialog box displays if there are unsaved changes Cancels without saving changes and close the active window Applies changes on the active window to the device Clicking Apply does not close the active window Starts automatic device polling Description Creates a new configuration file You specify available configuration parameters using menu selections Configure the file as if you were connected to the device Functions requiring a live connection are unavailable in this mode Introduction 1 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Delet
176. Table B 6 the Value VAL command in Step O writes the current process value of analog input module 3 channel 1 in EUs to the Result Register RR which is implied The label in this example CKHIAL serves only as a comment since no other function branches to it Table B 6 FST Function Examples STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT1 ARGUMENT2 O CKHIAL VAL AIN 3 1 EU 1 gt AIN 3 1 HIAL PUMPON In this example when the RR value from step equals or exceeds gt the High Alarm value VAL in step 2 and the High Alarm limit HIAL condition is met the FST branches to the PUMPON label to turn the pump on Note Refer to the FST User Manual Form A4625 for additional examples You should be aware of several rules when creating FSTs An END command is required at the end of every FST The END command tells the FST to return to the top of the first step and begin to run from the first line at step O or to the step where the FST begins However you can use a branching function to force the FST to immediately return to step 0 if you do not want to wait for the next execution cycle to begin If an END command is not present the FST Editor automatically adds the END command when compiling The first blank line found in an FST is automatically converted to the END command Any commands following a blank line are lost Each FST can have only one END Avoid internal loops and direct the program flow to the END Command
177. Use Wait states WT command to suspend operation of the FST whenever possible to reduce MPU processor overload especially in a loop in which a condition is being repeatedly checked Configure the I O parameters before referencing them in an FST FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 When using any branching command GO lt gt lt gt make sure that you have defined the label that the command references B 1 6 FST Storage and Restart This section details what FST configuration data is stored when a write to Internal Configuration Memory EEPROM is performed and what happens to the FST after a Cold Start Warm Start or after upgrading the FloBoss firmware Write to Internal Config Memory FSTs are permanently saved to memory Warm Start If an FST is saved to memory and it is active running when a restart occurs FSTs automatically restart at the beginning STEP Cold Start On a Cold Start FST Registers will be cleared but will be restored from Internal Config Memory if valid However if you perform a Cold Start amp Clear FSTs or a Cold Start amp Clear ALL type of Cold Start the FSTs are permanently cleared from Internal Config Memory Upgrading Firmware If an FST is saved to memory and it is active running when a firmware upgrade occurs FSTs will be turned off and need to be MANUALLY restarted B 1 7 Creating an FST Issued Jan 08 Y
178. Value parameter on General tab to value in Low Reading EU field value or Retain Last Value maintain last output value Retain Last Value is the default Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description RBX Alarming Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX SURES alarming Tor tnis point Malla Valles are Disabled Turns off RBX alarming This is the default On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to the host when the point enters an alarm condition On Alarm Clear Generates an RBX message to the host when the point leaves an alarm condition On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to _ and Clear the host when the point enters or leaves an alarm condition communications port Refer to Section 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 4 Discrete Input DI Configuration Discrete Input DI modules monitor the status of relays open collector open drain type solid state switches and other two state devices Each DI channel can also be software configured to function as a latched DI which remains in the active state until reset Other parameters can invert the field signal and gather statistical information on the number of
179. Write Device Data error 129 Access Device Data error E chal CNS eaan E L S E 144 Transmit or Receive buffer overflow 145 Invalid Function Number in request 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 12 8 Modbus Events and Alarms 7 12 8 Modbus Events and Alarms To view the Modbus Event Log and Alarm Log select Configure gt Modbus gt History The record formats for the event log and alarm log are the same size and have similar contents The first word in a record is a bit map in which bit 9 indicates 1f the log record is an event 1 or an alarm 0 The meanings of the other bits are specific to either the event or the alarm log records Refer to Table 7 13 Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map Contents The FB107 supports Modbus using the EFM extensions method for retrieving alarms and events When the FB 107 receives a Function Code 03 request referencing the defined Events and Alarms Register usually 32 the FB107 begins to collect records first from the event log and then from the alarm log starting where the last poll left off The FB107 collects records until either there are no more new events and alarms or the it collects the maximum of 12 records The FB 107 sends the information back to the host which in return replies with Function Code 05 referencing the same Events and Alarms Register indicating that the points have been received and that the host is ready for the next
180. X Cancel Figure 7 26 Pulse Input The Pulse Input screen has three tabs Use each tab to configure a component of the input Use the General tab to set the basic parameters for the PI point Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as EU Options Rate Period Rollover value and Conversion for the pulse input Use the Alarms tab to sets the alarm parameters for this PI point Note If you enable Alarming Configure gt I O gt PI Points gt General tab configure the limit alarms four levels rate and deadband on the Alarms tab By disabling alarms you can prevent alarms from generating for this point To conserve alarm log space enable alarms only when necessary If you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one to prevent the generation of false alarms Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 6 1 Pl General Tab The Pulse Input screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to set the basic parameters for the pulse input point 7 34 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Pulse Input Pulse Inputs ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 SEI CARE Tag P11 Sloti General Advanced Alarms Paint Number A13 Frequency 0 0 Pulses Second EU Value Units 20 Scanning Alarming e
181. a logarithmic scale Data Carrier Detect modem communications signal In addition Discrete Control Device A discrete control device energizes a set of discrete outputs for a given setpoint and matches the desired result against a set of discrete inputs DI Data Communication Equipment A value that is an inactive zone above the low limits and below the high limits The purpose of the deadband is to prevent a value Such as an alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the specified limit This also prevents the logs or data storage location from being over filled with data In ROCLINK 800 the graphical display that allows navigation through the PC Comm Ports and ROC Comm Ports set up screen Discrete Input Input or output that is non continuous typically representing two levels such as on off Digital multimeter Discrete Output The process of sending data a file or a program from a PC to a ROC Differential Pressure Data Set Ready modem communications signal Data Terminal Equipment Data Terminal Ready modem communications signal Proportion of time during a cycle that a device is activated A short duty cycle conserves power for I O channels radios and so on Digital voltmeter Dual Variable Sensor A device that provides static and differential pressure inputs to a ROC Electronic Static Discharge Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory a fo
182. a unique description up to 30 alphanumeric characters in length that further identifies or provides information about this meter Calculation Standard Sets the standard the system uses for flow calculations Valid values are AGA3 92 AGA3 1992 for orifice or 8 differential metering AGA7 96 AGA7 1996 for turbine pulse rotary or other linear meters 1S05167 2003 1S0O5167 2003 firmware calculates User C Flow User C program calculates flow Program Note The calculation of flow in a meter run depends on the type of FloBoss or ROC being configured 8 4 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Type of Units Flow Alarming Integral Multiplier Period Base Multiplier Period ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets the units for the meter that you are configuring Valid values are Volume volume metering device like a turbine meter or Mass Micro Motion Coriolis Mass Meter or similar mass meter Enables or disables flow alarming for the meter If you enable alarms use the Alarms tab to configure the alarms If Enabled alarms also log to the Alarm Log If you disable alarms no alarm generates for this meter regardless of the alarm configuration However the system displays alarm conditions in the Active Flow Alarms field Sets in minutes how frequently the system calculates the combined correctional factors known as the Integral Multiplier Value IMV per the API measurement standard Chapt
183. ad completes a Reconnect to Device Completed message displays in the Status field at the bottom of the Update Firmware screen ROCLINK 800 also adds an Updated flag to the information displayed in the Firmware Image to Download frame You can also verify the upgrade on the Device Information screen ROC gt Information gt Revision Info If you saved the configuration to Flash memory ROCLINK 800 performs a cold start to reload the configuration Note If you selected the Restore Device Configuration After Firmware Update option on the Update Firmware screen this step is not required Utilities Menu 9 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 11 Check the configuration and FSTs If they are not correct reload them using File gt Download from the files you created in Step 4 12 Save the configuration using ROC gt Flags gt Save Configuration to permanent FB107 memory 9 4 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 9 1 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Update Firmware CPU Tab The Update Firmware screen initially displays the CPU tab Use this tab to view the currently installed firmware version and if necessary download a new firmware image WW Update Firmware Device Configuration Aux BPI mws W Save Device Configuration Before Firmware Update If Restore Device Configuration After Firmware Update File Name Browse Firmware Image to Download File Hame Browse KE Status
184. al FB107 Name Description Arguments Results ARGUMENT 1 and value 2 Input Database or Constant RR out RR in _ ARGUMENT2 in the Alarm Log Value lt SVD out SVD in _ Only the first 10 characters of the _30 character messages are used _ EVT 2 Log Event records message 1 Input Message Log Event ARG1 ARG2 _ ARGUMENT and value 2 Input Database or Constant 1 RR out RR in _ ARGUMENT2 in the Event Log Value S VD out SVD in Only the first 10 characters of the 20 character message are used Note The ALM and EVT functions can quickly overfill the allotted log space of alarms and events It is important to assure that these two functions do not operate continuously FST Database Database commands provide access to the configuration and historical Commands databases Operations include reading and writing configuration parameters and reading writing storing values from historical databases and time stamping values to a History Point Command Description VAL Loads the Results Register RR with the value defined in ARGUMENT1 ARGUMENT can be a constant or any database parameter available to the FST The value defined in ARGUMENT is converted to floating point data type and written to the Results Register SAV Writes the Results Register RR value to any database parameter available to the FST as defined in ARGUMENT 1 WDB WTM and RDB These historical d
185. ally removes any invalid files and displays a log in the Log frame at the right side of the screen Click in the Select Folder for Converted File s field The Select Folder for Converted Files screen displays Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 EI Select Folder for Converted Files Fath C Program Files SROCLINE S00 E c Mjollnir MM Sack J Program Files ROCLINKSOO U Displays EJ FB107 Licenses Y OK AS Cancel Figure 9 20 Select Folder for Converted Files 8 Select the folder in which ROCLINK 800 should store the converted files and click OK Note If you have selected AGA DET as a format skip to step 12 If you have selected Flow Cal as a format proceed to the next step 9 Select the options for file name prefix If applicable you can select both Station Address amp Group and EFM File Collection Date amp Time 10 Select the meter runs Note By default ROCLINK 800 selects all the displayed meter runs Click Deselect All to individually select specific runs 11 Select a starting and ending period for the records to be converted Click to display a calendar 12 Click Start Conversion ROCLINK 800 converts the files using the options you have selected When the conversion completes a message appears in the Log frame on the right hand side of the screen and a message displays Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual
186. alue an FST acquires Softpoints consist of a ten character identifier tag one integer value 16 bits from 0 to 65 535 and up to 20 floating point values The FB107 supports up to 32 softpoints 1 Select Configure gt I O gt Soft Points The Soft Point screen displays Soft Point Softpoints seen lesa Taq Soft Pt Data Integer Flag ooo Daai 00 Data 11 00 OOO Data 2 0 0 OOO Daata 00 Data 3 00 Daa 3 00 OOOO Daa 4 00 Date pd IDN OOOO Daa 5 00 Data 15 00 Daae 00 Data 16 00 Data 7 00 Daa 7 00 Data 8 00 Data ie 00 9 Data 9 00 Dem D Daato 00 Data 20 00 Copy Update Y Ok 7 Cancel Figure 7 30 Soft Point 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Softpoints Sets the softpoint to configure Click w to display all available softpoints Tag tsi Sets a 10 character identifier for the softpoint Integer Flag Sets a 16 bit unsigned integer value the system uses to indicate a status The value may be under the control of an FST or a user program Data 1 through Sets up to 20 parameters Data 1 to Data 20 to Data 20 provide storage for IEEE floating point values for the softpoint 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note After you successfully configure a softpoint access the Flags screen ROC gt Flags and click Save Configuration This saves a configuration and assoc
187. ameter as shown on the _General tab Today s Total Uses the value of Today s Total parameter as shown on the General tab Running Total Uses a value calculated by multiplying the accumulated pulses shown on the General tab by the Conversion factor If the EU Value exceeds the Rollover value it is cleared and starts to accumulate again from 0 Note This option does not clear EU values at the contract Conversion Sets the conversion value if you selected Rate as an EU option Valid values are EUs Pulse associates a specific number of engineering units typically fractional parts such as 0 01 with a single pulse or Pulses EU associates a specific number of pulses such as 100 with one engineering unit Note If you use the PI as input to the AGA calculations complete the Conversion Factor field to produce the EU value as MCF or kM Slow Pulse Filter Time Sets the amount of time in seconds between the start of a pulse and the recognition of that pulse Click w to display all valid values Estimate the amount of signal bounce time so that the FloBoss does not count noise as actual pulses If you select None the default value the FloBoss recognizes all pulse signal movement as actual pulses Rate Period Sets a value in EUs not pulses to indicate when rollover should occur Note This field is available only if you select Running Total as an EU Option value Sets how the system calculat
188. any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tab 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tab Issued Jan 08 Use this tab to configure time duration parameters for this DO point Note This tab does not display if you choose Latched in the DOUT Type field on the General tab 1 Select the TDO Parameters tab The TDO Parameters screen displays Discrete Output Discrete Outputs I DO 2 slot Tag Do 2 slot Cycle Time 5 Seconds 0 Count 3 Seconds 100 Count h Seconds Low Reading EU o o High Reading EU 00 0 EU Value o o Units Percent ZlUpdate Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 24 DO TDO Parameters tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Cycle Time Sets in seconds the total amount of time the cycle spends in the on and off positions Configure Menu 7 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description 0 Count Sets in seconds the amount of time the cycle is in the on position when the EU is at zero percent Note 0 and 100 should equal the cycle time 100 Count Sets in seconds the amount of time the cycle is in the on position when the EU is at 100 percent Note 0 and 100 should equal the cycle time Low Reading EU Sets the engineering unit EU for the low reading to zero percent output low end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU value is converted to a correspo
189. are licenses convert EFM files manage user programs set ROCLINK 800 security view AI and MVS calibration values access the FST Editor and monitor communications Tools Window Help Update Firmware License Key Administrator Convert EFM File User Program Administrator P ROCLINK 800 Security AI Calibration Values MVS Calibration Values FST Editor Communications Monitor Figure 9 1 Utilities Menu Note Refer to Appendix B The FST Editor for detailed information on using FSTs In This Chapter 9 1 Update gn TE 9 2 9 1 1 Update Firmware CPU Tab 9 5 9 1 2 Additional Update Firmware Tab 9 5 9 2 License Key Administrator 9 6 9 2 1 Distributing Software Licenses nannnnnennnnnnnnenennnenennee 9 6 9 2 2 Installing a License Key based nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnennnnn 9 7 9 2 3 Installing a License String based ccecseeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 10 9 2 4 Transferring Licenses ccccceeceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeas 9 12 9 2 5 Removing a License AEN 9 14 9 3 Converting EFM Report Files cccccccsesccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeees 9 16 9 4 User Program Administrator 9 20 9 4 1 Downloading a User Program c cccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeees 9 21 9 5 ROCLINK 800 Gecutv 9 24 9 6 Analog Input Calibration Values ccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeees 9 26 9 7 MVS Input Calibration values 9 27 GES FST 6 0 EE 9 29 9 9 COMMUNICATIONS Monitor 9 29
190. as a Modbus host device on COM 1 COM2 and COM3 In addition to a general configuration screen you can use the options in this section to define Modbus registers history and the Modbus master slave relationship 7 12 1 Modbus Configuration Use this option to set basic Modbus communication parameters The General tab sets the basic communication parameters The Scale Values tab allows you to enter eight low and high floating point scale values with one low and high integer values for converting floating point numbers to a scaled integer Select Configure gt Modbus gt Configuration The Modbus Configuration screen displays 7 82 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Modbus Configuration General Scale Values Comm Fort Comm Mode Bute Order e ATU e Least Significant Byte First ASCII Most Significant Byte First Slave Mode Event Logging Exception Status No Eror e Enabled C Disabled Master Mode Start Polling DW Starting Request 1 Timeout 30 Seconds Humber of Requests o Retries E Continuous Polling f Enabled e Disabled Request Delay i 0 Seconds Update vw OK J Cancel Figure 7 55 Modbus Configuration The Modbus Configuration screen has two tabs Use each tab to configure a Modbus component Use the General tab to configure Modbus communication parameters Use the Scale Values tab to convert floating point numbers to scaled integers Not
191. as a file on your PC using one following file name extensions you select Print Preview Displays a preview of the report data Refer to Section 4 5 1 Print Configuration for information on managing the print preview Close Closes the display Viewing History Logs from a Device When you choose to view history logs from a connected device ROCLINK 800 displays a dialog box You use this dialog to specify the report contents 1 Select View gt History gt From Device The Select History to View screen displays View Menu 5 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 select History to View Point 1 FLAME 1 MINTO TOTAL Point 2 A4G amp NEM 1 CUR OP Avi Point 3 AGANEW 1 CUR SF AVG Point 4 GAME WT CUR TP AVG Point 5 FOW NEW 1 IMB MY AVI Point 6 FOW NEW 1 HW PF AVL Point 7 FONE 1 FLOW D Y ACCOM Dap Point 5 FOW NEW 1 ENGDAY ACCUM Dap History Points Select All Deselect All History Type e Minute C Hour Dau C MiniMax C Extended y OK 7 Cancel Figure 5 10 Select History to View Note This screen initially displays with all points selected 2 Select or de select the history points and history types to include on the view 3 Click OK ROCLINK 800 retrieves the data you have selected and displays it on a preview screen View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 ROCLINK 800 Minute History A1G2 FB107 SEE File Edit View ROC
192. ata in history such as the data entered at 9 00 AM yesterday first use the Starting Periodic Index PIS command to find the starting History Index value for yesterday s date and then count forward nine to acquire the History Index value for 9 00 AM Use this new History Index with the Periodic History Value PHV command to locate the data Table B 17 FST Historical Commands Description 1 Input 2 Input Index Arguments History Segment History Point _ Halts on invalid History Index DB Point or Constant History Results Stores value in RR Periodic History Time Daily History Time Stamp Otten tetera rem NENNEN EEN Periodic History Value 1 Input 2 Input Eat Input History Segment History Point DB Point or Constant History History Segment History Point DB Point or Constant History History Segment History Point DB Point or Constant History Stores value in RR Halts on invalid History Index Stores value in RR Halts on invalid History Index Stores value in RR _ Halts on invalid History Index Starting Daily Index Stamp 2 Input 2 Index _ Minute History Value 1 Input 2 Input ___ Index 2 Input History Segment History Point _ Halts on invalid History Index DB Point or Constant History 1 Input History Segment History Point Returns 1 if Month Day not found Month Day Stores value in RR Stores value in
193. atabase commands Write to Historical Database WDB Write Time to Historical Database WTM and Read Historical Database RDB allow you to establish a non periodic history database one that has no specific time interval a periodic history database one that has a specific time interval or a storage array for data similar to a softpoint For the FST historical database commands to work a History Point has to be configured correctly for a FST History Point as either FST Time Archive Type or FST Data Archive Type Refer to Section B 4 2 Defining a FST History Point The FST for a History Point uses one of the historical database commands and two Arguments ARGUMENT contains the history database point number ARGUMENT can be a constant or a parameter with a value between 1 through 87 TITTEN ARGUMENT2 Provides an index or pointer to the history storage array The history storage array holds entries taken at either set intervals typically daily hourly and each minute or user configurable intervals For information on the intervals and number of entries B 22 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Command Description manual ARGUMENT2 should be a Soft point or FST register The history point defined by ARGUMENT will be logged at the index location defined by ARGUMENT2 Table B 16 FST Database Commands Name Description VAL Load RR sets the RR out to the argument 1 Input Da
194. atabase or aaa Mecano fav None EXP e to the power of RR in None INT y Integer part of RR in y None LOG Logarithm base 10 of None RR in w a RR in SQR Square Root of RR in None P3 3rd order Polynomial None ERE ae ERC m GEN E E So Rout RR in SVD out SVD in onsen sae ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Results _RR out RR in ARG1 __SVD out SVDiin eem oes _ RR out RR in ARG1 _ SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in ARG1 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in RR out e RR in _ SVD out SVD in RR out int RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in gt 0 0 RR out LOG RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in gt 0 0 RR out LN RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in If RR in gt 0 0 RR out SQRT RR in SVD out SVD in Otherwise RR out RR in SVD out SVD in RR out reg1 RR in 3 reg2 RR in 2 _ reg3 RR in 1 reg4 _where reg through reg4 are the current _ constant values of Register 1 through _ Register 4 of the respective FST SVD out SVD in FST Logical You can store a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD Commands in the Compare Flag CF The SVD is stored as an 8 bit byte The CF is true whenever non zero and the CF is false when z
195. ation values between the Dead Weight Tester Value and the Live Reading values 10 Enter a value in the Dead Weight Tester Value for the span and click Set Span to set a span value and record the values in the calibration log Note that ROCLINK 800 changes the screen name and button name to Set Mid 1 set Mid 1 Point AID Action 4s Found As Left Deviation 4 Deviation Set ero Fo foe 0 000 fo foe 5 5684 2 Dead Weight T ester Value Live Reading Deviation 85 3756 z l Set Mid 1 A Cancel Y Done Figure 7 12 Set Midpoint 1 Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 11 If you do not wish to configure midpoints click Done The AI Calibration screen displays If you wish to configure midpoints click Set Mid 1 to define the first midpoint value You can define up to three midpoints typically at 25 50 and 75 Click Done when you finish configuring midpoints When the AI Calibration screen displays you can calibrate inputs for another AI or RTD by starting again at step 1 Otherwise proceed to Section 7 2 4 AI Alarms Tab 7 2 4 Al Alarms Tab Use this tab to set the alarm parameters for this AI point Note You must enable alarming on the General tab to configure the limit alarms Low High LoLo HiHi Rate and Deadband on this tab To conserve alarm log space enable alarms only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check an
196. ays Pulse Input Pulse Inputs 1 PT Glo x Tag Pi Sloth Low Alarm High Alarm LoLo Alarm HIHI Alarm Rate Alarm 10 0 20 5 0 e i Alarm Deadband RES Alarming Disabled On Alarm Set C On Alarm Clear On Alarm Set amp Clear Update v JRK A Cancel Figure 7 29 PI Alarms tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 39 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Low Alarm Description Sets in engineering units a limit value to which the input value must fall to generate a Low alarm Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must rise to generate a High alarm Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must fall to generate a LoLo alarm Note Typically you set the value for the LoLo Alarm lower than the value for the Low alarm Rate Alarm Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must rise to generate a HiHi Alarm Note Typically you set the value for the HiHi Alarm higher than the value for the High alarm Sets in engineering units a value that represents the maximum amount of change allowed in the calculated rate between updates before an alarm generates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm occurs Note To disable the rate alarm without disabling the other alarms you can set the rate alarm
197. b See Section 7 10 2 History Setup Standard History Tab for a description of the fields on this screen 7 10 4 Configuring History An Example Following is a quick step by step example for configuring history 1 Verify that you are on line with the FloBoss 2 Select Configure gt History Points 3 Click the Setup tab The Setup screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 79 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 80 4 Enter the required number of Standard History Points 5 Enter the required number of Extended History Points Note Specify enough Standard and Extended History Points to accommodate your present application and any foreseeable changes Changing the number of points later initiates a Cold Start amp Clear History If you must change the number of points later make a back up of the history log before you make changes 6 Define the Sample Interval for the history points 7 Review the values displayed in the Number of Entries and Number of 10 11 12 13 14 15 Days fields to determine whether they are adequate for your application If not adjust the number of defined history points and sampling interval Note The Number of Entries and Number of Days fields dynamically adjust their values depending on the total number of defined history points and the sampling interval Click Apply The system displays a dialog box reminding you that your changes require a Cold Start amp Clear His
198. b 6 8 6 9 2 CPU Information Advanced Tab 6 10 6 9 3 CPU Information I O Points Tab 6 11 6 9 4 CPU Information Meter Points Tab 6 12 6 9 5 CPU Information Diagnostic Tab 6 13 AO EE 6 14 610 1 Flags General TaD eee ener eae ee irre ete eer rn eee rn ee ere ere pee eae 6 14 6 10 2 Returning a Device to Factory Default Gettmgs ce cccccceesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeens 6 17 OOo TIA SVAN IC CO EE 6 17 Chapter 7 The Configure Menu 7 1 fA GOntiguringlnpuyOUIPUt CO eege E a 7 2 TVs WO Memace GeMeral la EEN 7 3 TA 2 WO lntenace 1 0 Setup Tabuen ek ieee heise ie ae es anes 7 4 e VO untenace WO POMS Tab tiated secs ee dee ae oe 7 5 Tz Analog Input ERR ei te UL e EE 7 6 G21 Al General Ta EE 7 8 T 2 2 PAWAGVANCEC Ee EE 1 9 L23 AVA e Meier ele TaD EE 7 11 TAN AVATARS Ke WEE 7 14 7 3 Analog Output LEE EEGEN ae 7 16 Tok AO General TaD varccsee erte Ee 7 16 F232 AO AGVaNCEG TAD EE 7 18 ZA Discrete Input DI Configuration seiniin E a aa e aa a 7 20 TAA HEH Eet Ee EE 7 21 TAZ WVAGVANCCE RE 1 23 VA NOVAGEN VA WEEN 1 25 7 5 Discrete Output DO CGonfguraton nne 7 26 T51 DO General Tab ee ee 7 27 15 2 DOAdvanced Tab ees EE 7 30 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tab 7 31 eeh DOAS Tee ee 1 32 To Pulse put Pl Configurators aa deele 7 33 FOr cea SI CYS es Rel brs EE 7 34 T2022 PAV NCO TaD EE 1 37 FOS E E lg nn Ke EEN 1 39 FE dE un Ren EE 7 41 7 8 Multi Variable Sensor MVS Contguraton 7 42 0 1 MYS
199. ble 7 4 Modbus Message Framing ASCII Message Framing 2 Characters 2 Characters N Characters 2 Characters CRLF RTU Message Framing Begin of Frame Data CRC Error Check End T1 T2 T3 T4 1 Byte 1 Byte N 1 Byte 2 Bytes T1 T2 T3 T4 Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 85 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Byte Order Description Sets the order of data bytes in a transmission or requests which can be reversed This only affects the Data field of a Modbus message and has no effect on the data bytes for Function Codes 01 02 and 05 Valid values are Least Significant Byte First places the Least Significant Byte first this is the default value and Most Significant Byte First places the Most Significant Byte first This read only field shows the error message for the last Modbus message received Note This field applies only in Slave mode Sets whether the system logs to the Event log all parameter changes made via Modbus Valid values are Enabled logs all events or Disabled does not log events Enabled is the default Start Polling Controls whether the system begins a Modbus Master polling sequence The default is off The system clears this field when the polling sequence completes Note You must have previously selected Modbus Master as the port owner on the Comm Port screen ROC gt Comm Ports The ROC begins polling at the value defined in the Starting Request field and proceeds through the entries in the
200. can Time Good I O SPI Messages Bad I O SPI Messages Description This read only field shows the average time in seconds the PIDs FSTs and backplane scans have taken This read only field shows the number of good Synchronous Peripheral Interface SPI messages that occurred at the backplane SPI is the communications protocol used between the modules in the backplane and the CPU This read only field shows the number bad SPI messages that occurred at the backplane 3 This completes the process for configuring I O points on the CPU module 6 10 Flags Use the Flags screen to perform actions that affect the overall operation of the FloBoss From this screen you can save a configuration to Flash memory and if necessary re initialize the FloBoss When you select ROC gt Flags ROCLINK 800 displays the Flags screen Restart Flash Memor Warm Stark Save Configuration Cold Start Cold Start amp Clear Alarms E vents Zens O Cold Start amp Clear Displays Cold Start amp Clear FST Cold Start amp Clear History Cold Start amp Clear ALL 6 10 1 Flags General Tab Update vw OK 7 Cancel Figure 6 14 Flags Use the General tab on the Flags screen to restart the FB107 or save your configuration to flash memory 6 14 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Notes Bevery careful when using the system flags Certain flags lose data change paramet
201. cense on key to transfer to key 2 Enter Quantity to Transfer There are 3 of the selected license on License Key 2 Enter the number to transter to License Kep 1 Cancel D Figure 9 12 Number of Licenses 5 Indicate the number of licenses Quantity you want to transfer and click OK ROCLINK 800 transfers the license and refreshes the screen Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 9 14 Transfer Licenses Between KEYS License Key 1 Serial Number TESTI F Time Created Application Name Vendor ID Vendor Name App Code Version Expiration 1 01 16 2007 11 16 59 Props Example 27 Vendor Name 1 DU No Expiration 2 01 22 2007 11 40 35 IAPWS 1997 12345 Sample Vendor 3 D No Expiration Connect to License Key Move Ge e KEY 2 to License Key2 Serial Number EES Mo e a e oee oeda d md 1 T 40 25 E Pro Ips Ex ample Sample vendor No Ex piratio Uu 2 01 22 2007 11 40 30 Flow Example es Sample Vendor No Expiration 3 01 22 2007 11 40 35 lIAPWS 1997 12345 Sample Yendor D No Expiration 4 01 22 2007 11 40 42 Cond Orifice 12345 Sample Vendor 0 No Expiration Figure 9 13 License Transferred 6 Review the Quantity fields and note that License Key now has one 9 2 5 Removing IAPWS 1997 license and that License Key 2 now has two IAPWS 1997 licenses a License For internal security ROCLINK 800 protects software licenses You cannot actually delete a license you have installed
202. changes are automatically skipped When you Tab to the last field or button in the screen or dialog box pressing Tab again jumps back to the first field or button To go back to a previous field or button press Shift Tab In an option field the currently selected option is highlighted To select one of the other options use 4 or T to highlight the desired option and then press Enter In a field that requires a text or numerical entry type in the required characters or numbers from the keyboard Use Backspace or Delete to erase unwanted characters Use lt and to move the cursor one character at a time and Home and End to place the cursor at the beginning and end of the field respectively Other keys or key combinations include F1 Launches ROCLINK 800 on line help Introduction Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Esc Cancels the current activity closes the screen and returns you to the last used place in the menu structure screen or other place from which the dialog box originated If a menu is active Ese closes the last opened menu taking you up one level in the menu structure If the menu bar is active Ese de selects all menu options Press Alt or click with the mouse to reactivate the menu bar Ctrl N Creates a new configuration file Ctrl O Opens a configuration file Ctrl S Saves the current configuration file 1 6 7 Help System The Help menu provides detailed on
203. cified gravitational force A correction factor must then be applied to correct the calibrations to the local gravitational force Note When a dead weight calibrator is used for the differential pressure and the static pressure both must be corrected for local gravity This involves using Fpwl twice 8 16 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Dead Weight Sets whether any corrections occur for local gravity s Calibration Diff effects on dead weight calibrations to differential Pressure pressure Note This field displays only for an orifice meter For each selection the system multiplies the factor Fpwl by the base volume flow equation once for each selection The system uses the factor Fpwl to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a dead weight calibrator which are usually sized for use at a standard gravitational force or at some specified gravitational force A correction factor must then be applied to correct the calibrations to the local gravitational force When a dead weight calibrator is used for the differential pressure and the static pressure both must be corrected for local gravity This involves using Fpwil twice Calibrated Grav Sets a gravitational acceleration value if the tester Accel value differs from the indicated value The system assumes the units to be Ft Sec or m Sec User Correction Sets a factor the system multiplies by the base Fa
204. click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 9 1 1 FST Registers General Tab The FST Registers screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to enable and configure the FST registers Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 57 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 FST Registers General Advanced Tag FST 1 Status Version Re f Enabled Description e Disabled Registers Register HI Register 2 Register 3 Register 4 Register 5 Copy Figure 7 42 FST Registers General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field FST Registers 1 through 10 Register HE 0 0 Register 7 Register 6 Register 9 Register 10 0 0 Update vw OK 7 Cancel Description Selects the FST to configure Click w to display all available FSTs This read only field shows the version if assigned of the FST on download This read only field shows the description if assigned for the FST on download Sets the current state and enables you to start or stop the FST Valid values are Enabled FST is active or Disabled FST is not active Note If you change the value in this field you must also click Apply Provides up to 10 storage points for FST floating point values Use FST registers to store calculated or manually entered values You can
205. col parameters include baud rate parity data bits stop bit and the type of duplex Glossary A 7 PSTN PT PTT Pulse Pulse Interface module PV Quantity Rack RAM RBX RR Recipe RFI RI ROC ROCLINK 800 ROM Rotary Meter RTC RTD RTS RTU RTV RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 RX or RXD A 8 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Public Switched Telephone Network Process Temperature Push to Talk signal Transient variation of a signal whose value is normally constant A module that provides line pressure auxiliary pressure and pulse counts to a ROC Process Variable or Process Value The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operational temperature and pressure indicated in one of the following corrected units cubic meters liters barrels gallons A row of slots on a ROC into which I O modules can be plugged Racks are given a letter to physically identify the location of an I O channel such as A for the first rack Built in I O channels are assigned a rack identifier of A while diagnostic I O channels are considered to be in E rack Random Access Memory RAM is used to store history data most user programs and additional configuration data Report by exception RBX always refers to Spontaneous RBX in which the ROC contacts the host to report an alarm condition Results Register stores the Signal Value Analog SVA A pre entered delivery blending cont
206. creen to set up the communications ports that are available for incoming and outgoing communications with the FloBoss Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 The communication ports located on the FB107 provide a data link to ROCLINK 800 other devices and host systems The type of module enables the following communications EIA 232 RS 232 serial communications EIA 485 RS 485 multi point serial communications Table 3 1 Communication Ports for the FloBoss 107 Comm Port Port Location Type Protocols Lol CPU Local Port RS 232C ROC or Modbus slave COMI CPU EIA 485 RS 485 ROC or Modbus host slave COM2 CPU EIA 232 RS 232 Default ROC or Modbus host slave _ COM3 Module Slot1 EIA 232 RS 232 or EIA 485 RS 485 ROC or Modbus host slave _ COM Module Slot 3 EIA 232 RS 232 or EIA 485 RS 485 ROC or Modbus host slave Note When installed in Slot 2 the module eee eee replaces COM2 on the CPU DISPLAY DISPLAY _ EIA 232 RS 232 Limited Function ROC or Modbus slave 3 3 1 Communication Modules You can navigate FB107 options using the ROCLINK menu structure or by clicking on components of the FB107 graphic such as modules tabs or buttons The graphical interface display shows the current settings of the point including alarms and integrity To display the communication port for the FloBoss 107 click the communications module on the graphical interface The
207. ctor volume flow equation to make a desired adjustment to the flow Note If you use the default value of 1 the system does not apply any correction 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 8 1 7 Meter Setup Alarms Tab 8 1 7 Meter Setup Alarms Tab Issued Jan 08 Use the Alarms tab to configure alarm parameters You can either enable or disable alarming for each meter run You can configure alarms for the individual meter runs and identify meter specific alarm conditions If you enable alarms the system logs alarms on the alarm log To conserve log space enable alarms only when required If you disable alarms the system does not generate an alarm for this point regardless of the alarm configuration However the system displays alarm conditions in the Active Alarms field on the Meter Setup screen s General tab Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each alarm to prevent the generation of false alarms 1 Select the Alarms tab The Alarms screen displays Meter Menu 8 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 18 Meter Setup Meter Number 1 Meter 1 v Meter Tag Meter 1 Flow Alarms Time Basis for Alarming e Alarm on Daily Flow Rate C Alarm on Hourly Flow Rate Low Alarm Limit 0 0 MCF Day High Alarm Limit 10000 0 MCF Day Alarm Deadband foo MCF Day RBX Alarming Disabled C OnAlarm Set C On Alarm Clear C On Alarm
208. current status ON OFF of a group of logic coils outputs 02 Readdiscrete input status Obtain current status ON OFF of a group of discrete inputs CW EE EE SE CRT E _ Force logic coil to a state of ON or OFF Acknowledge Alarm o or Event request 05 Force Single Logic Coil Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 91 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Code Meaning Action 15 Force Multiple Logic Coils Force a series of consecutive logic output coils to defined ON or OFF states 16 Preset Multiple Holding Registers Place specific binary values into a series of consecutive holding _ registers Field Description Tag Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for this Start Register Sets the first data register in the address span Any number from 0 to 65535 is valid You can duplicate register numbers as long as you assign them to separate communication ports Number The tables should be numbered from smallest to largest In certain Modbus Host devices the register 40101 is actually transmitted as 100 The value 100 should be placed in the Start Address field because the FloBoss uses the actual number sent by the Host For example the Host device requests the Starting Register 500 through Ending Register 700 The Starting Register is 400 and the Ending Register is 700 All register numbers requested by the Host 500 through 700 are valid and would be responded to because the requested register numbers match or fall in between
209. currently selected hardware displays at the bottom of the screen Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General Installed Module R S 485 Actual Module RS 485 Description RS485 Comm Module Revision Part Number w48082 Build Date Serial Number Boot Revision Boot Build Date Integrity Uninstall Comm Port Configuration pa SLOT 1 RS 485 Auto Scan Update g Figure 3 3 Communications Port Field Description Installed Module This read only field shows the module currently defined in the active FB107 configuration ROCLINK 800 does not require that a module be physically installed to display Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module Description This read only field shows a description of the ee ey ieee Part Number This read only field shows the part number of the ee eee E O Serial Number This read only field shows the serial number of the hardware currently installed in the FB107 Note Not associated with communications modules Actual Module This read only field shows the module physically installed in the backplane ROCLINK 800 updates this field whenever you restart the FB107 Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module Revision This read only field shows the firmware revision for the hardware currently installed in the FB107 Note Not associated with communications modules 3 8 Communications and Securi
210. d mear 8 6 klug bropertes saadaa 8 12 Force Recalculation nnnannannnennennnannnnnnnnnnnnn 8 11 SA WEE 8 12 BEER 7 50 8 21 8 36 Lreezevalue 8 21 We n 7 36 Issued Jan 08 From Device Viewing Logs and Reports sensneneeeeeneneen 5 9 From File Bel 5 41 Viewing Logs and Reports cceeeeee 5 11 FST Aar S aan a ge 7 102 elle Ee ET B 5 0 6 WEE B 8 CIOS EE B 10 Command Library ccccseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeens B 14 Comment FieldS aannnaannnannnannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnne B 6 Comparison Commande B 18 Control Related Commande B 16 Creating News deg EN B 7 Database Commande B 22 Defining a History Homt B 24 Deleting EE B 10 Download to FloBOSS annannannnannnannennnennnnnnn B 8 Sne 9 29 B 1 Execution Delai 7 59 FST Command Field CMD B 5 FST Edito sienose cries 9 29 B 1 Function Exvamples B 6 Function SIUCIUIC orn n e B 4 Historical COMMAMNAS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 24 Lapel aa 6 eee ne eres er eer ae E B 4 Logical Commande B 17 Mathematical Commande B 16 Miscellaneous Commande nnannen0annenanns B 20 Monitor Mode B 11 Reading From Device B 10 Reading From File B 10 REJISIE S cic e aeaednieduncaivarsiucusbes 7 56 PROCS Eeer B 6 SAVING EE B 9 SL al Le WEE B 9 MOPPING Eman ee Ed B 9 Riet 7 59 Time Related Commande oannnnannn0aanaannn B 19 MACS INI OCS EE B 13 Troublesbootmg Axe B 11 Po GION EE 9 29 B 1 Fr u
211. d adjust the value of each one alarm to prevent the generation of false alarms 1 Select the Alarms tab The Alarms screen displays Analog Input Analog Inputs ATO e Tag RTE Low Alarm 40 0 High Alarm 752 0 MRES Alarming fe Disabled O On Alarm Set LoLo Alarm 40 0 S C Onlarm Clear C On Alarm Set and Clear HIHI Alarm Rate Alarm Alarm Deadband 20 Update Y OK ACancel Figure 7 13 AI Alarms tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Low Alarm Sets in engineering units a limit value to which the BS input value must fall to generate a Low alarm High Alarm Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must rise to generate a High alarm 7 14 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 Field LoLo Alarm HiHi Alarm Rate Alarm Alarm Deadband RBX Alarming ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must fall to generate a LoLo alarm Note Typically you set the value for the LoLo Alarm lower than the value for the Low alarm Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must rise to generate a HiHi Alarm Note Typically you set the value for the HiHi Alarm higher than the value for the High alarm Sets in engineering units a value that represents the maximum amount of change allowed in the calculated rate between updates bef
212. d for ease of use Drop down menus simplify accessing the functions provided by the software Dialog boxes and drop down list boxes help to direct selections and data entry You can perform actions with the keyboard or a pointing device such as a mouse Refer to Section 1 6 User Interface Basics for a description of the user interface You access help screens either from the Help menu or in a context sensitive fashion using the F1 key This feature makes it easy to access on line information for any ROCLINK 800 topic You can build custom displays for the FB107 that combine both graphic and dynamic data elements and then use these displays to monitor the FB107 s operation either locally or remotely The software also provides multiple levels of security to control access to ROCLINK 800 functions as well as the FB107 database Introduction 1 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 1 2 Computer Requirements ROCLINK 800 runs on most IBM compatible personal computers PCs The PC can be a desktop or a portable computer but must meet the following minimum requirements Pentium class processor 233 MHz or greater recommended Ss CD ROM drive Windows NT 4 0 Service Pack 6 2000 Service Pack 2 or XP 64 MB of RAM random access memory SVGA color monitor 800 by 600 pixels small fonts 15 to 50 MB of available hard disk space depending on operating system and revision level EJA 232 RS 232 serial connection o
213. data logger Indicates the type and number of modules you can install in the FB107 Click w to display valid choices On Board No I O CPU does not have an I O assembly installed Available only for slot 0 On Board 6 Pt I O CPU has an I O assembly installed Available only for slot O Issued Jan 08 Field UO Configuration 250 Ohm Resistor Installed Integral Sensor ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description None No module is installed in the slot RS 232 Slot has an RS 232 communications module installed Available only for slot 1 or 2 RS 485 Slot has an RS 485 communications module installed Available only for slot 1 or 2 MVS Slot has an MVS module installed Aux 6 Pt I O Slot has an I O module installed Note FB107 modules are slot specific As you define the type and location of modules ROCLINK 800 displays only those modules available for installation in any slot Sets the configuration of I O points for either a 6 point CPU I O assembly On Board 6 Point IO or I O module Auxiliary 6 Point IO Note This option displays only if you select the I O module Sets for analog inputs whether the module supports 4 20 mA or 0 5 V dc Valid values are Yes 250 ohm resistor is installed and input uses 4 20 mA current or No 250 ohn resistor is not installed and input uses 0 5 V dc current The default is Yes Displays the type of Integral Sensor
214. ding a Device To add a new device to the device root 1 Right click the device root icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Add a Device ROCLINK 800 adds a device icon to the device root 3 Configure the new device s communication parameters see Chapter 3 Communications and Security To add a device to an existing group 1 Right click the group icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Add a Device ROCLINK 800 adds a device icon in the selected group 3 Configure the new device s communication parameters see Chapter 3 Communications and Security 2 2 6 Deleting All Devices To delete all device communication parameter configurations in the device root directory Note This deletes all devices you currently have configured 1 Right click the device root icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Delete All Devices A Confirm Delete dialog box displays Confirm Delete 2 Do you want to delete the Devices under this group Figure 2 8 Delete All Devices 2 6 Device Directory and Device Root Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Click Yes ROCLINK 800 deletes all devices in the device root 2 2 7 Renaming a Group or Device You can easily replace the ROCLINK 800 provided default group or device names with names you choose To rename a group or device in the Device directory 1 Right click the device or group icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Rename Enter a name the labe
215. ds the TDO must be energized for full travel Set the Low and High Reading EU values The units can either be in terms of the valve position 0 to 100 or in terms of flow capacity O to 1000 MCF Day Set the Output type on the PID screen to Discrete Under DO Open Point and DO Close Point select a TLP with Point Type of Discrete Outputs the desired logical number and EU Value parameter Configure the PID point with a Control Type of Override Control This causes available fields to appear on the PID screen to enter the I O definition of the process variable and setpoint for both the Primary and Override loops Select a TLP with Point Type of Orifice Meter Run Values the desired Logical Number and a parameter of Flow Rate Per Day for the Primary process variable For the Override process variable select a TLP with Point Type of MVS the desired Logical Number and a parameter of SP Reading Leave the Setpoint I O Definition undefined because you enter the values The setpoint for the Primary loop is the desired amount of flow per day The setpoint for the Override loop is the pressure value where control should switch to the override loop Set the Loop Period in seconds typically one fourth of the time required for the actuator to move the valve from fully open to fully closed On the Tuning tab select the Override Type Select of Low This selects the lower of the change in outputs from the primary and secondary loops As the pressure a
216. e After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save the configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 12 2 Modbus Configuration General Tab The Modbus Configuration screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to configure basic Modbus communication parameters Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 83 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Modbus Configuration General Scale Values Comm Fort Comm Mode Bute Order e ATU e Least Significant Byte First ASCII Most Significant Byte First Slave Mode Event Logging Exception Status No Eror e Enabled C Disabled Masher Mode Start Polling DW Starting Request 1 Timeout 30 Seconds Humber of Requests D Retries 2 Continuous Polling f Enabled ft Disabled Request Delay oo Seconds Update vw OK J Cancel Figure 7 56 Modbus Configuration General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Note This screen initially displays with Local Port as the default comm port The example screen uses the RS485 choice so that all the possible fields on this screen display Field Description Comm Port Selects a comm port to configure Click w to display all defined comm ports Note This screen s Master Mode frame does not display if you select either Local Port or LCD Port as a comm port option SEAENEEOESEAEEOESEAUE
217. e Edit this default as necessary Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 set Span Paint Static Acton As Found As Lett Deviation 4 Deviation Set ero 15 518 0 000 14 518 1 9397 Dead Weight T ester Value 00 00 Live Reading 1 15 953 Deviation i 394 pa l Get Span A Cancel Figure 8 23 Set Span When you enter a value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field ROCLINK immediately begins comparing it once each second to the value in the Live Reading field obtained from the static pressure sensor and calculating the percentage deviation between the two values 11 Click Set Span when the live reading stabilizes ROCLINK 800 adds the next line in the calibration log renames the screen and changes the label on the Span button to Set Mid 1 Set Mid 1 7 Point Static tatic Action As Found As Lett Deviation 4 Deviation Set ero 15 518 0 000 15 518 1 9397 Dead Weight T ester Value 50 0 Live Reading Bz oal Deviation 0 3538 z Set Mid 1 A Cancel y Done Figure 8 24 Set Span 8 30 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note You can click Done at this point to complete the calibration or continue the calibration and define up to three calibration midpoints 12 Set test equipment to produce the expected results 13 Complete the Dead Weight Tester Value field with the first midpoint calibration val
218. e based on your situation These are general values which you need to assess for each circumstance Time Out Key Off Delay Sets in seconds the actual amount of time that ROCLINK 800 waits to receive a valid message after it sends a request to a device The default is 3 Modem users typically accept the default value Do not set this field to 0 zero This prevents ROCLINK 800 from timing out and quickly exhausts the Retries Note If you select TCP IP as the communications method on the General tab ROCLINK 800 applies only the Time Out parameter No other parameters defined on that tab apply Sets in seconds the amount of time ROCLINK 800 waits after transmitting a message before turning off the ready to send RTS signal The default is 0 You can change this value to optimize communications The default value should be sufficient for dial up modems and EIA 232 RS 232 connections For radios a value of 0 01 may be appropriate Host CRC Check Indicates whether ROCLINK 800 uses cyclical redundancy checking The default value is Enabled 3 3 Communication Ports on the FB107 3 6 In addition to configuring the communications ports on the PC you also configure the device specific communication parameters While in a configuration and on line with an FB107 select ROC gt Comm Ports to display the Comm Port screen Each communications port has a unique set of parameters on the screen Use the Comm Ports s
219. e 03 or 04 this conversion changes any OF Am type to Signed 3 4 6 16 data type unsigned or signed Character Integer or Long in the Long Integer ROC to a specific point value for transmission to the Host When 28 A 34616 _ using Function Code 6 or 16 this conversion changes a ees GH rt p _ transmitted floating point value to the correct data type for the ROC integer IT 29 Any type to 3 4 6 16 Unsigned Long SEENEN SE E PEET E EE EE LEN Ik SE EE 65 IEEE Floating Point 3 4 16 Code 65 places byte 0 and byte 1 in register xxxxx byte 2 and byte Number 3 are placed in register xxxxx 1 This places a 4 byte floating TI ep IEEE Floating Point 3416 point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be Number tat transmitted Code 66 does the same as Code 65 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte 0 byte 1 Register xxxxx 1 byte 2 byte 3 67 IEEE Floating Point 3 4 16 Code 67 reverses byte 0 and byte 1 order in register xxxxx _ Number reverses byte 2 and byte 3 order in register xxxxx 1 This places ep IEEE Floating Point 3 4 16 a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow integer values to be transmitted Code 68 does the same as Code ee 67 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte 1 byte 0 Register xxxxx 1 byte 3 byte 2 71 IEEE Floating Point 3 4 16 Code 71 rev
220. e 5 6 5 3 2 Viewing an Existing Calibration Heport 5 7 5 4 History Alarm and Event Log Report 5 8 5 4 1 Viewing History Logs from a Device ceccccceeeceecaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeneas 5 9 5 4 2 Viewing History Logs from akie 5 11 ER PIONO ESTON EE 5 12 SAA WICWING Alarm LOS EE 5 14 94S MICWING Event LOGS E 5 15 Siet DISDIAY AGING EE ee EEN 5 16 50 Een HR el 5 18 5 6 1 Creating a New Custom Display 5 19 56 2 Adding Custom Display EE 5 23 5 6 3 Managing Custom Display Obiechs 5 36 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Obert 5 39 5 6 5 Editing a Custom Display from aile 5 41 Oat EE Be e EE 5 41 90 TOODA EE 5 43 Chapter 6 The ROC Menu 6 1 Gel Drect elle EE 6 1 OZ DISCOMMECE Ae Eet en Ener a aa ee 6 2 0 0 Collecting LR WEE 6 2 OA Seung eC lOCK EE 6 3 G0 LEE ENEE oat eal lesa wanted aak Eet ee 6 3 06 ROC COMITRON terre een eee eter ee erry ler ieee er PER er ech oer ee ee ree eer oe cere eee 6 4 O f ROG Device MeMo EE 6 4 6 8 Configuring Device Intormmaton E 6 4 IV Contents Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FloBoss 107 6 8 1 Device Information General TaD vesicives cs savecernes wah corpses sicdvenshcventac vious ovecnasdewethassniateeade tee 6 5 6 62 Device Information POMS aD EE 6 6 6 8 3 Device Information Other Information Tab 6 7 6 8 4 Device Information Revision Info Tab 6 8 69 e ER ln tee Ee NEEN 6 8 6 9 1 CPU Information General Ta
221. e ARG2 2 Output lf ARG1 gt No of archived periods Database or ARG1 then ARG2 0 Constant Value Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 For all other cases RR out RR in lt SVD out SVD in 1 Output For FST History Point Database or History Value ARG1 ARG2 Constant Value RR in 2 Output For floating database value ARG2 Database or lf ARG2 gt No of archived periods Constant Value ARG1 then ARG2 0 Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 For all other cases RR out RR in SVD out SVD in WTM Write Time To Historical Database sets the 1 Output For FST History Point value of the database point ARGUMENT 1 and the pointer ARGUMENT2 to the historical database time string with either minutes or seconds resolution The time format for minute s resolution is min hr day mon and for Issued Jan 08 Database or If minute resolution then Constant Value History Value ARG1 ARG2 minute 2 Output format Database or Otherwise History Value Constant Value ARG1 ARG2 second format For floating database value ARG2 FST Editor B 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Name B 24 unique Description Arguments Results seconds resolution is sec min hr day _ If ARG2 gt number of archived Applies to historical database points periods ARG1 then _ defined for the FST only ARG2 0 _ If ARGUMENT2 is a floating database Otherwise ARG2 ARG2 1 _ value for example F
222. e History Value into RR SS 2 i ee DIN Read Number of Daily History Indexes into RR ee WECKER eg E J PIN Read Number of Periodic History Indexes into RR GTE 8 Extract Time Element from Time Stamp into RR Miscellaneous GO Jump to STEP pointed to by ARGUMENT1 LABEL ee MSG MSG String 1 ARG1 MSG Data ARG2 FST Editor ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 B 16 Category __ Command_ Action a se aaa BRK Delay ARGUMENT1 100 mSec intervals EVT Log 10 character message and a current value B 4 1 FST Control Related Commands FST Mathematical Commands Use analog output AO discrete output DO and Timed Duration Output TDO control related commands to control outputs Table B 10 FST Control Related Commands Name _ Description Arguments Results AO Analog output Sets the analog output 1 Output AO Point AO Output ARG1 ARG2 point EUs to the argument value Ifthe Database Value i analog output is in Manual no output is 2 Input Database or RR out RR in _ sent Constant Value SVD out SVD in DO Discrete output Sets the discrete output 1 Output DO Point DO Output ARG1 ARG2 point status to the argument value If the Database Value discrete output is in Manual no output is 2 Input Database or RR out RR in sent Constant Value _SVD out SVD in Note To trigger outputs use the corresponding output command see Table B 9 These commands trigger the mechanism that changes
223. e current date Current Time Sets the register number to acquire the current time The default is 7047 EFM Modbus Sets whether the system uses the RAS EFM Modbus reporting option for date and time Valid values are Enabled use the EFM Modbus option or Disabled use standard Modbus reporting The default is Enabled 7 94 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Function Code 03 05 32 Event Alarm Ignored SC SCH Se S SECH E History mm X Extended _ History ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Table 7 6 Modbus History Event and Alarm Functionality Register Field 32 Event Alarm Ignored Register Register ooo 7 History Data Field Description Response contains Event and Alarm records Maximum number of bytes returned is 240 12 records of 20 bytes each Events are returned before Alarms are returned The format is displayed in Table 7 12 Modbus Events and 2 Alarms Log Contents After Events and Alarms have been returned there must _ be an acknowledgment made so that the same Events and BEE RE Archive Register Index 0 to 34 Hourly or Periodic History Archive Register Index 0 Io 839 Archive Register _ Index 0 to Max Extended History and date stamp of the history archive time stamp HHMMSS and date stamp MMDDYY and floating point 2 values for each of the defined History Points for that Response contains two floating point values for the time
224. e display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values 5 24 View Menu Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 Tab Order ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Yes Object is always visible This is the e default No Object is not visible Ee Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display Label Adds labels to identify objects This object has the following properties A Property Caption Alignment TLP Expression Tab Order 0 Description Sets a label or caption for the object The default is Label 1 the system uniquely names each object until you rename it Indicates where the label text displays Click v which displays when you click in the field to display the valid values Left text is flush left Right text is flush right or Center text is centered Associates the object with a TLP Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to define the associated TEP
225. e dynamic interface refer to SupportNet course RAS 0044 FBIO7 Dynamic Interface Introduction 1 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General 1 0 Setup 1 0 Points POINT TAG CONFIGURATION INTEGRITY ACTIVE ALARMS ATD ATD Al1 A Sat Al 2 Sieg AD 1 Slotd DO 2 Slot DI 3 Slot0 PI 2 Sat Auto Scan 2 Update 1 Apply Figure 1 2 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface Installed Module On Board 6 PointIO Actual Module On Board 6 PointIO Description CPU Field Interface Revision feu 1 00 0 2 Part Number wenn Build Date Jan 10 2007 14 36 Serial Number w48084x0012 A 06510030 Boot Revision Rev 100 0 2 2 Boot Build Date Jan 10 2007 14 32 Uninstall Auto Scan HlUpdate Figure 1 3 Integrity Alarm 1 8 Introduction Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 Alarms Integrity Alarm ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 The FB107 supports two kinds of alarms integrity which indicate hardware problems and alarms which indicate software or field device problems Alarm notifications display on both the graphical representation of the FB107 and on the tabbed screen below the graphical FB107 ROCLINK 800 color codes the notifications to help you quickly identify and resolve the alarms Integrity notifications display as an I in a red box and alarm notifications display as an A in a yellow box see Figure 1 2 Moving the mouse over these alarm icons displays a definition ROCLINK 800 also displays definiti
226. e ea Os tee ects aati oo arena at cata B 26 Se 7 56 Advanced Tab EE 7 58 General Tab 7 57 FPUNCHON COUE EE 7 99 G Gal NEE 7 65 Gas COMPONENT EE 8 12 EE TH UE 8 12 8 14 EE EE 8 11 GIOS S ay gaa tee tices ea ee E A 1 E e E E E E ee ee ATE ee eee A T B 21 Good I O SPI Messages 6 14 Gravitational Acceleraton 8 10 Issued Jan 08 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Gravitational Correction cccceeee 8 16 8 17 CSV OUDS EE 2 4 Aale Ve Le E 2 5 RE G BE 2 5 Renaming WEE 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 3 H Halt PID On E 7 68 rIcaunG HE 8 13 BASIS sicher aia eee as 8 13 RIGID Lee eege 1 15 12 1 ICI ODICS EE 12 1 le a ln EE 7 14 7 40 7 55 8 18 HIgh DP ee EE 8 9 High Reading EU nen 7 9 7 17 7 32 iz EE 7 88 PIRLA EE 7 15 7 40 History Alarm and Event Log Reports 0000 5 8 Archive Type resine 1 17 Daily Minute and Hourly sssaennnennnnennennenennn 5 8 ee 1 19 FST eebe 7 71 Eelere B 24 Beie EE 5 8 MODUS ae eee tetera and caseetedeeee 7 93 Plot IRC DOM EE 5 12 Point Configuration cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 71 Salle EE 6 7 RODO Ee 5 8 SEUD ae ene ee eee e ae ee nner 7 72 n gt Ki nie EEN 4 4 SLUG E E 7 74 VIEWING cotes a 5 14 History Setup Configuration exvample 7 79 History Time Stamp ccccecceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 74 Host Address ROCLINK 800 Communtcatons 3 3 Host AddressRBX A 3 14 HOSUCRE in e 3 6 Host Group ROCLINK 800 Co
227. e flow weighted sample by the sum of the flow values This result includes minute and hourly values that are more reflective of short periods of high flow This method combines the flow weighting action with the formulaic averaging technique both of which were described previously active For example Low indicates that the calculated flow is below the Low Alarm limit Other alarms can include High No Flow and Manual Mode 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 8 1 2 Meter Setup Inputs Tab Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 1 2 Meter Setup Inputs Tab Use the Inputs tab to define the field inputs for differential pressure uncorrected volume static pressure and temperature which the system uses 1n the flow calculation 1 Select the Inputs tab The Inputs screen displays Meter setup F Meter Setup Meter Nuriber fi Mots 8 Metar Tag Metar i Metar Number Meter 1 k Meter Tag Meter 1 ener Inputs Achranced Fluid Properties Sarnpher Cebbueoton Factors Alarms General Inputs Advanced Fluid Properties Sampler Calibration Factors Alarms Type of Prmery Element Variable K Pactors e f Wi IR Dea eth Flange Tea Ee e Enabled Uncorrected Volume Mana allt MCF Doy Li Dahan Yale J erenpei Pressure Manual DU H z A nice eth Comar Tapa input Manual ON rn k e 8 Step Fressur e M
228. e number of rows or steps available in the workspace The LABEL CMD ARGUMENTI and ARGUMENT columns correspond to the structure of the functions The Comment column allows you to insert comments about the FST Note Comments are not downloaded sent to the FB107 they are only included in the FST when you save it to a file FST Editor B 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Table B 2 Workspace and Output Keystrokes Key Action lt Move cursor to the right cell or character Oe mi Move cursor to the left cell or character NN E E E de Move cursor to the cell below it Ctrl Home Move cursor to top left cell of Workspace Ctrl End Move cursor to bottom right cell of Workspace a D elete Delete character in front of the cursor position o End Within a cell move cursor to the right most position within the cell _ Within a row move cursor to the right most position in the row Enter Process saves contents of cell entry and moves to the next cell Ege Oo Undo entry and display original or prior contents of the cell P Help H ome Within a cell move cursor to the left most position within the cell Tab Move to the next cell FST Function Each function consists of a STEP number a LABEL optional a Structure command CMD and up to two arguments ARGUMENT and ARGUMENT2 See Table B 3 Table B 3 FST Function Structure STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 ou YY The FST program automatical
229. eckBox 1 the system uniquely names each object until you rename it Associates the object with a TLP Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to define the associated TLP Identifies individual bits of an 8 bit integer ROCLINK uses when calculating the value to be compared to the value specified in the Selected When or Checked When fields ROCLINK performs a mathematical AND comparing this masked value and the value in the Selected When or Checked When field and activates the button or box if the values are equal The default value is 255 Specifies the value at which the checkbox activates Works in conjunction with the value in the Mask Value field Sets whether the user can edit the object Click e which displays when you click in the field to display the valid values Yes Allows editing This is the default No Does not allow editing Expression Allows editing based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the data entry is allowed Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Yes Object is always visible This is the D S default me BA View Menu 5 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object i
230. ed New Value x 100 Entered Filtered Value Sets the calibrated Analog to Digital count corresponding to zero percent input In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the zero percent input exactly at the Low Reading EU value Sets the calibrated Analog to Digital count corresponding to 100 percent input Use this value to convert the input to engineering units In the Calibrate function this value is altered to set the 100 percent input exactly at the High Reading EU value This read only field shows the current digital count directly from the Analog to Digital converter This read only field shows the actual amount of time in seconds taken to complete the entire list of tasks This value should be the same as the value in the Scan Period field on the General tab if the system is not overloaded Sets whether the system averages raw values during the scan period Valid values are Enabled average and calculate the raw readings during the scan period and use the results as the Raw A D Input during calculations or Disabled acquire instantaneous values Issued Jan 08 Field Clipping Action on Failure ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Forces the filtered EUs within a defined limit set on the Alarms tab Valid values are Enabled forces the filtered EUs to stay within a range defined by the cut off limits set by using the LoLo Alarm and HiHi Alarm parameters defined on the Alar
231. ed meter run configured in the FloBoss 5 2 1 Creating the EFM File Before you can view the EFM report data you must first create the report file To create this file 1 Select ROC gt Collect Data while the FloBoss is connected and communicating A Collect Device Data dialog box displays Collect Device Data KE Collect i EFM Report Data Save As C Program Files ROCLINKS00 41G A efm Convert Convert EFM File Reading Perodic History Figure 5 2 Collect Device Data initial 2 Click OK ROCLINK 800 collects information about the device to the designated efm file When the collection completes the system displays a message at the bottom of the screen 5 2 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Collect Device Data Kl Collect i EFM Report Data Save Js C Program Files SAUCLINE S00 41 G2 efm Convert Convert EFM File Figure 5 3 Collect Device Data complete Note Select Convert EFM File to convert the data to AGA DET data format 3 Click Close This creates the efm file Once you create this file you can generate a report at any time such as in the office and a connection with the device is no longer necessary The EFM Reports utility retrieves the data associated with the requested meter run and time period from the efm file and formats this report for each meter run covering a specified period of time Note For the EFM Reports utility to f
232. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 4 2 4 3 Rue 2 4 Bel GE 5 19 Number of DayS cccssseeceeeseeeeesseeseeeeeeeees 7 74 Number of Entrtes 7 74 Number of bomts 1 13 Number of Regester 7 99 Number of Requests ccccsccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 86 Number of ER 3 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 O Objects Managing ssis 5 36 OMC ENEE eene 7 25 A EE 8 32 ln fe EE 7 25 On Board IO Update Firmware 9 5 OP COGS RT EE 7 82 Opcode Table nannnennnnannnannnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnenenne 7 81 Opening a Configuration Fe 4 6 Operator ID EN 1 5 3 23 ELE basi a A d 10 1 Orifice Diameter EE 8 8 8 36 Orifice Materal 8 11 Other Information cccccceecceseececeeeeseeeeeseeees 6 7 Qut f RINGE enoni aa 1 9 Output EIERE ee 7 65 PIOA Bn UE 7 67 LOW EMMI ENEE 1 67 gh ea 7 65 FON GE 8 15 Riet dinner tee cae dec estes nth ces aetna 7 64 ERT 7 3 Override Default TAPI Init Ging 3 4 Process Variable ccccsccsseeceseesseeeseees 7 67 SOPOR eg 7 64 Type Select EE 7 65 P Parameter Indexing cccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 89 7 93 Parameter Text 7 106 7 107 Parameters EEGEN Ee 2 2 Ee 1 16 Sri EE 3 10 Part Number 3 8 6 9 7 3 7 43 Pass Through Mode a ssesennnenenenennnenenneenenenne 6 19 Password EE 1 5 3 23 PC Baud Ee 3 4 PC ComM POM GE 2 1 3 3 PC Requirements cccccccccseeeeceeeeceeeeeseneeseees 1 2 SE 4 7 B 10 PCNOGIC Histo EE 5 8 PI General TaD yts eoneaatent des 7 3
233. eeze These read only fields display the Static Pressure calibration values the selected MVS sensor uses Note Manual Value is the value of the input at the time of the last meter Freeze These read only fields display the Temperature calibration values the selected MVS sensor currently uses Note Manual Value is the value of the input at the time of the last meter Freeze Set To Factory Click to return MVS calibration values to their original Defaults values and reset the MVS Note You must answer Yes to a verification dialog before the reset occurs When the reset completes a verification dialog box displays This resets the MVS address to the default value of 1 and the Sensor Tag to MV Sensor 3 Click OK to display the FB107 graphic screen 9 28 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 9 8 FST Editor ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 ROCLINK 800 s Function Sequence Table FST provides an instruction list programming language you can use to define and perform a set of specific actions when a set of conditions exists Note Refer to Appendix B The FST Editor for FST commands and more detailed information 9 9 Communications Monitor Issued Jan 08 Select Utilities gt Communications Monitor to display the data bytes in hexadecimal format sent and received from the ROCLINK 800 software during that operation Note Refer to the ROC Protocol Manual Form A4199 for further information on protocol
234. em Status Information for User Defined Points ki 16 Modem Type 1 2 3 4 7 AGA Flow Parameters 5 Status 6 H Show All Point Types and Parameters COM 1 TAG acio ie Y ok Xcencel_ Figure 1 5 Select TLP To use the Select TLP dialog box 1 Select the Point Type from the list This opens a list of logical numbers and parameters that belong to that Point Type 2 Select the Logical Number In the configuration screens the Logical Number is generally referred to as Point Number or Number 3 Select the specific Parameter These are usually called by the same term as the Tag on the configuration screen Click OK The field at the bottom of the Select TLP dialog displays the numeric point location of the TLP point or a text abbreviation depending on the setting in the Tools gt Options window AutoScan Update Select Tools gt Options to set the time interval in seconds at which the Interval Option AutoScan feature on various screens in ROCLINK 800 polls the FB107 Clicking AutoScan causes ROCLINK 800 to poll the device automatically until you click StopScan 1 16 Introduction Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 2 Device Directory and Device Root This chapter describes the Device Directory screen and the Device Root the graphical representation of all devices which appears on that screen In This Chapter ZA DEVICE Directory EE 2 1 2 1 1 Communication Parameter Setup Gcre
235. emoved 200 Clock Set Alarms Use the Alarms table to determine the alarming source The Register number for all unmapped Alarms is set to the Event Alarm Register number default is 32 Following is a normal alarm record format Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 101 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Bit Map Date as float Value as float COIE FENCO EAEI EE EERECRECREHECRECECRECR Unmapped Parameter Alarms If the alarming point is not mapped to a Modbus Register identify the point using the following table The TLP is the source TLP of the alarm The type is set to 1 _Bit Map Date as float Value as float Lae O EE A FST Alarms If the Alarm is an FST Alarm ROCLINK 800 uses the following format The FST Number is the source FST Number that generated the alarm Unused is set to zero and the type is set to 2 _Bit Map Date as float Value as float e one Leas ae oe A User Text Alarms If the Alarm is a User Text Alarm the following format will be used Text is filled in with seven bytes of User Text and the Type will be set to 3 Date as float GE EECHER User Value Alarms If the alarm is a User Value Alarm it uses the following format Unused is set to zero and the Type is set to 4 Bit Map Date as float 1 Vue as float SEET EE EE esl elie lw lel Reading Events and The Modbus request to read the Event Log and Alarm Log uses the Alarms Register standard read Function Codes 03 or 04 and
236. en 2 2 22 NOVI CS e E 2 4 2 2 1 Backing Up CGonfgouratons 2 4 2 2 2 PAGING A E te E BEE 2 5 22 3 Deleting a Kat egeint eegdnaeggebee Seet ege alana 2 5 2 2 4 Deleting a Device ek 2 5 2 2 5 Adding a Device ANEREN 2 6 2 2 6 Deleting All Devices ke 2 6 2 2 7 Renaming a Group or Device 2 7 2 1 Device Directory The Device Directory is the first screen that displays after you successfully log onto ROCLINK 800 but before you connect to a device mm ROCLINK 800 Device Directory Hi i WH Hae WW GO WR Ey 3 KW GE Direct Connect E Device Root a COM Device a COM Device ZS Modem Device e Ethemet Device New Group ha New Devicel ty New Devicez Figure 2 1 Device Directory and Device Root Note Once you connect to a device ROCLINK 800 replaces the Device Directory screen with a device specific configuration tree screen see Figure 2 2 Issued Jan 08 Device Directory and Device Root 2 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 2 ven ROCLINK 800 On Line Com1 FB107 File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Dae els Rel SIREAN R uNa Me SFR OnE ug ER H On Line Com FB107 THUET E DI os amp User Program User Display Modules 1 0 Control Meter System History General Advanced 120 Points Meter Points Diagnostic Installed Module CPU Actual Module EPU Description Application Firmware Revision Rev 1 00 Part Numb
237. enu ln H Pal Grice with D and D I Tape Static Pressure Mar cuu p PS K Feot EU Value oi q R Deg F anturi Tube Tomporature Marus a Haat 1 Jo Pipe Uemeier Orifice Diener 40 Me 3 d 5 6 Low Flow Canta 10 20 D sen Stacked DP Ze Disablad Low D I kpsg Manual Enabled Lew DP Seti T 10 High OF Sofom a0 inhi W 10 Deadband EU 0 0 Aupdate Y oK Acancel Apply Figure 8 4 Meter Setup Inputs tab Orifice Figure 8 5 Meter Setup Inputs tab Turbine Meter Meter Note Which screen displays depends on the calculation standard you selected on the General tab Select AGA3 92 or ISOQ5167 2003 orifice calculations to display Figure 8 4 Select AGA7 92 turbine calculations to display Figure 8 5 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Differential Pressure Sets the input that senses the differential pressure or high differential pressure if you enabled Stacked DP Click to display a Select TLP dialog box you use to assign the input The system assumes the units for the input to be inches of water column In H20 or kPa lf Manual appears use the Values field to enter an engineering units value for the meter input Otherwise the Values field indicates the current input value Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Uncorrected Volume Sets the input that senses the input typically pulses from a turbine meter Click
238. er Weg Build Date Dec 20 2006 7 22 Serial Number Boot Revision Rev 000a Boot Build Date Aug 31 2006 13 25 Integrity FEH Auto Scan Update GESEIS 55AM Figure 2 2 Configuration Tree You use the Device Directory screen Figure 2 to create and maintain communications setup configurations for a PC running ROCLINK 800 You can uniquely configure the communication ports on the PC to send data to a specified FB107 You may add delete or modify these communications setups and establish a tree of groups and devices Use the and symbols to display or hide various options Note You can only configure a PC s communications ports from the Device Directory screen To redisplay the Device Directory screen at any time select Window gt Device Directory or View gt Directory Communication Parameter Setup Screen The ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameter Setup screen allows you to change your PC communications port time out settings and other variables ROCLINK 800 uses when establishing a connection to a device In order for ROCLINK 800 to communicate with a device ROCLINK 800 must know to which device it is communicating Each device within a group is given a unique device address Device Directory and Device Root Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 To set the PC communication parameters 1 Right click the label in the Device Directory that corresponds to the PC port you want to
239. er 21 Section 1 for the orifice flow equation The default IMP is 15 minutes it can be no more than 60 minutes in length and cannot be less than 1 minute The system calculates the Integral Value IV portion of the flow equation once per second Note This option displays only if you select either AGA3 92 or 1S05167 2003 as the calculation standard seueucececeucececeucececsucececeucececsneceseeeneeceesecececeececeacececeeseseeeeseeeeeeseseeeeseseeeeseseseeseceeeeseseeseseseeeeseceseeseseseeseseeseseseeseseseeseseseeseseseesesesesseceseecesescesesesessecsececsseecessssececsssececsssecssessessssesesss Sets in minutes how frequently the system calculates the turbine calculations of the combined correctional factors Known as the Base Multiplier Value BMV per the API measurement standard Chapter 21 Section 1 for the turbine flow equation The default BMP is 15 minutes it can be no more than 60 minutes in length and cannot be less than 1 minute Note This option displays only if you select AGA7 97 as the calculation standard The BMV is multiplied by the actual uncorrected volume to arrive at the quantity accumulated for the period To determine if flow was occurring over the BMP the system views the number of counts over the period If there is an absence of counts or you have set the BMP shorter than the normal time it takes to get a pulse the following occurs Meter run is defined in a No Flow condition
240. er Manual FB107 6 2 Disconnect Use this option to disconnect from the FB107 You can also disconnect by clicking the Disconnect icon E on the ROCLINK 800 menu bar 6 3 Collecting ROC Data Use this option to save FloBoss electronic flow management EFM data to disk files Data includes Configuration data Hourly volume data Daily volume data Alarm Log data Event Log data Once you select ROC gt Collect Data the Collect Device Data screen displays Collect Device Data Collect i EFM Report Data Save ds O Program Files AOCLIN E0041 6104 efm TTT Convert Convert EFM File w OK A Cancel Figure 6 2 Collect Device Data Field Description Collect This read only check box allows the Collect Data function to save all values for EFM parameters in a Save As Sets a file name other than the default shown to ee Ee ee Convert EFM File Launches the EFM file conversion utility After the system collects EFM data you can convert the data to an AGA CFX or DET file for subsequent import into the PGAS or Flow Cal metering report applications Note You can also select this utility by selecting Utilities gt Convert EFM File 6 2 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 6 4 Setting the Clock 6 5 ROC Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Immediately after connecting to a FloBoss for the first time you should set the clock to ensure that the FB107 properly logs histo
241. er Manual FB107 Save As dialog box displays Save As 6 Click the Save to FST button on the FST Editor menu bar A Displays FB 107 Licenses R Example fst ler fst HOUSTON 1 fst m SHANJING RL800 fst Mjollnir Dave as type FST File fst Cancel Figure B 7 Save As 7 Use this screen to name and save your FST When you click Save the FST Editor displays Finally you have to download the FST to the FB107 to make it active 8 Click the Download button on the FST Editor menu bar An FST Details dialog box displays FST Details Version Description vw OK Cancel Figure BAS FST Details 9 Complete at very least the Description field providing a brief up to 40 characters description of the FST Note If you anticipate developing several versions of an FST complete the Version field so you can easily tell one version from another Issued Jan 08 FST Editor B 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 10 Click OK When the download completes ROCLINK 800 prompts you to start the FST ROCLINK 800 FST download completed Do you want to start the FST Figure B 9 FST Download completed At this point the FST is stored in one of the four FST slots in the FB107 Click Yes to start the FST or No to return to the FST Editor B 30 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 Index Numbers ere 7 32 WOO Wo EIERE 1 32 250 Ohm Resistor Installed 0 4
242. er Setup Fluid Properties tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Gas Component Sets the mole percent for each gas component The default values are 96 Methane 3 Ethane and 1 Nitrogen Under the system default AGA8 detailed method of properties calculations the value in the Total Mole field must equal 100 after you define or accept the default mole percentages FPV Method Sets the method of determining a compressibility factor for AGA calculations Value values are Detailed Requires the natural gas composition in mole percent to be entered for all components 8 12 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description FPV Method Gross1 Uses the specific gravity of the natural continued gas the real gas gross heating value per unit volume and the mole of CO as the quantity of non hydrocarbon components Gross2 Uses the specific gravity of the natural gas the real gas gross heating value per unit volume and the mole of CO and the mole of No as the quantity of non hydrocarbon components Note If you choose either Gross1 or Gross2 you must manually enter values for Specific Gravity and Heating Value on this screen Gross2 requires a value for Heating Value only for calculating the gas energy flow While the Detailed method provides the highest accuracy in a broad range of measurement conditions you can use eit
243. er host system that may access the network 2 2 2 Adding a Group You can organize devices into groups Typically groups contain devices in the same geographical area or with another common feature When you double click a group icon ROCLINK 800 displays all devices or subgroups associated with that group To add a new group to the device root directory 1 Right click the Device Root icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Add a Group ROCLINK 800 adds the new group icon to the device root graphic To add a subgroup to an existing group 1 Right click the group icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Add a Group ROCLINK 800 adds the new group icon to the selected group 2 2 3 Deleting a Group To delete a group 1 Right click a group icon A pop up menu displays 2 Select Delete Group A Confirm Delete dialog box displays Confirm Delete 2 Do you want to delete the group and the Devices Groups under the group Figure 2 6 Delete Group 3 Click Yes to delete the group and all subordinate groups and devices in that group 2 2 4 Deleting a Device To delete a device 1 Right click a device icon A pop up menu displays Issued Jan 08 Device Directory and Device Root 2 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Select Delete Device A Confirm Delete dialog box displays Confirm Delete K Do you want to delete the selected device Figure 2 7 Delete Device 3 Click Yes to delete the device 2 2 5 Ad
244. er to http www ieee org Integral Multiplier Value used in AGAS orifice calculations The change in the flow meter reading that occurs during a product flow measurement operation Not displayed by the DL8000 calculation indicated quantity end reading minus start reading Digital input a bit to be read Glossary Issued Jan 08 Input Register UO UO Module IP 252 IRQ ISO KB KHz K factor LCD LDP LED Load Loading Island Loading Riser Load Spot Local Port Logical Number LNK Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Input numeric value to be read Input Output Module that plugs into an I O slot on a ROC to provide an I O channel Institute of Petroleum standard 252 A British standard for pulse fidelity and security for pulse output type flow meters Program codes 233 and 234 define the operation of this function Note Equivalent standard is API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards Chapter 5 Metering Interrupt Request Hardware address oriented International Standards Organization See http www iso ch Integral Value Kilobytes KiloHertz The pulses per unit quantity generated by a pulse output type flow meter also system factor The nominal value is determined by flow meter design and factory water flow calibration The average K factors for the flow meters are usually indicated on the flow meter nameplates Liquid Crystal Display Local Display
245. er values and clear configuration memory Be sure you understand the function of the Flags before changing them If you select Cold Start amp Clear Displays the FB107 performs the cold start but does not clear any displays 1 Select ROC gt Flags The Flags screen opens displaying the General tab Restart Flash Memory Warm Start Save Configuration Cold Start Cold Start amp Clear Alarms E vents SEN Cold Start amp Clear Displays Cold Start amp Clear FST Cold Start amp Clear History Cold Start amp Clear ALL 2 Update vw OK 7 Cancel Figure 6 15 Flags General tab 2 Click one of following buttons Button Action Warm Start Following a warm start ROCLINK 800 initializes SRAM memory If the configuration is valid databases and FSTs remain intact If the configuration is not valid ROCLINK 800 uses the last configuration saved to flash memory To save a valid configuration click Save Configuration A user program remains on after a warm Start Note Refer to Appendix B The FST Editor for details concerning an FST s state on a restart Issued Jan 08 ROC Menu 6 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Button Action Cold Start Initializes the FB107 from the last valid restart configuration saved in flash memory If the configuration memory does not have a valid configuration written to it the process uses the factory defaults Use a cold start if a FloBoss is performing
246. eral tab Units Sets the units for the analog or discrete output 8 points Output Low Limit Sets the low limit for the analog or discrete output If a change in output causes the current value to drop below this value the system sets the output to this value Output High Limit Sets the high limit for the analog or discrete output If a change in output causes the current value to rise below this value the system sets the output to this value 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 9 2 5 PID Loop Advanced Tab 7 9 2 5 PID Loop Advanced Tab Use this tab to define advanced loop control features 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 67 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 PID Loop PID 1 Gas Flow v Tag Gas Flow Halt PID On Reset Loop Period i D Secs Enabled Actual Period 1 0 Secs Disabled Primary Override Integral Deadband 0 0 CF Hour 0 0 PSI SP Ramp Rate 0 0 CF Hour Min 0 0 PS Min Manual Tracking Threshold 0 5 PSI e Enabled C Disabled Ea Copy Auto Scan ZlUpdate Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 48 PID Loop Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Loop Period Sets in seconds the period of time between executions of the PID algorithm This is the amount of time between executions from the beginning of one execution to the
247. ero Issued Jan 08 FST Editor ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Name Description NOT Logical NOT of SVD in Logical commands operate upon the Compare Flag CF Prior to execution of a logical command the CF must be loaded with an 8 bit value by using the SAV command The bit wise logical commands AND OR NOT and XOR apply Boolean operations on two 8 bit integers bit by bit The two 8 bit integers are the CF and the value defined by ARGUMENTI of the logical command Note that this value is then converted by the software into an 8 bit unsigned integer This value is used as a binary number 8 bits long as described next Each bit is weighted as a power of two and the bit position determines which power of two The bit either 0 or 1 is multiplied by the respective bit weight The resulting binary number is read from right to left with the right most bit representing bit O and the left most bit representing bit 7 For example the integer 42 is equivalent to the binary number 00101010 as shown next where bit 0 is the right most bit Bit Binary Weight Bit 7 0 2 0 128 0 Bit6 0 2 0 64 0 Bits 1 2 1 32 32 Bit4 0 27 0 16 0 Bit3 1 2 1 8 8 Bit2 0 2 0 4 0 Bit1 1 2 1 2 2 Bit0 0 2 0 1 0 Total 42 Table B 12 FST Logical Commands Arguments Results None _ If SVD in gt 0 SVD out 0 _ Otherwise SVD out 1 RR out RR in AND Logical AND ARG1 with SVD in 1 Input Database or Constan
248. erratically when the memory appears to be corrupted or when resetting the unit to the last saved configuration Note Cold Start reloads all restart configuration data and may also clear logs displays and FSTs Additionally it may change outputs load new accumulator values and disable user program tasks and user data types Generally do not use Cold Start on a FloBoss that is actively gathering data or performing control Save or document all required data and parameter values that could be affected before you perform a cold start During a cold start logs and FSTs may clear If you performed a Save Configuration which includes the FST and FST point in flash memory before the cold start the system Cold Start amp Clear Restores a configuration from default values stored in Alarms Events flash memory and clears the Alarm Log and Event Log Cold Start amp Clear Restores a configuration from default values stored in Displays flash memory but does not clear displays Cold Start amp Clear Restores a configuration from default values stored in FSTs flash memory and clears all FSTs Cold Start amp Clear Restores a configuration from default values stored in History flash memory and clears all History database files Cold Start amp Clear All Restores a configuration from default values stored in flash memory and clears all History database files alarm logs event logs and FSTs Clear Clears flash memory Status
249. erses byte 2 and byte 3 order in register xxxxx Number reverses byte 0 and byte 1 order in register xxxxx 1 This places an EEE Floating Point 3416 a 4 byte floating point value into two 2 byte registers to allow _ integer values to be transmitted Code 72 does the same as Code 71 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen Register xxxxx byte 3 byte 2 _Register xxxxx 1 byte 1 byte 0 EE EE EE EE EE BEES 73 _ IEEE Floating Point 3 4 6 16 _ FloBoss 103 104 Only Convert Codes 73 and 74 send the IEEE Number formatted floating point number as four bytes with a single register au IEEE Floating Point anne request Only the byte order is changed Function Code 73 loads _ register xxxxx in byte 2 byte 3 byte 0 byte 1 order Function Code _74 does the same as Function Code 73 regardless of the Byte Order field in the Modbus Configuration screen E E emm 75 to 255 No Conversion N A N A Number Number Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 97 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 98 7 12 7 Modbus Master Table The Modbus Master mode of operation allows a FloBoss to simulate a master device that can poll other devices for data and to store that data within the ROC in any valid TLP The FloBoss can also send commands to set outputs and write data to a slave device 800 supports Modbus function codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 15 and 16 Function codes 1 to 4 request data from slaves while
250. es currently selected text and place it in the Clipboard Note Currently not available Copies currently selected text and places it in the Clipboard Note Currently not available Pastes text currently in the Clipboard at the cursor s current location Note Currently not available Prints the configuration file Note Currently not available Connects to a device locally using the LOI Local Operator Interface port Disconnects from a device Displays the first of two DSP files loaded on the device Note Not available on the FB107 Displays the second of two DSP files loaded on the device Note Not available on the FB107 Displays the Analog Input Al screen Displays the Discrete Input DI screen Displays the Pulse Input PI screen Displays the Analog Output AO screen Displays the Discrete Output DO screen Displays the Comm Port screen Displays the Flags screen Displays the Clock screen Displays the Meter Setup screen Displays the Plate Change screen Displays the PID Loop screen Introduction Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Button Description 800 Opens the Function Sequence Table FST Editor Displays an About ROCLINK 800 screen providing program information version creation date and copyright for ROCLINK Launches the ROCLINK 800 on line help system 1 6 5 Configuration Tree Menu When you open a configuration
251. es rates if you selected EU min Calculates based on EU minute E totals EU hour Calculates based on EU hour E totals EU day Calculates based on EU day totals Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Rate Period cont ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Note If you select EUs Pulse as a conversion rate and EU min as a rate period the system calculates Current Rate as accumulated pulses x Conversion Scan Period x conversion from seconds to minutes If you select Pulses EU as a conversion rate and EU hour as a rate period the system calculates Current Rate as accumulated pulses Conversion Scan Period x conversion from seconds to minutes 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 6 3 PI Alarms Tab 7 6 3 Pl Alarms Tab Use this tab to configure the alarm parameters for this PI point Note You must enable alarming on the General tab to configure the limit alarms Low High LoLo HiHi Rate and Deadband on this tab If you disable alarming no limit alarms generate for this point The Point Fail alarm appears in the Active Alarms field on the General tab but the system does not log it in the Alarms Log To conserve alarm log space enable alarms only when necessary Even if you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one alarm to prevent the generation of false alarms 1 Select the Alarms tab The Alarms screen displ
252. escription Compare Flag an 8 bit integer representing the numbers 0 through 255 Often referred to as the Signal Value Discrete SVD The Compare Flag displays as both the integer value and the binary value bit 7 to the left and bit O to the right Run Flag Valid values are 0 Indicates the FST is not running 1 Indicates the FST is running 5 Indicates FST has shut down due to an invalid point reference usually an out of place or unexpected I O 8 Indicates the FST Editor has initiated Trace mode When an FST fails as indicated by an RF value of 5 you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed Instruction Pointer Indicates the storage location in the FST of the next function to be executed One storage location is used for each byte that stores the function The number of bytes reserved for the FST program in bytes Equivalent to the end pointer value minus the start pointer value The delay in 100 millisecond intervals between the execution of successive FST Commands or functions The Results Register or accumulator sometimes referred to as the Signal Value Analog SVA is a floating point value passed between functions or FSTs Ten floating point registers for each FST The floating point registers are used for global storage and register contents can be called into any of the FSTs configured for a FloBoss Four timers When set greater than 0 they decrement by 1
253. ess Variable Primary Setpoint or Override Process Variable Override Setpoint Sets integral gain or reset as the ratio of the change in output to the change in the integral of the error with respect to time This value is in terms of repeats per minute Typically calculated as either Primary Process Variable Primary Setpoint or Override Process Variable Override Setpoint 7 65 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Rate Scale Factor Description Sets the derivative gain or rate as the ratio of the change in output to the change in the error with respect to time This value is in terms of minutes Typically calculated as Primary Process Variable Primary Setpoint or Override Process Variable Override Setpoint Sets values representing the ratio of the output span to input Process Variable span The sign of the number specifies the action of the loop negative for reverse action the default or positive for direct action Reverse action causes the PID loop point to produce a decrease in output to close a valve for example when the process variable exceeds the setpoint 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 9 2 4 PID Loop Inputs Outputs Tab 7 9 2 4 PID Loop Inputs Outputs Tab Use this tab to define and control inputs and outputs on the PID 1 Select the Inputs Outputs tab The Inputs Outputs screen displays PID Loop
254. ess as Remote Automation Solutions RAS a division of Emerson Process Management FloBoss ROCLINK Bristol Bristol Babcock ControlWave TeleFlow and Helicoid are trademarks of RAS AMS PlantWeb and the PlantWeb logo are marks of Emerson Electric Co The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of the Emerson Electric Co All other trademarks are property of their respective owners The contents of this publication are presented for informational purposes only While every effort has been made to ensure informational accuracy they are not to be construed as warranties or guarantees express or implied regarding the products or services described herein or their use or applicability RAS reserves the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products at any time without notice All sales are governed by RAS terms and conditions which are available upon request RAS does not assume responsibility for the selection use or maintenance of any product Responsibility for proper selection use and maintenance of any RAS product remains solely with the purchaser and end user 2008 Remote Automation Solutions division of Emerson Process Management All rights reserved Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 1 1 ROCLINK 800 Software Descrpton cc ecccccccccceeeeceeeeceeeeeceeeesseeeessaueessaeeeseaeeeseaeeseaeessees 1 1 t2 Computer FREGUIFEINICINS ee ee EE e
255. etains information on failure what it uses as a reference temperature and reports pressure 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays Multi Variable Sensor MVS 1 MUD M Tag MUD Sensor Interface Version 12 Units Action on Failure C Hold Last Value a e Set To Fault Value Report Pressure As Reference Temperature Upstream e 60 Deg F C Downstream C 68 Deg F Ea Copy ZUpdste Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 35 Multi Variable Sensor Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Sensor Interface This read only field shows the version of the sensor Version interface firmware for the sensor Units This read only field shows the engineering units selected for the process variable You define this value on the Device Information screen ROC gt Information the MVS reads this value from the system Note If you change this value click Write on the General tab to save the new configuration 7 48 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Report Pressure As ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets the location of the static pressure tap in relation to the orifice and normal flow Valid values are Upstream or Downstream Upstream is the default If you select Downstream the system subtracts the Diff Pressure DP in PSI from the Static Pressure SP reading to obtain a Downstream Pressure measurement for archiving For Downstream
256. eved history point for a group of points as defined in the Register Number field You must complete both this field and the Starting History Points field and the value in the Starting History Points field must be different and smaller than this value sceeeececeecececsececeusecececsececeseececescececcecececcacececcecececeacececeaceceseaceceesececeesececeesececeececescecececcecececeececescececescecesesceceseecececsscesesescecescecesescecesssescecesceceseseecessscecessscecescscecessscecescececesscecessess Sets the type of history returned from the Modbus request Select Hourly or Daily to return Standard History Points select Extended to return Extended History Points Configure Menu 7 95 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Conversion Sets the type of data conversion required if any before the data returns to the host or is written to the FloBoss Conversions allow floating point values to be transmitted or received as integer values Refer to Section 7 12 6 Modbus Conversion Codes 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 12 6 Modbus Conversion Codes 7 12 6 Modbus Conversion Codes Modbus conversion codes convert data into a format that is compatible to a Modbus device Use the Conversion field located on either the Modbus Registers or Modbus History screen to specify the type of conversion required if any on the data before it is either sent to the Host o
257. event in the event log Set test equipment to produce the expected results Complete the Dead Weight Tester Value field This value represents the low range 0 of the instrument s measurement range Set Zero Paint Static Dead Wreight T ester Value 0 Live Reading 15 518 Deviation 1 9 E l Set Ze Cancel Figure 8 21 Dead Weight Tester Value When you enter a value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field ROCLINK immediately begins comparing it once each second to 8 28 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 the value in the Live Reading field obtained from the static pressure sensor and calculating the percentage deviation between the two values 8 Click Set Zero when the live reading stabilizes ROCLINK 800 adds the first line in the calibration log renames the screen to Set Span and changes the label on the Set Zero button to Set Span set Span Paint Static Action As Found As Lett Deviation Deviation 1 Get era 15 518 0 000 15 518 1 9397 Dead Wreight T ester Value h 00 00 Live Reading h 15 953 Deviation 1 9941 a l Set Span 7 Cancel Figure 8 22 Set Span 9 Set test equipment to produce the expected results 10 Complete the Dead Weight Tester Value field with a value represents the upper limit 100 or span of the instrument s measurement range Note ROCLINK 800 provides 100 as a default span valu
258. expressed in ft sec or M sec Sets the base pressure as specified in the gas contract expressed as PSIA Sets the base temperature as specified in the gas contract expressed as degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Sets the elevation of the metering location expressed in feet or in meters This value is required for the calculation of atmospheric pressure and gravitational acceleration Sets the geographical location for the metering location expressed as degrees and minutes separated by a decimal point such as 46 15 for 46 minutes and 15 degrees Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Orifice Material Indicates the material from which the orifice is made Nearly all natural gas applications use stainless steel orifice plates You must also complete the Ref Temperature field This indicates the reference temperature at which the bore diameter of the orifice plate was measured expressed in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Note This field displays only for a turbine meter Pipe Material Indicates the material from which the orifice meter tube material is made Nearly all natural gas applications use carbon steel meter tube You must also complete the Ref Temperature field This indicates the reference temperature at which the internal diameter of the pipe was measured expressed in degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius Note This field displays only for a turbine meter Fo
259. file off line with the basic information about the meters and modules that will be installed on the FloBoss for which the new configuration was created Issued Jan 08 1 Select File gt New The New Configuration File screen displays New Configuration File File Type Control Configuration History Sizing Number of PIDs Number of Points RE Standard Histor 115 v Number of Stations ROCSO0S Extended History 4 D Version 1 2 Number of Orifice Meters ROCS8OO Series Version Za Number of Turbine Meters U Number of Sampler Odorizers 1 1 0 Type e 4 point no 1 0 6 point no 1 0 C 4 point with 1 0 C B point with 1 0 Start Close Figure 4 2 New File Configuration 2 Select FB107 from the File Type frame The lower portion of the New File Configuration screen changes to reflect the FB107 Note As you define the modules and place them in slots on the FB 107 additional fields appear on the New Configuration File Menu 4 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 New Configuration File File Type Control Configuration History Sizing C FB103 Number of PIDs C FB104 e FB107 ROCSO0S Version las e ROCS8OO Series Version 2 4 Number of FSTs Number of Meter Runs 2 Modules CPU Number 0 f Points o Standard Histo 135 v Extended History 4 CPU il 2 d 4 5 6 Te On Board EL ID RS 485 Aux Pic sl MVS Aux EP IC gt TER Aux BUI sl None
260. for global storage Mesg 1 and 2 Provides two 30 character fields for storing messages that display in the FST Message area Execution Delay Sets a period in seconds between the execution of successive FST command steps The default is 0 seconds The minimum delay is 0 1 Result Register Sets a special purpose register that stores the floating point result from the most currently executed command The Result Register RR may also be known as the Signal Value Analog SVA Compare Flag Sets a special purpose 8 bit register that stores an integer representing the numbers 0 through 255 The logic commands manipulate the Compare Flag The Compare Flag may also be known as the Signal Value Discrete SVD Code Size This read only field shows the number of bytes the FST uses Code Pointer Byte This read only field shows the pointer byte for the FST Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 59 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Click Apply if you changed any parameters on this screen 7 9 2 Proportional Integral and Derivative PID Loops Proportional Integral and Derivative PID controls enable you to provide smooth and stable operation for feedback control loops that employ a regulating device such as a control valve or a motor The typical use for PID is to control a process variable to a setpoint PID is the most common control methodology in process control PID is a continuous feedback loop that keeps the process flowing nor
261. for this discrete input 1 Select the Alarms tab The Alarms screen displays Discrete Input Discrete Inputs i OI 1 Slots Tag DI slots RBs Alarming fe Disabled C OnAlarm Set C OnAlarm Clear C On Alarm Set amp Clear Blupdete Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 20 DI Alarms tab Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Review the following field for your organization s values Field Description RBX Alarming Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX SOURS s alain Tor TIS pont Vaud vaner are e Disabled Turns off RBX alarming This is the default On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to the host when the point enters an alarm condition On Alarm Clear Generates an RBX message to the host when the point leaves an alarm condition On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to and Clear the host when the point enters or leaves an alarm condition Note RBX Alarming requires you to configure the communications port Refer to Section 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory _ Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 5 Discrete Output DO Configuration DOs are high low outputs used to turn equipment on and off You can seta discrete output to send a pulse to a
262. function codes 5 6 15 and 16 transmit data to a slave device Each master request you configure uses data read from or written to registers defined in the Modbus Registers table When using Modbus function codes to 4 the FloBoss reads data from a slave device and writes it to the TLP specified in the Modbus Registers table When using Modbus function codes 5 6 15 and 16 the FloBoss reads data from the TLP specified in the Modbus Registers table and writes it to the slave device You can use an FST or User C program to schedule Modbus master requests Enable the comm port on the Comm Port screen ROC gt Comm Ports Set the Start Polling option on the Modbus Configuration screen Configure gt Modus gt Configuration if continuous polling is desired Alternately you can manage enable or disable master polling using a control application Using FSTs the FloBoss can dial other Modbus slave devices at regular intervals 1 Select Configure gt MODBUS gt Master Table The Modbus Master Table screen displays Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Modbus Master Table Logical Paint a bm Address Disabled Disabled ln O Disabled In 1 0 0 Disabled J0 12 0 O Disabed In 10 13 0 O Disabled In 10 ln O Disabled In 10 50 O Disabled In 10 Je Update vw OK A Cancel Figure 7 60 Modbus Master Table r 2 3 4 5 B d H J 2 Review the following f
263. g 1 2 123 lt Contacting Technical SUDDO EE 1 2 tA cOMW ANS TINS Call AU EE 1 2 1 4 1 Manually Creating a Desktop Ghortcout 1 3 1 4 2 Un installing ROCLINK GOO EE 1 4 1 5 Starting ROCLINK 800 Software eccccccccccseseeeceeseeecceaeeecseeeecseaseecseaeeessageeessegeesseasenenes 1 4 jo EOGI ek EE 1 5 16 User Eeer 1 6 1 6 1 The FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface cccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeaaess 1 7 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed deel IT 1 10 1 6 3 Standard Ree 1 11 TOA Tobar EE del EE 1 11 16 5 ee le Tele Tree Menu EE 1 13 E SS UO Eelere eebe 1 14 TO ETag eebe 1 15 16 5 BASIC INAVIGALOM WEE 1 15 Chapter 2 Device Directory and Device Root 2 1 21 Device Directoy nesrin a a a a a a 2 1 2 1 1 Communication Parameter Setup Screen ccccccccccceeececeeeeceeceesecesseecesaeeeeseeeeseaes 2 2 ZZ DEVICE ROO EE 2 4 22 1 B ckmng Up Reie le UL 2 4 222 Adding a Ee e EE 2 5 229 Deleting a Grou e DEE 2 5 22A Deling a DEVi Erara a A a S 2 5 E E ale We te RTE te 2 6 220 WOClCING All le 2 6 2 2 7 Renaming a Group or Deleg iert adeeeeeeee dE e 2 Chapter 3 Communications and Security 3 1 SNE eu ue Ria Lee 3 1 3 2 ROCLINK 800 Commumcatons arena a ea a aa a oaa T 3 2 3 2 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters General Tab 3 2 3 2 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters Advanced Tab 3 5 3 3 Communication Pons Om the Eegen eege eege 3 6 33T Communication NN MOUIS EE 3 7
264. grams A You should be familiar with Visual Basic before attempting to create Caution custom displays You can add fields to monitor flow I O points and other TLPs Select View gt Display gt New A blank Display Editor screen displays ven ROCLINK 800 Display Editor Eile Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Oi AN H a Mit is On HS 2 S C Bas A aal Awe B Oo BE Object buttons on toolbar Object Properties box Figure 5 19 Display Editor By adding objects tabs fields labels text etc to the display you can incorporate live data as well as images and other information you wish to convey One use of custom displays is to graphically represent the application that an FB107 monitors and controls Another use 1s to monitor the FB107 giving you to opportunity to change commonly used parameters from a single screen 5 18 View Menu Issued Jan 08 5 6 1 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Each custom display has parameters specific to the entire display that you are creating By default the system places the Display object properties box at the upper right of the screen in a pop up window A similar object properties box displays for each object you add to the display Drag and drop the object buttons from the toolbar to the Display Editor screen and set the associated parameters Each option has parameters associated with it depending on the type of option yo
265. h as flow calculations and history logging while performing calibration Note The Freeze Value field displays the value received from the AI or RTD input when you last clicked Update 6 Review the value in the Scan Mode field Valid values are Normal point scanning is enabled and is updated each scan period or Manual the point is not in scanning mode 7 If you are calibrating a temperature input disconnect the RTD sensor and connect a decade box or comparable equipment to the RTD terminals of the FloBoss Note You can also use a pocket current source or another deadweight test input source to test this value 8 Press Calibrate A Set Zero dialog box displays Set Zero Paint RTD Dead weight T ester Value E Live Reading 75 739 Deviation 9 5630 oe Set Zero 7 Cancel Figure 7 10 Set Zero 9 Enter a value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field and click Set Zero to set a zero value Note that ROCLINK 800 changes the screen name and button name to Set Span 7 12 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 set Span RATE Action 4s Found As Lett Deviation 4 Deviation Get ero Fo Foe 0 000 Fo Foe 1 5684 Dead Weight T ester Value Live Reading Deviation 95 381 U oe l Set Span 7 Cancel Figure 7 11 Set Span For the Set Zero entry in the calibration log ROCLINK 800 records the As Found and As Left values and calculates the Deviation and Devi
266. he I O points You can navigate FloBoss 107 options using the I O menu options by clicking on the FloBoss 107 graphic and selecting a tab or button or by clicking on MVS in the configuration tree 1 Select the I O Points tab The I O Points screen displays TAG CONFIGURATION INTEGRITY ACTIVE ALARMS Auto Scan Update Figure 7 33 MVS I O Points tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Point Type Defines the database point to be one of the possible types of points available to the system The point type determines the basic functions of a point Point type displays the database points associated with the installed hardware and CPU The Point type indicates the location of the point at the slot number of the I O module and channel number For example DI 2 1 indicates the Point Number for a discrete input at module slot number two first channel Tag Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Configuration Click the TLP button to display a configuration screen you use to configure the point associated with the hardware See Sections 7 8 3 through 7 8 6 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Integrity This read only field shows the status of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Alarms display on the user interface indicating the state of the hardware including the CPU I O modules C
267. he default is TextBox 1 the system uniquely names each object until you rename it TLP Associates the object with a TLP Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to define the associated TLP Allow Data Entry Sets whether the user can edit the object Click e which displays when you click in the field to display Yes Allows editing This is the default No Does not allow editing seen eee eeeneeeeeeneneneenee me mee ENEE mee me mee me mee me E 5 26 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Expression Allows editing based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the data entry is allowed Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final Yes Object is always visible This is the EE default No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set thi
268. he FloBoss This read only field shows the module physically installed in the backplane ROCLINK 800 updates this field whenever you restart the FloBoss 107 Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module This read only field shows the firmware revision for the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 This read only field shows the date the firmware was built for the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 This read only field shows the revision of the main startup firmware currently installed in the FloBoss or the smart application module This read only field shows the date the main startup firmware was installed in the FloBoss or smart application module Issued Jan 08 ROC Menu 6 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Integrity This read only field shows the status of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss Alarms display on the dynamic user interface to indicate the state of the hardware including the CPU I O modules CPU I O assembly MVS modules communication modules and smart application modules You can mouse over an alarm icon to display the definition and they also display at the bottom of the screen under the I O Points tab Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface Integrity indicates the point is out of the user defined or default range For example when an Al is open the actual AD count is 0 but the default range is 643 to 3220 or when a modu
269. he following Click on the Direct Connect icon in the Device Directory Click the Direct Connect button on the toolbar Select ROC gt Direct Connect 4 If this is the first time that you have connected to the FloBoss refer to Section 6 4 Setting the Clock 3 5 2 Local Port LOI The PC running ROCLINK 800 physically connects to the device through a cable For a local connection this cable is typically a prefabricated local operator interface LOI cable available from Remote Automation Solutions One end of the cable a 9 pin D shell female connector plugs into a serial communications port on the PC running ROCLINK 800 The other end of the cable plugs into the FloBoss operator interface connector called the Local Port Note If your PC does not have a serial port you may use a USB to serial connector for the LOI connection 3 5 3 Connect to a FloBoss To connect the computer to a remotely located FloBoss a serial dial up modem radio satellite or other communications line should be installed This connection may be made through the LOI Local Port or other Communications Port on the FloBoss Use the Connect command to connect to a serial or dial up modem To use Connect 1 Physically connect the FloBoss 2 Launch and log in to ROCLINK 800 Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Perform one of the following Select a device from the Device Directory and press
270. he meter run start and end report dates and any report sections and click Print Preview A Print Preview screen displays 5 4 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Print Preview EFM Report C Program Files ROCLINK800 A1G2 efm File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help E DeHlzpelelezlIeelAumeluHl zcogglnRlaw E amp Pint dh Q apor x fi B Back Forward PDF Excel RTF TXT HTML EFM Report A1G2 FB107 Uploaded 04 25 2007 13 30 46 Operator LO EFM rt Information Report Data File C Program Files ROCLINKS00 41G2 efm Report Period 11 05 2007 to 11 05 2007 Run Selected Meter 1 Meter Description Meter 1 Description Meter Tag Meter 1 Report Date 11052007 1449 55 Contract H our D System Parameters Device Address 1 Device Group 2 Station Name FB107 Active heter Runs 4 Version Name Part Number W6G182 Ver 1 00 Manufacturing ID Emerson Process RAS Time Created Dec 20 2006 7 22 ROM Serial Number 000000000000 Maximum Meter Runs 4 MPU Loading 22 21124 Device Type 107 General Flow Parameters Meter Calculation Method Calc Standard 15051867 Calculation Method II Fov Method AGAS Detail Figure 5 5 Previewed EFM Report 4 Use this screen to print the report at a printer or convert the report file to another format Figure 5 6 shows the first page of a printed sample report Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 EFM Report A1G2 FB107 Upl
271. he object Enter a hexadecimal color value or click in the field to display a Color screen which you use to assign a color to the object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values Yes Object is always visible This is the EE No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object 5 32 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Rectangle Adds a rectangle to mark borders between objects This option has the L following properties Rectanglef1 ERR Property Description Color Sets the color of the object Enter a hexadecimal color value or click in the field to display a Color screen which you use to assign a color to the object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click w which displays when ee a LLERA L EEREN AAEE Yes Object is always visible This is the SE default No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression
272. he system sets the EU Value here to zero Sets the engineering units for the I O such IN H20 PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps volts etc Configure Menu 7 35 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Scan Period Description Sets in seconds the amount of time between scans of the EU Value The system calculates this rate by counting the number of pulses during the scan interval and dividing by the time interval To avoid highly fluctuating calculation results typically at least 10 pulses should occur between scans at low flow conditions For example if a flow meter produces one pulse per second at low flow then set the Scan Period value to a minimum of 10 10 seconds Note Once the system reaches the scan period it updates the values in the Accum d Pulses Pulses Today Today s Total Yesterday s Total and Current Rate fields Accum d Pulses Sets the number of raw counts stored in the accumulated value counter in firmware For each scan period the FloBoss determines the number of raw counts that have occurred since the last scan period and adds them to the accumulated value counter The accumulated value rolls over to zero after reaching 16 777 216 Displays the total EU Values accumulated for the current contract day calculated by multiplying the conversion value by the accumulated pulses The system resets this value to zero at the contract hour This read only field shows the total EU Value accumula
273. he use of the GO command Refer to Table B 9 for a summary of each command Table RA FST Command Field STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 emgeet B 1 4 FST Argument Fields Issued Jan 08 Depending on the command arguments can be unused references to parameters in the FloBoss TLPs numerical constants or ASCII characters Once you select a command the argument cell requires that you either typing a numerical constant or ASCII text or click the TLP button for data selection Depending on whether you have selected TLPs to display as numbers or as text via Tools gt Options in ROCLINK 800 the TLP appears in the argument cells as a number sequence or as a text abbreviation of the Type Point number and Parameter For example the text abbreviation of the status parameter of discrete input module 4 channel 1 would be DIN4 1 STATUS The Data 3 parameter for softpoint 3 would be SFP 3 DATAS3 FST Editor B 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 B 1 5 FST Comment Fields FST Function Examples Basic Rules for Creating FSTs Use the Comment field to enhance readability and provide a place to document the purpose of an FST Step group of Steps and save information within the FST Comments are discarded when an FST is compiled and downloaded to the device Comments remain with the FST when it is saved to a disk file A function consists of a command its associated arguments and an optional label In the example shown in
274. her of the Gross methods when Temperature is between 0 C and 54 C 32 F and 130 F Pressure is between 0 and 8274 kPa 0 and 1200 PSIA Gas composition is within the Normal range as defined in the 1992 AGA8 report Heating Value Sets how the system determines the heating value for a specified quantity of gas Valid values are Calculate allow the system to calculate the heating value from the gas composition data or Enter use the value specified in the energy calculation Note Use the Type of Units parameter on the General tab to toggle between volume or mass measurement in English units expressed as BTU CF or BTU Lb and metric units MJ m or MJ Kg Heating Value Basis Identifies the property basis the system used to determine the heating value for the flow or energy Wet Saturated water vapor present in gas Note When you select this option the FB107 calculates the mole percentage of water based on the algorithm from I APWS IF9 standards and adjusts the other mole percentages accordingly As Gas may contain some water vapor Delivered Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Specific Gravity Sp Heat Ratio Log Methane Adjust Description Sets the ratio of the molar mass of the gas to the molar mass of the air a value used in the flow calculation Valid values are Calculate the system calculates the value and Enter use the specific
275. his tab to configure the basic parameters for the DO point Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Discrete Output Discrete Outputs Tag DO d olotl General Advanced TOO Parameters Alarms Point Mumber State On CHE OOUT Type Latched e C Time Duration e es Momentary E a Scanning Enabled C Disabled Alarming 0 Enabled Disabled Toggle TOO Toggle Active Alarms D 1 Field Discrete Outputs lUpdate OK X Cancel Figure 7 22 DO General tab Review the following fields for your organization s values Description Selects the discrete output to be configured The outputs are listed by both point number and tag Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Sets a short 10 alphanumeric characters identifier for the point Note This selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen This read only field identifies the rack location for this point Indicates the State of the discrete output Valid values are Off indicating that the output is off or that a contact is open or On indicating that the output is on or that a contact is closed Momentary Time On 7 28 Configure Menu Activates the one shot Momentary mode If you select On set the value in the DOUT Type to Latched set a value in the Time On field and then click Apply ROCLINK 800 activates the discrete
276. ialog box Method 2 If you have a zip file that contains the ROCLINK 800 installation files A Extract the zip file to the local hard drive for example in the C TEMP directory B Run setup exe from the extraction directory for example run C TEMP SETUP EXE The Installation Wizard screen appears 2 The Installation Wizard determines whether you have previously installed ROCLINK 800 If this is an upgrade a dialog box appears asking whether to continue with the upgrade Click Yes to begin the installation Click Next when prompted If this is a new installation click Next on the ROCLINK 800 Welcome screen Read the License Agreement and click Yes to accept it Enter your Name and Company name and click Next 3 The program installs the software in the default recommended directory C Program Files ROCLINK800 Select an alternative destination folder if you want to install the software in a folder other than the default 4 Click Next A confirmation screen appears when you are ready to start copying files 5 Click Next in the Setup Status screen 6 Click Finish in the Wizard Complete screen 7 If you installed the software from a CD ROM select View Manual or Exit on the Main Menu screen Once you have exited the Main Menu remove the installation CD ROM Note You may need to restart your PC to complete the installation 1 4 1 Manually Creating a Desktop Shortcut The ROCLINK 800 installation
277. iated softpoints to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold start Configure Menu 7 41 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 4 Click OK to display the FB107 graphic 7 8 Multi Variable Sensor MVS Configuration The MVS Sensor setup screens provide you with an interface to configure a multi variable sensor a smart device that can measure temperature static pressure and differential pressure Because of the FB107 s graphical interface you can either use the Configure option on the ROCLINK 800 menu Configure gt I O gt MVS Sensor or click on the FloBoss 107 MVS module graphic You can also use the configuration tree The FB107 s graphical interface display shows the current settings of the point including alarms and integrity and provides access to the I O configuration screens Note If you change a parameter on the MVS screens you must update the sensor configuration using the Write button on the Multi Variable Sensor screen s General tab When you click the MVS module on FloBoss 107 graphical display the two tab MVS screen displays General VO Points Installed Module MVS Module Actual Module MVS Module Description MVS Interface Revision Deui Part Number wem 0 Build Date Feb 01 2007 09 00 Serial Number w48082X00324 06520014 Boot Revision Rev 1 00 Boot Build Date Dec 11 2006 16 17 Integrity E E Uninstall Auto Scan ZUpdate Figure 7 31 MVS Interface
278. ic Trace executes the FST function indicated by the Instruction Pointer IP moves the Instruction Pointer to the next FST function to be executed and then stops You are given the opportunity to examine the results of the FST function and determine the next FST function to be executed The location of the action depends on the nature of the command The action may be traced to the history log I O value Point Numbers softpoint and so on The command executed is determined by comparing the Instruction Pointer IP shown on the Monitor screen to a list of all Instruction Pointers and their corresponding commands Trace thereby verifies proper execution and sequencing of the FST functions Note Before entering Trace mode print out an Instruction Pointer listing of the FST After entering Trace mode from a newly compiled FST the FST starts at the first STEP After entering Trace mode from an executing FST the FST starts at the STEP being executed FST Editor B 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note When you attempt to Trace an FST that contains WT BRK ST or CT commands a pause in the sequencing can occur until the command conditions are met Other Trace commands include Select Monitor gt Trace On to turn on Trace mode Select Monitor gt Pause to stop the FST at the current command Select Monitor gt Resume to start the FST at the current command Select Monitor gt Trace Off to turn off Trace mode
279. ic TLP numbers You can map one line in the Modbus Register table to more than one register or TLP pair by using either Point Indexing or Parameter Indexing Point Indexing maps the starting register to the selected TLP Subsequent registers through the ending register map to the same point type and parameter and increment the point logical number Parameter Indexing maps the starting register to the selected TLP Subsequent registers through the ending register map to the same point type and point logical number and increment the parameter number When using Point Indexing the configuration of Starting Ending Device Register Register Parameter s SE SEET 100 103 AIN 4 1 EU Point 0 specifies four registers 100 101 102 and 103 that are mapped to a group of analog input AIN values in engineering units EU starting at the analog input in the fourth module location first position 4 1 Configure Menu 7 89 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Register 100 EU of AIN point in location 4 1 Register 101 EU of AIN point in location 4 2 Register 102 EU of AIN point in location 4 3 Register 103 EU of AIN point in location 4 4 Parameter Indexing When using Parameter Indexing the configuration of Example Starting Ending Device Register Register Parameter s Indexing SSbSERER 109 114 FST 1 R1 Parameter 1 specifies six registers 109 110 111 112 113 and 114 that are mapped to a group of FST 1
280. ic pressure sensor for a turbine meter Meter Calibration Meier E ll Meter Tag Turbine H2 Freeze Freeze VY alues Static Pressure Temperature be 1600 72 31 D en vei case zz as Fr as Figure 8 18 Turbine Meter Calibration 8 26 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Click Freeze ROCLINK 800 displays a dialog asking 1f you want to create a calibration report file ROCLINK 800 K Do you want to create a calibration report file 4 Click Yes to display a Save As dialog box and specify a storage location for the report which you can review later Click No to proceed with verification without generating a report ROCLINK 800 displays the Meter Calibration screen with frozen values and active buttons Meter Calibration Meier Meter Tag Turbine H2 Freeze Yalues Static Pressure Temperature be 1600 d 2100 Verify Calibrate Offset RTD Bias _ Ofset _ RTD Bias Done Figure 8 19 Calibration Frozen Values 5 Click Calibrate A Set Zero screen displays Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Set Jero Paint Static Dead Weight ester Value al Live Reading 15 616 Deviation i 3397 l Set Ze Cancel Figure 8 20 Set Zero Note You can click Cancel to exit the calibration without saving the changes The system retains the previous calibration settings but logs the
281. ical interface display shows the current settings of the point including alarms and integrity The currently selected hardware displays at the bottom of the screen This applies to the software selectable AI DI DO PI DI channels communications modules and smart modules General 1 0 Setup 1 0 Points Installed Module On Board 6 PointIO Actual Module On Board 6 PointlO Description CPU Field Interface Revision Rev 1 00 Part Number w n Build Date Jan 10 2007 14 36 0 Serial Number W48084x0012 407020094 E Boot Revision Rev 1 00 N Boot Build Date Jan 10 2007 14 32 Integrity i Dee oe ll me Uninstall Auto Scan ZUpdate Figure 7 3 I O Interface General tab Field Description Installed Module This read only field shows the type of module the FloBoss 107 uses for point configuration and does not require that a module be physically installed to display The FloBoss 107 remembers the Installed Module type until you Uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module Description This read only field shows a description of the 2 hardware Cumently instaled IM MME TIOROSS a Part Number This read only field shows the part number of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 TTT Configure Menu 1 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Serial Number This read only field shows the serial number of the hardware currently installed in the Fl
282. ications are established typically for configuration software running on a PC The point number the ROC and ROC Plus protocols use for I O point types are based on a physical input or output with a terminal location the point numbers for all other point types are logical and are simply numbered in sequence Ethernet has linked Glossary A 5 LOI LPM LRC m mA MAC Address Manual mode MAU MCU Meter Factor Meter Proving Modbus MPU MMBTU msec MVS mV mW NEC NEMA OH Off line A 6 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Local Operator Interface or Local Port Refers to the serial EIA 232 RS 232 port on the ROC through which local communications are established typically for configuration software running on a PC Lightning Protection Module a device that provides lightning and power surge protection for ROCs Longitudinal Redundancy Checking error checking Meter Milliamp s one thousandth of an ampere Media Access Control Address a hardware address that uniquely identifies each node of a network For a ROC indicates that the I O scanning has been disabled Medium Attachment Unit Master Controller Unit A number obtained by dividing the actual volume of liquid passed through a flow meter during a meter proving operation by the volume registered by the flow meter The meter factor is used in flow calculations to correct the indicated volume end flow meter registration minus start flo
283. ice Group 2 Host Group 1 Use Comm Port C Modem C TCP IP PC Comm Port Comm Port 1 Baud Rate 19200 v Modem Parameters Modem OY Phone Number Pe g TCP IP Addressing IP Address Port Number Y OK X Cancel Figure 3 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications General tab Field Description Tag Sets a unique name for the FB107 Enter up to 50 Be alphanumeric characters to identify the FB107 Connect Click to communicate with the PC using the parameters configured for this PC s communications port 3 2 Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Device Address Sets the address of the specific FB107 with which you desire to communicate If you are connected to a multi drop series of devices enter the device address and device group of a specific device Note The default device address is 240 Device Group Associates the FB107 with a specific group The default device group is 240 Note If you connect a PC running ROCLINK 800 directly to the device s LOI Local Port ROCLINK 800 makes a request to Device Group of 240 and Device Address of 240 The Local Port of a device always responds to a request for Address 240 and Group 240 no matter what Device Address and Device Group is configured in the device if the LOI Security is valid Host Address Identifies the PC s host address which by default is Address 3 If more than one computer running ROC
284. ields for your organization s values Field Description Logical Point Sets the logical point for the communication port Note You can define up to three logical points for Modbus master and slave functionality on COM1 COM2 and COM3 Tag Sets a 10 character alphanumeric identifier for the master table RTU Address Sets the RTU address for the slave device to be 8 queried Function Code Sets the Modbus function code to be sent to the slave device Click w at the right edge of this field to display all valid function codes Slave Register Sets the starting register number from which data is drawn from the slave device Master Register Sets the starting register number into which data is stored on the master device AtNee eee ee ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeee ee eee ee ee eee es ee Eee eG EE ES OSES OSES EEE ESESEEE ESOS EEE ESESEEESOSEEEESESE ESOS ESE OLESOAEELESAEOSEEESOLOEESOHSEEALEEEELELOEEES ENEE Number of Registers Sets the total number of registers to poll Comm Status This read only field shows the status of the query see Table 7 8 Table 7 8 Status of Host Request or Command Status Description 0 Inactive or start of transmission 1 Receive timeout error Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 99 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Status Description 2 Received Address check 3 Received Function Number check Number of expected bytes check Dee Ge CCRC or LRC check o KE Vald Slave response ON On AR wo 128
285. iguration files have the extension 800 Print Configuration Use the Print Configuration option to specify the point types that you desire to print 1 Select File gt Print Configuration The Print Configuration Setup screen displays File Menu 4 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 4 8 Print Configuration Setup Point Types Point Numbers Parameters applies to all points Configurable Opcode Ssequence Revision Discrete Outputs Data 1 Analog Inputs Data 2 Analog Outputs Data 3 M Pulse Inputs M Data 4 PID Parameters Data 5 LlaGa Flow Parameters History Parameters AGA Flow Calculation Values system Variables FST Registers Soft Point Parameters Database Parameters Module Information M1 Information for User Defined Prints gt v lt Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All Y OK X Cancel Figure 4 5 Print Configuration Note This screen initially displays with all point types selected as shown in Figure 4 5 Select the specific point types you desire to print Use the Select All or Deselect All buttons to select multiple point types point numbers or parameters Use your mouse to select deselect individual point types point numbers or parameters Click OK ROCLINK 800 reads the configuration from the device and displays the Print Preview screen File Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 a ROCLINK 800 Pri
286. igurations Each icon on the device root represents a different type of communications connection GE Direct Connect Device Root a COM Device TR COM2Device 2 Device Root amp Modem Device e Ethernet Device New Group ty New Devicel ha New Device Figure 2 5 Device Root The default device labels which correspond to available communication ports include COMI Device COM Device Modem Device Ethernet Device New Group You may add delete or modify the communication configurations for each of these devices You can also define device groups 2 2 1 Backing Up Configurations After you configure your device settings we strongly recommend that you create a back up file of those settings ROCLINK 800 stores these values in the file ROC_USER mdb Use Windows Explorer to find the ROC_USER mdb file then copy the file and store it in a safe place This Device Directory and Device Root Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 backup file enables you to restore your settings in case they ever become corrupted You can configure devices on line communications using the Local Operator Interface LOI Port also known as the local port or a communication port such as a modem For differentiation each FB107 has a tag and a unique device address which you define on the ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters screen see Figure 2 4 The Device Address must be different from any oth
287. ing the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if you Disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 2 2 AI Advanced Tab 7 2 2 Al Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected analog input 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Analog Input Analog Inputs i Diff Pres Y Filter Adjusted A D 0 Adjusted A 100 29895 Raw A D Input Actual Scan Average Raw Value Enabled fe Disabled Tag Diti Fres Action on Failure e Hold Last Value Set To Fault Value Fault Value 00 i Seconds Clipping i Enabled e Disabled Update Y OK ACancel Figure 7 8 AI Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Filter Average Raw Value 7 10 Configure Menu Description Sets the value for a weighted sample using a percentage of the last value plus a percentage of the new value The entered value is the percentage of the last value used The filter is calculated every scan period by the formula Last Value x Enter
288. ing the plate change Valid values are Yes plate change occurs during flowing conditions or No plate change occurs during non flowing conditions Note If you choose Yes you can freeze inputs for the duration of the plate change TTT Meter Menu 8 35 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 36 Field Freeze Orifice Diameter Description Click to freeze input values for the duration of the plate change Note This button is active only if you are performing the plate change under flowing conditions The system holds all I O values in Manual Mode at the current value Click OK to return values to an active state at the completion of the plate change This read only field shows the frozen differential pressure value during the plate change This read only field shows the frozen static pressure value during the plate change This read only field shows the frozen temperature value during the plate change This read only field shows the size of the pipe diameter for the selected meter Sets in inches or millimeters the exact size of the orifice diameter of the new plate 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Click OK when you complete the plate change If you have frozen values this returns system values to flowing conditions Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 9 The Utilities Menu Use the Utilities menu options to update firmware manage softw
289. initial value As Left Shows the sensor s value after calibration Deviation Shows the difference between the As Found value and the As Left e vue Deviation Shows the difference between the As Found and As Left values as a ee percentage Dead Weight Tester Sets the expected value against which the system Value calibrates Note This is the Expected value in the Action field Live Reading This read only field shows the current reading from _the sensor o Deviation This read only field shows the deviation between the expected and actual values Deviation Deviation Span EU Zero EU x 100 13 Click Done when you have completed the calibration The Calibrate screen displays 14 If the calibration results indicate that you need to adjust the sensor click Zero Shift Offset RTD Bias depending on the point you are adjusting The system displays a Set Zero Shift Offset screen Set Zero Shift Offset Paint My Sensor Static Pressure Measured Pressure Reading Live Reading 0 904 Pressure Offset 0 9037 l Set Offset Figure 7 39 Set Zero Shift Offset 15 Perform one of the following Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 53 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 54 For Differential Pressure Temperature Choose Click Set Offset Complete the Measured Pressure Reading field Complete the Temperature Standard Reading field 16 Click Set Offset for static pressure and temperat
290. inputs and outputs to implement flow control with pressure override to protect against over pressuring the line In this example the Primary process variable Primary PV is the volumetric flow rate per day obtained from an orifice meter run point The system obtains the Override process variable Override PV from the static pressure value from an MVS or analog input Both the Primary and Override loops require you to define a setpoint the value at which you wish to control the loop The example describes the process for setting up either discrete or analog control for the control output Configure Menu 7 69 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 If a 4 to 20 mA signal to an I O converter controls the control valve Configure an analog output with the appropriate Low and High Reading EU engineering units The units can either be in terms of the valve position 0 to 100 or in terms of flow capacity O to 1000 MCF Day Set the Output Type on the PID screen to Analog On the Inputs Outputs tab define an output point TLP using as an analog input the desired Logical Number and EU Value parameter If a motorized actuator on the valve controls the control valve Configure two discrete output points for the open and close contacts as TDO Time Duration Output DOUT types Set the Low Reading Time to the minimum amount of time in seconds the TDO can be energized to move the motor Set the High Reading Time to the amount of time in secon
291. iption Connect Command Sets the Hayes style Connect Command required to contact the host Typically this is the command ATDT followed by the telephone number for example ATDT5155551212 This parameter is required only for dial out operations such as for SRBX Alarming Seege This read only field shows the modem s current status result code Valid values are o vi Successfully executed command line CONNECT _ Connection established ANG aA Ring signal detected as NO CARRIER Carrier not detected lost ERROR WE Error in command line NO DIAL TONE No dial tone detected Busy Busy signal detected NO ANSWER Linenot picked up on the called end 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab Use the RBX tab to configure the Spontaneous Report by Exception alarming features The RBX or SRBX Spontaneous Report by Exception alarming feature is available for serial communication ports This feature allows the device to call in to a host computer when a configured alarm occurs If you wish to configure dial up RBX then a modem must be present and appropriately configured When you use RBX alarming ensure that you enable and configure alarms for each point you wish to monitor Configure the alarm parameters so that an alarm occurs only when desired This prevents nuisance alarms You configure RBX alarm parameters on the Alarms tab on the I O MVS and Meter Setup configuration screens Issued Jan 08 Communica
292. iption Point not configured Discards samples when there is no measurable flow and performs a straightforward linear average of the remaining samples to compute the minute and hour values This is the default method for calculating the average for the flow input and is the simplest and most commonly used method For differential meters with analog input values no flow conditions are defined as the differential pressure meter input less than or equal to the Low Flow Cutoff For pulse meters with a pulse input values no flow conditions are defined as the no flow time elapsing without receiving a pulse A linear average of all samples is performed if there is no flow during the logging period Configure Menu 7 77 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Archive Type Avg Flow Dependant Formulaic Aug Flow Weighted Linear Avg Flow Weighted _Formulaic BS Avg Linear Accumulate Second Accumulate Minute Accumulate Hour Accumulate Day Totalize Maximum Value FST Data FST Time Minute Description Discards samples for periods when there is no flow like the Flow Dependent Linear method but when calculating the average this method typically takes the square root of each sample before averaging the samples together and then squares the result This formulaic method _ typically produces a Slightly lower value than the linear method Determines a relative weight for each
293. itational Acceleration C Calculate Enter Calculate Enter 14 45 PSIA 32 14398 Ft Sec2 Base Pressure 14 73 PSIA Base Temperature 60 0 DegF Elevation 500 0 Feet 35 0 Deg Force Recalculation C Set e Clear Latitude Limit Meter Events e Enabled C Disabled Pressure Tap Gauge C Absolute Copy Figure 8 7 Meter Setup Advanced tab Turbine Meter 2 Update Y OK X Cancel Note Which screen displays depends on the calculation standard you selected on the General tab Select AGA3 92 or ISOQ5167 2003 orifice calculations to display Figure 8 6 Select AGA7 96 turbine calculations to display Figure 8 7 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Atmospheric Pressure Gravitational Acceleration Latitude Meter Menu Description Sets how the system determines the value of atmospheric pressure at the metering location Valid values are Calculate the system uses the value in the Elevation field or Enter calculates the value from the value or Enter use the specified pressure value If entered the value must be greater than zero and is expressed in PSIA Sets how the system determines the value for gravitational acceleration at the metering location Valid values are Calculate the system calculates the value from Elevation and Latitude or Enter use the specified acceleration value If entered the value must be greater than zero and is
294. ive type when the History Point being archived is a rate in _ EUs hour Converts the c one gt second samples ofa a per day rate value Io a per second rate and sums them over the logging interval to compute the archived value Select this archive type when the History Point being archived is a rate in 7 Bc E U Si d lay Curr rrent Value E Logs a snapshot of the current sampled vele Logs the difference between the current value at the end of the period EIERE Minimum Value Archives the minimum value read Archives the maximum value read Allocates space for the FST to write values to the periodic archive using 8 the WDB command Note The number of periodic entries in the segment determines the number of values that can be written The FST determines which index in the periodic archive to write to independently of the segment s current index Allocates space for the FST to write time stamps to the periodic archive using the WIM command Note The number of periodic entries in the segment determines the number of time stamps that can be written The value takes the format MM DD HH MM The FST determines which index in the periodic archive to write to independently of the current index for the segment Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Archive Type FST Time Second Description Allocates space for the FST to write time stamps to the periodic archive using the WIM command Note The
295. k to display the Comm Port screen Refer to Configuration Section 3 4 Configuring FB107 Communication Ports 3 4 Configuring FB107 Communications Ports The FB107 communication comm ports link the device to computers such as the one running ROCLINK 800 or a host computer You use the Comm Port screen to configure comm ports After you select a communications module on the FB107 graphic click in the lower right portion of the screen ROCLINK 800 displays the Comm Port screen for that module or comm port Note You also access the Comm Port screen by selecting ROC gt Comm Ports from the ROCLINK 800 menu bar and then selecting the appropriate comm port from the drop down menu or by selecting the Comm icon from the configuration tree Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 After you completely configure all comm ports save that configuration to Flash memoryusing the Save Configuration button on the Flags screen ROC gt Flags 3 4 1 Comm Ports General Tab Select a comm module from the FB107 graphic and then click in the lower right corner of the screen ROCLINK 800 displays the Comm Port screen for the selected module which shows the General tab Comm Port Comm Ports 3 Comme General Modem RB Baud Rate 300 1200 4800 192K C 576K Key On Delay 0 Key Off Delay 0 Seconds S Valid Recerve Ctr Tag Comme m Parity
296. l pressure transmitters for low and high pressure ranges Valid values are Enabled use stacked DP transmitters or Disabled do not allow use of stacked DP transmitters Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Sets the input for monitoring low differential pressure Click to display a Set TLP dialog box you use to assign the input You must Enable the Stacked DP parameter must to use this input or you can leave this input in Manual Mode when you Disable Stacked DP Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Sets the differential pressure point at which the system switches over to the low differential pressure input When the High DP input is active and the High DP reading drops below this value the Low DP input becomes the active input The system assumes the units for this input to be inches of water column In H20 or kPa Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Sets the differential pressure point at which the system switches over to the high differential pressure input When the Low DP input is active and the Low DP reading rises above this setpoint the High DP input becomes the active input The system assumes the units for this input to be inches of water column In H20 or kPa Note This field displays only for an orifice meter Enables the variable K Factor and sets the K Factor values over a range to be measured If this field is Disabled the system uses the Static K Fac
297. l short for easy recognition 3 Press Enter when finished ROCLINK 800 adds the new label to the device or group Issued Jan 08 Device Directory and Device Root 2 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 8 Device Directory and Device Root Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 3 Communications and Security This chapter describes how to configure the communication ports on a PC and on an FB107 It also describes how to use the Connect and Direct Connect features in ROCLINK 800 and how to define security to control access to the FB107 and ROCLINK 800 In This Chapter ST COMMUMIGATIONS EE 3 1 3 2 ROCLINK 800 Communtcabons nerenin 3 2 3 2 1 ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters General Tab 3 2 3 2 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Parameters Advanced Tab3 5 3 3 Communication Ports on the FB107 ccc cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 6 3 3 1 Communication Modules 3 7 3 4 Configuring FB107 Communications Portes 3 9 3 4 1 Comm Ports General Tab 3 10 3 4 2 Comm Ports Modem Tab 3 12 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 13 309 CORMECIAG to an EH e 3 15 SF Direct Connec Ee 3 15 S02 Local Ee 3 16 3539 CONNEC to a EE ees 3 16 354 SUCCESST lLOJON misran 3 17 3 5 5 Disconnecting from aFlob oss 3 17 3 6 Troubleshooting Connection Errors cccccccsecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 3 6 1 Troubleshooting ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 18 S OCCU Y EE 3 18 3 1 ROCLINK 800 Security ciinii ea 3 19 3T Device
298. larm condition Pa eee On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to and Clear the host when the point enters or leaves an alarm condition GEES Note RBX Alarming requires you to configure the communications port Refer to Section 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 6 Pulse Input PI Configuration Pulse Input PI modules accept pulse trains square wave signals that measurement devices such as turbine meters generate The pulse input accepts digital level on off signals from an external device and accumulates the changes over a configured period of time The PI can also determine a rate from the accumulated pulses over a configured period of time Select Configure gt I O gt PI Points The Pulse Input screen displays Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 33 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Pulse Input Pulse Inputs a Tag P11 Slot General Advanced Alarms Point Number A13 Frequency ID Pulses Second EU Value 20 Units Scanning Alarming scan Period 5 oo Secs 5 Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Accum d Pulses DO Today s Total OO Yesterday s Total bo o Current Rate OO o Active Alarms D SCH ES Copy ZJpdate Y ok
299. larm data it transmits Events and Alarms an acknowledgement message to the ROC to clear these events and alarms from the Modbus buffer Until acknowledged the ROC continues to send the same event and alarm records to the host The Modbus acknowledgement to clear the Event Log and Alarm Log buffer uses Function Code 05 and the Register Number defined in the History Access configuration In this request the data value is always one 1 Table 7 11 Event and Alarm Acknowledgement Response Example Message Message Device Function Error Field Address Code Register Data Check Bytes 1 1 2 2 2 TX Order MS LS MS LS MS LS Table 7 12 Modbus Events and Alarms Log Contents Byte Contents of Event Log Record Contents of Alarm Log Record 1 to2 Operator change Event Log bit map 16 bit Alarm change bit map 16 bit integer Refer to integer Refer to Table 7 13 Event amp Alarm Table 7 13 Event amp Alarm Change Bit Map _ Change Bit Map Contents Gontents O 3to4 Modbus Register number of variable 16 bit Modbus Register number of variable 16 bit integer _ integer 5 to 8 Time Stamp HHMMSS 32 bit floating point Time Stamp HHMMSS 32 bit floating point 9to12 Date Stamp MMDDYY 32 bit floating point Date Stamp MMDDYY 32 bit floating point Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 103 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Byte Contents of Event Log Record Contents of Alarm Log Record 13 to 16 Previous value of
300. larm for this point regardless of the alarm configuration Alarm statuses display in the read only Status field on the General tab Low Alarm Sets in engineering units a limit value to which the input value must fall to generate a Low alarm High Alarm Sets in engineering units a value to which the input value must rise to generate a High alarm Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 55 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Alarm Deadband Sets in engineering units an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limit and below the High Alarm limit The Alarm Deadband prevents the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data Fault Value Sets the point s value on failure If a point fails and you have previously set the value on the Advanced tab s Action on Failure field to Set to Fault Value the system uses the value entered in this field as the EU value for that point Note Fault Values are only used in Modify Limits RBX Alarming Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX _or RBX alarming for this point Valid values are Disabled Turns off RBX alarming This is On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to the host when the point enters an alarm condition On Alarm Clear Generates an RBX message to the host when the point leaves an alarm condition EE On Alarm Set Generates an RBX
301. larming the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if you Disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 5 2 DO Advanced Tab 7 5 2 DO Advanced Tab Use this tab to configure accumulated value and state for reset for the selected DO 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays Discrete Output Discrete Outputs DO d Slot Tag Do 2 Glo Accumulated Value 442175 Status an Power Reset Off mg Retain Last Status ZlUpdate Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 23 DO Advanced tab 7 30 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Accumulated Value Sets a value for the accumulated number of off to on transitions for the discrete output The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 You can preset the accumulator to a desire value or clear it by enter zero 0 Status on Power Indicates how the FloBoss handles the discrete Reset output state on power resets Valid values are Off discrete output is off on power reset or Retain Last Status FB107 retains the DO status whether off or on 3 Click Apply if you change
302. le was installed and improperly removed or loss of communications occurred Uninstall Click to remove the hardware firmware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 The Installed Module field displays the type of module the FloBoss 107 uses for point configuration and does not require that a module be physically installed to display The FloBoss 107 remembers the installed module type until you uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module Note Uninstall is valid for all modules except the CPU 3 Proceed to Section 6 9 2 CPU Information Advanced Tab 6 9 2 CPU Information Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to configure CPU clock speed scan period sleep modes and the loop output voltage 1 Select the Advanced tab The CPU Information Advanced screen displays Clock Speed Sleep Mode B e Di M 29 4912 Ms Enabled Disabled Loop Output Voltage e 14 7456 MHz C 10volts e 24 volts 3 6864 MHz Scan Period A0 PID FST C 5Oms Ze 100m C 1000 me Auto Scan E Update Figure 6 10 CPU Information Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields 6 10 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 Issued Jan 08 Field Clock Speed Scan Period Sleep Mode Loop Output Voltage ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets the desired clock speed for the FloBoss 107 CPU This value determines the speed at which the CPU executes code Sets the amount of time between updates of each scan
303. lear Alarm 15 Not Used 7 13 LCD User List 7 104 1 Set or 0 Clear Note You can configure the LCD user lists but you cannot display the LCD user lists without the optional FB107 LCD Touchpad For complete documentation on configuring and using the Touchpad refer to the FloBoss 107 Flow Manager LCD Program User Manual Form A6236 Use the Configure menu s LCD User List option to configure displays on the optional Touchpad The Touchpad has three operating modes Standard Basic List Mode BLM and Chart Standard mode requires that you complete a log on sequence to access user list information BLM mode automatically scrolls through a display of up to 32 parameter values you define Finally Chart enables the Touchpad to serve as a dynamic real time chart recorder displaying a variety of history points you define Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 13 1 LCD User List Standard You can define up to four user lists which you can access after you log onto the Touchpad Each user list provides easy access to up to 16 parameter values or a total of 64 parameters To define the contents of each user list 1 Select Configure gt LCD User List gt Standard The LCD User List screen displays LCD User List List No An ll Title List 1 Scroll Time 4 Seconds Device Parameter Units GANEW1 CURDP InH20 AGANEW 1 CUR SP PSI GANEW 1 CUR TP DegF FLWNEW 1 FL
304. lect Configure gt Control gt FST Register Issued Jan 08 FST Editor B 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Select the desired FST from the drop down list box 4 Select the FST Status Disabled radio button 5 Click Apply and click OK B 1 14 Deleting an FST using Clear To permanently delete an FST 1 Select FST gt Clear 2 Select the desired FST FST1 to FST4 B 1 15 Reading an FST From Device The FST menu allows you to select FSTs to Read Select FST gt Read gt From Device to retrieve the contents of the FloBoss memory and load the FST in the selected Workspace B 1 16 Reading an FST From File The FST menu allows you to select FSTs to Read Select FST gt Read gt From File to retrieve the contents of a disk file and display the FST in the selected Workspace Notes If invalid points exist in the FST you receive an error indicating which Point Number is missing The Output view is populated with data when a Compile operation is performed or when an FST is read from the FloBoss B 1 17 Closing an FST Select FST gt Close to exit the FST Editor or Monitor screen B 1 18 Printing an FST In the FST Editor select FST gt Print Preview to print an FST or export it to a file A printed FST can help you in troubleshooting When the Print Preview screen appears click the Print button to send the FST to a printer You may also select the PDF Excel or RTF buttons to export the FST as a file i
305. les Exit Edit Undo Cut Copy Paste _Note This option is not available in the current release View Directory EFM Report Calibration Report History S Alarms Events Display I O Monitor Toolbar ROC Direct Connect Disconnect Collect Data Clock z Security Comm Ports Memory Information Flags Configure I O Control History Points Opcode Table MODBUS LCD User List User Data o Meter Setup Calibration Values Plate Change DTD Introduction Issued Jan 08 1 6 1 Issued Jan 08 Menu Utilities ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Menu Options Update Firmware License Key Administrator Convert EFM File User Program Administrator ROCLINK 800 Security Al Calibration Values MVS Calibration Values FST Editor Communications Monitor Help Topics About ROCLINK 800 The FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface You can navigate the FB107 options either by using the ROCLINK menu structure or by clicking on the FB107 graphical dynamic interface and selecting a tab or button The dynamic interface display shows the current settings of the point including alarms and integrity The system displays a white line around objects that are links when you hover your cursor over them A link descriptor displays indicating what the link is for The system displays a yellow line around currently selected components The configuration for the selected hardware displays at the bottom of the screen Note For more information on using th
306. lotting FIISTONY EE 5 12 5 4 4 Viewing Alarm ogs 5 14 5 4 5 Viewing Event Loge 5 15 Display Administrator cccccccseeeecseeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeessnes 5 16 Custom BIEN 5 18 5 6 1 Creating a New Custom Display ccceccceesseeeeeneeeeeees 5 19 5 6 2 Adding Custom Display Obiects 5 23 5 6 3 Managing Custom Display Objects ccceeeeeeeseeeeeees 5 36 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Obert 5 39 5 6 5 Editing a Custom Display from a File cceccceeeeeeeeees 5 41 KONIOR O E 5 41 TOODI E 5 43 View Menu 5 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 1 Directory Select View gt Directory to replace the FB107 graphic image with the Device Directory The Device Directory displays the root level of all devices and groups configured in ROCLINK 800 Note You can also switch displays between the Device Directory and the online device using the Windows option on the ROCLINK 800 menu bar 5 2 EFM Report Select View gt EFM Report to generate printed and on screen reports of the configuration alarms events and historical flow data for a meter point ROCLINK 800 uses EFM Electronic Flow Measurement reports in conjunction with the FB107 s AGA flow calculation capabilities to display or print previously collected flow data An EFM report file contains all flow data which includes the operational characteristics configuration parameters history events and alarms of each measur
307. low the setpoint in which the process variable can move without affecting the Sets the maximum rate at which the Override PID setpoint can ramp to a new value Maximum rate is in EU per minute where engineering units are the units of the process variable Sets the threshold to prevent premature selection of the Override loop If the Override process variable is outside of this threshold on the safe side of the Override setpoint the system always selects the Primary loop However if the Override process variable is within the threshold of the Override setpoint or is on the unsafe side of that setpoint the system can select the Override loop Note If you set the override Threshold to 0 0 the system uses the high low value of the Override Type Select field defined on the General tab to select the appropriate change regardless of the error in the Override loop Sets how the system tracks setpoint and process variable values in moving between Auto and Manual Modes defined on the General tab Valid values are Enabled sets the Primary loop s setpoint equal to the process variable when the PID point is in Manual mode or Disabled does not equalize these values This is typically used to eliminate a value bump when transferring from Manual to Auto mode 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 7 9 2 6 Example PID Configuration The following example describes how to configure a PID point and associated
308. ly provides the step numbers for each FST You complete the other fields in the structure to build a function Note Do not skip any steps The FST program treats a blank step as the end of a program and does not compile correctly B 1 2 FST Label Field The optional Label field allows you to uniquely identify a function A label consists of up to six alphanumeric characters in any combination A common practice is to use the label to identify the action the function performs For example the label PUMPON describes a function that activates a pump Note Do not use the names of commands as labels B 4 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Labels enable branching the ability to direct the execution to a function other than the next function in the sequence Table B 4 shows an example of branching Step O instructs the program to GO to the label PMPOFF as established by Argument 1 in step 0 The program then branches to step 2 where the LABEL PMPOFF 1s located and performs that function Table B 4 FST Label Field STEP LABEL CMD ARGUMENT1 ARGUMENT 2 O GO PMPOFF Aen EC Ee EC Ma IE IN ee B 1 3 FST Command Field The FST command CMD field specifies the action a function takes Each command cell provides a drop down list that shows the function commands and provides a brief description of how they operate on the RR CF and Argument values You can also type commands directly Table B 5 shows t
309. m Ports Modem tab Field Modem Type Description Sets the modem type Valid values are None using a serial link to the host External using an external modem and Internal not available in the release The default is None Connect Time Sets in seconds the amount of time that ROCLINK 800 waits after initiating a call to receive a connect message from a device typically the modem before it terminates the call The default is 60 seconds The Connect Time varies from system to system and can take up to 60 seconds to make and complete a dial up connection If a successful connection is made the Disconnect Time begins Disconnect Time Sets in seconds the amount of time that ROCLINK 800 waits for further activity on the line before it hangs up ROCLINK 800 resets this timer after each valid receive signal Inactivity Time Sets in seconds how long ROCLINK 800 waits without receiving a signal before resetting the modem The inactivity timer looks at the valid receive counter to determine if the signal has been received Config Command Sets the string of characters required to initialize the modem For external modems refer to the manufacturer s literature For an internal modem use the default value or the modem card may not operate correctly Refer to your modem s documentation for default Config Command characters 3 12 Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Descr
310. mally by taking corrective action whenever any deviation from the desired value setpoint of the process variable rate of flow temperature voltage and such occurs An error occurs when an operator manually changes the setpoint or when an event such as a valve opening or closing or a disturbance changes the load thus causing a change in the process variable The PID controller receives signals from sensors and computes corrective action to the actuators from a computation based on the error proportional the sum of all previous errors integral and the rate of change of the error derivative 7 9 2 1 Enabling PID Loops Before you can configure a PID loop you must first enable the FloBoss to recognize them 1 Select ROC gt Information The Device Information screen displays 2 Select the Points tab The Points screen displays Device Information Maumum Active History Points PIDs E E Standard History 20 AGAS 4 1 Extended History E 2 Update vw OK A Cancel Figure 7 44 Device Information Points tab 3 Complete the PIDs Active field with the number of PIDs you want to configure 7 60 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note The read only Maximum field shows the maximum number of PIDs you can define 4 Click Apply to save the value and then OK to close the Device Information screen and return to the ROCLINK 800 menu 7 9 2 2 Configuring PID Loops
311. manual or the inline proportional or non proportional method The quantity of each component in a blend is typically greater than two to four percent of the blended product Injection of very small quantities of liquids less than four percent of the blended product is usually controlled by the additive injection process Base Multiplier Value used in AGA turbine calculations Bits Per Second associated with baud rate British Thermal Unit a measure of heat energy UO channels that are fabricated into the ROC and do not require a separate option Also called on board I O Class Division 2 hazardous area Compare Flag stores the Signal Value Discrete SVD Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor a type of microprocessor used in a ROC Digital output a bit to be cleared or set Ethernet Packet Collision Communications port on a personal computer PC Communications port on a ROC used for host communications Module that plugs into a ROC to provide a channel for communications via a specified communications protocol such as ElIA 422 RS 422 or HART Any liquid metered and controlled by the DL8000 Liquid hydrocarbons refined from crude oil and LPGs such as propane are usually referred to as products Components are base products or tank products stored at a distribution terminal The component is measured before being blended with other components Additives may be injected before upstream of or after downstream
312. mbols to display or hide various options Double click a point to display the associated parameter configuration screen You can also use the menu options and buttons to display the associated parameter configuration screen Introduction 1 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 The Status Line at the bottom of the Device Directory and Configuration Tree provides critical information The left side displays brief information about the device being connected The right side displays the device status on line or off line and system time TLP Selections In many locations in ROCLINK 800 you can click Browse a button with three dots to view the Select TLP dialog The Select TLP dialog allows you to assign specific inputs and outputs to parameters ROCLINK 800 uses Point Type T Logical Number L and Parameter P to define point locations Select TLP Point Type Logical Number Parameter Undefined Pa COM 1 Local Port 0 Point Tag ID 2 Discrete Outputs COM 2 RS485 Baud Rate 3 Analog Inputs COM 3 Comme Stop Bits 4 Analog Outputs COM 4 Comm3 Data Bits 5 Pulse Inputs Parity Mode Key On Delay 8 History Parameters 10 AGA Flow Calculation Values Clock Key Off Delay Flags 9 Modbus Host Table Start 10 RBX Extra Key On Delay System Variables 11 Alarm Pointer FST Registers 12 Receive Counter Copy Soft Point Parameters 13 Retry Counter Database Parameters 14 Valid Receive Counter Module Information 15 Mod
313. ment options Real EA Align Lefts Align Centers Align Rights a Align Tops Align Middles TH Align Bottoms Adjusts the size of the selected objects to the width of the widest object Click w to display a drop down menu that provides more specific sizing options UH e e k Hho k Size to Widest Size to Narrowest Size to Tallest at Size to Shortest View Menu 5 37 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Make Vertical Spacing Equalizes the vertical spacing between the selected objects Click W to Equal display a drop down menu that provides more specific spacing options SH Ge He Z i Vertical Spacing Equal Vertical Spacing Increase Vertical Spacing Decrease Vertical Spacing Remove Make Horizontal Equalizes the horizontal spacing between the selected objects Click w Spacing Equal to display a drop down menu that provides more specific spacing oa options AN oe S a Horizontal Spacing Equal Horizontal Spacing Increase Horizontal Spacing Decrease Horizontal Spacing Remove Other Tools Provides additional object management tools Click W to display a oo drop down menu that provides more specific spacing options AN zb e OA Set TabKey Order Import Display Objects Export Selected Objects Option Description Set Tab Key Order Allows you to specify the object to object sequence for the cursor on the custom display when you press Tab When you click this option the sy
314. message to and Clear the host when the point enters or leaves an alarm condition communications port Refer to Section 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 7 9 Control Menu Use the Control menu options to configure FST Registers and PID Loops Note The FB107 currently does not support the Radio Power Control and DS800 menu options 7 9 1 Function Sequence Table FST Registers Use the FST Registers screen to configure FST registers and add timers and other execution controls Refer to Appendix B for a detailed discussion of these screens and the FST Editor Select Configure gt Control gt FST Registers The FST Registers screen displays 7 56 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 FST Registers Tag FST HI General Advanced Status Version C Enabled Description as e Disabled Registers Register 1 U Register HE Dn Register 2 U Register H7 oo o Register 3 U Register 8 Oo Register 4 U Register 5 OO Register 5 U Register 10 oo Copy Update vw OK Cancel Figure 7 41 FST Registers The FST Registers screen has two tabs Use each tab to configure a component of the FST Use the General tab to configure and enable the FST registers Use the Advanced tab to add timers execution controls and other features to the FSTs Note After you configure a point and click Apply
315. mmuntcatons 3 3 Host Group RA 3 14 Hourly wiele TEEN 5 8 MAE EE 7 94 DT EE 4 7 I I O 250 Ohm Resistor Installed cccccceeees 7 5 Al EE 7 6 Alarms for Modules 7 6 AO DEE 7 16 le Le en DEE 8 20 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 E ele Urne E 1 3 K BUR 7 20 TA A E 7 38 DE E 7 26 BS cas he eect teeta ee 7 6 Ds a a O asl ee IMEN fs ol gt Dente E 7 3 EE Ge internace EE 7 4 RCV DO AN EE 1 14 EE HEET 1 14 Interface Points Tab 7 5 Interface Setup Tab 7 4 L Meter Inputs cccccseecsseecseeeseeeeeseeseeeenes 8 7 Module Alarms cccccccceeeececceesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 7 6 Beet DA Module Interface Alarms AAA 1 4 Ede HE die entar a econ cana cet 7 29 Ven EI 1 10 Be 8 10 MONIO merne a Moasce eee tesioexend 5 41 Launching ROCLINK cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 NIE be 1 42 LCD Controller MVS Module Alarms cceeceseeeeeeeeeees 7 45 Biel Cal 9 5 Si EE 7 33 ECOU EFES eee ee ee eee ene one ee ee 7 104 PID LOOP SE 7 66 License Se 6 11 7 5 7 44 JE ET EE 9 7 9 10 RUB Beer er een ree rere etree mer ere 7 6 ROMON E 9 14 Selecting Tvpes 7 4 7 5 Transfering ionannas oaaao 9 12 SEI le E 7 41 License Key Administrator 9 6 SPI MESSAGES swe eevee S eds 6 14 License SOU CC rears oira ah la aren 9 9 ie 1 5 Licenses I O Interface KEYS ANG rd EE 9 6 Alarms for Modules c ccceeesseeeeereeeeeen 7 4 SB EE 9 6 General TaD en a A 1 3 Limit Meter Events nnannan
316. ms tab or Disabled do not force clipping Sets how the system acts on point failure Valid values are Hold Last Value retain the last input value on point fail and Set to Fault Value write the value in the Fault Value field to the Filtered Value on point fail 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 2 3 AI AI Calibration Tab 7 2 3 Al Al Calibration Tab Use this tab to select an RTD input or analog input to calibrate Issued Jan 08 The calibration routine provides Verify Calibrate and Zero Shift functions for AI DVS and RTD inputs You can calibrate differential pressure orifice metering may be High or Low Differential Pressure depending on the device static pressure or temperature readings for each meter run 1 Select the AI Calibration tab The AI Calibration screen displays Analog Input Analog Inputs Tag RTO General Advanced Al Calibration Alarms scan Mode Manual Freeze Value 32 40138 Verity Calibrate i L OK ACancel Figure 7 9 AI AI Calibration tab 2 Select either an RTD input or analog input 3 Click Update to request one value update from the input 4 Click Freeze to stop the system from updating input values during verification or calibration Configure Menu 7 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 Click Update and then Freeze to create the freeze value the system uses in ongoing processing suc
317. munication Parameters screen to configure advanced communications features ROCLINK 800 Communication Parameters Advanced Features Number of Retries E Time Out E Secs Tx Delay 0 05 Secs Key Off Delay 0 Secs Host CRC Check e Enabled C Disabled Y OK X Cancel Figure 3 2 ROCLINK 800 Communications Advanced tab Field Description Number of Retries Sets the number of times after the initial attempt ROCLINK 800 tries to request data from the specified device before reporting a timeout error Valid values are between 0 and 25 The default is 3 Use the Time Out parameter to adjust the amount of time between retries Note This parameter does not apply to the dial up modem which only tries to establish a connection once Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 5 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Tx Delay Description Sets in seconds the amount of time ROCLINK 800 waits before transmitting data This delay enables the request to send RTS line for the amount of delay specified before transmitting data The default is 0 05 Typically this value allows a radio to fully stabilize before the system applies data for transmission For EIA 232 RS 232 and dial up modem communications set this value and the value in the Key Off Delay field to O zero or the default of 0 05 seconds For EIA 485 RS 485 and radio communications set this value to 0 1 Note These variables may chang
318. n 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tab TDO Enables the discrete output to use the Toggle TDO Toggle mode The DO continuously repeats in a cycle defined by the value in the Cycle Time field on the TDO Parameter tab where the EU Value controls the on time duration Note Selecting this option displays the TDO Parameters tab on the Discrete Output screen Use that tab to define time related parameters see Section 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tab Scanning Sets the scanning option for this point Valid values are Enabled automatically process the field input and display the last analog output scan in the Value field or Disabled permit only manual updates of the Value field Note If you enable alarming the FB107 generates a Manual Mode alarm when scanning is disabled If Scanning is set to Disabled you must manually enter a value in the Value field to override the input Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 29 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Alarming Sets the alarm option for this point Valid values are Enabled configures the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband on the Alarms tab or Disabled does not generate limit alarms Note The Point Fail alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but is not logged in the Alarms file If you enable alarming the system generates an alarm if you disable scanning Active Alarms This read only field shows any active alarms for this point When you Enable a
319. n access screens with levels 0 1 2 and 3 Refer to Security Access Levels Enables security for each comm port Valid values are Disabled Accepts all login requests This is the default User ID Enabled Accepts login requests if the user operator ID and password are valid On successful login full access is allowed access level 5 User Access Level Enabled Accepts login requests if the user operator ID and password are valid Upon successful login the user is restricted by access level Refer to Security Access Levels When you are finished click Apply and then click OK to exit the screen Issued Jan 08 Communications and Security 3 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 24 Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter A The File Menu Use the File menu options to print open close and save configuration files 3 ROCLINK 800 On Line Com FB107 SR Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilites Tools Window New ChlAN i Open Ctrl 0 Download Close Save Configuration Ctrl s Print Configuration 1 C Program Files ROCLINK800 4162 mdb 2 C Program Files ROCLINK800 DB800 mdb 3 C Program Files Displays GOST Calcs dsp 4C Program Filesi Batching Walve Setup DT 26 den 5 C Program Filesi Batching Preset Setup PT63 dsp 6 C Program Filesi Additives Additive Setup PT67 dsp Exit Figure 4 1 File Menu In This Chapter
320. n for the report which you can review later Click No to proceed with verification without generating a report ROCLINK 800 displays the Meter Calibration screen with frozen values and active buttons 8 22 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Meter Calibration Meier Meter Tag Turbine He Freeze Values Static Pressure Temperature 777 0000 77 4540 Verify Calibrate Offset ATO Bias Figure 8 13 Verification Frozen Values 5 Click Verify A Verify screen displays Verify RATE Dead Weight T ester Value Live Reading 84 827 Deviation 1 0 7105 ZS i Log Verify Figure 8 14 Verify 6 Complete the Dead Weight Tester Value field with a value against which the test equipment verifies Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Verify Dead Weight Tester Value 34 827 Live Reading 84 SER Deviation 0 0000 i Log Verify Figure 8 15 Dead Weight Tester Value When you enter a value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field ROCLINK immediately begins comparing it to the value in the Live Reading field obtained from the temperature probe and calculating the percentage deviation between the two values 7 Click Log Verify ROCLINK 800 completes the first log entry on the screen Verify Action Actual Expected Deviation Deviation Very SEKR D4 oar 0 000 0 0000 Dead Weight T ester Value 84 SE Live Reading 84 Bzr
321. n indicates the type of point and location associated with the installed hardware point ROCLINK 800 displays alarms when you enable the Yellow A Alarm The point is in alarm condition The Active Alarms fields indicate any alarms that are active for this point When Alarming is set to Enabled the active alarms appear If Alarming is set to Enabled an alarm is generated when Scanning is Disabled Even if Alarming is Disabled the Integrity Failure hardware malfunction alarm indicator can still appear Introduction 1 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module As a diagnostic tool the General tab in the window underneath the FB107 dynamic interface includes two fields Installed Module and Actual Module The Actual Module field indicates what module is physically installed in the backplane The system updates this field whenever you restart the FB107 The Installed Module field indicates the module identified in the configuration file currently residing in firmware If the contents of the Actual Module and Installed Module fields are not identical the system displays integrity alarms You then correct the integrity errors The FloBoss 107 remembers the Installed Module type until you Uninstall it The FB107 uses a plug and play system to install newly inserted modules to the backplane For example in a new FB107 with no installed modules the Actual Module field displays Empty
322. n one of the following formats PDF to create a pdf Portable Document File Excel to create an ls spreadsheet file RTF to create an rtf Rich Text Format file TXT to create a txt text file HTML to create an bm Internet browser file Click Print or select Print from the File menu to print ROCLINK 800 generated historical event and alarm log reports Use Print Setup to change the default printer for ROCLINK 800 information File Menu 4 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 4 8 Recent Files 4 9 Close 4 10 Exit To change printers 1 Select File gt Print Setup 2 Select the printer you desire to print to from the Name drop down list The File menu also displays the configuration files that you have recently opened or saved Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Windc dene Ctrl Nn Open Ctrl o Download Close Save Configuration Cl Print Configuration 1 C Program Files ROCLINK800 Test1 300 2 C Program Files ROCLINK800 FB407_ Example dsp 3 C Program Files ROCLINK800 pqas mdb 4 C Program Files ROCLINK800 ROC mdb 5 C Program Files ROCLINKS00 A17G2 300 6 C Program Files ROCLINK800 DB800 mdb Exit Figure 4 7 Recent Files Select Close from the File menu to close the active screen Note Because the FB107 s graphic display is an active screen selecting Close can terminate the online connection Select Exit under the File me
323. n option on print preview screens that enables you to graphically present the report results After you select the report data and display the preview screen click Plot ROCLINK 800 displays a graphical version of the selected data 5 12 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 File Edit View ROC Cer Meter Utilities Tools Window Help e RM Gt ge SOO0000000 4000000000 S000000000 2000000000 l 1000000000 1000000000 EFEFEF FISES SESER RSRSRS RSS oP Af ag TEE NE e T K pp g ZA AE af ci Gs ANw WER E av Daily History AAA Tech Support FBI Uploaded 04 26 2007 10 17 24 Operator LOI TE SE SE AP NP ST NEU NE NTS AT AT ADS AT AT STS TE AP ATS AT NT NT ATS AT ATS HAS eh Sash Sr gel SG aS ne hh ah roa ee LS Abb Ab a gh T E n d cb ak af ci et ar be Al d oh E Af of af ef L L A o os SH HM PE A pF pe yh Oth gs a ph Gh OO GEG OO GP OS 04 26 2007 00 00 00 i 790 0000 Meter 1 MIT Div TOTAL PI 1 Slot2 ACCUM TOTAL Meier 1 CUR SP AVG Meter 1 CUR TP AVG Figure 5 13 Plotted History The plot displays each series of lines as connected points of data based on the time the data was archived and the current value at that time The plot chart displays the type of history device type date time and the Operator ID in the header The left Y axis displays the value and the bottom X axis displays the date and time the value was read
324. n the default directory C Program Files ROCLINK 800 unless you specify another drive directory Once the calibration is complete you can view the report using View gt Calibration Report or a text editor 5 3 2 Viewing an Existing Calibration Report To view a calibration report 1 Select View gt Calibration Report An Open dialog box displays 2 Select the Calibration Report you desire to view 3 Click Open The View Calibration Report screen displays Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 View Calibration Report Report Data Fie C Program Files ROCLINKS005ROCS03 800 Station Address A162 Station Name Remote Oprtns Crtdr SS Meter Point EE SE SE Meter Description Morth Meter EE SE 7 Cancel Figure 5 8 View Calibration Report 4 Click Print Preview The Print Preview screen displays wa ROCLINK 800 Print Preview Calibration Report Seles x C File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help el De o Aa wn Se ORRR HS 2 amp pe D dh DD eem ll a w fin E PDF Excel RTF TXT HTML Se ZS Page 1 of 1 Calibration Report A1G2 Remote Oprtns Cntrir Meter ID Orifice 1 Meter Description North Meter Operator LOI Differential Pressure Calibration AIN 2 1 EU 10 08 2005 15 10 22 Verify Calibration As Found 0 000 Actual 0 000 10 08 2005 15 11 42 Set Low Reading As Found 0 000 Actual 0 000 10 08 2005 15 12 22 Calib
325. n those formats B 1 19 Altering an FST Menu The FST Editor Edit menu provides options for altering a FST B 10 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 B Select Edit gt Insert Step to place a blank line in the Workspace before the current line Use this option to add a function between two existing functions Select Edit gt Delete Step to delete the current line from the Workspace Select Edit gt Erase Workspace to erase the contents of the current Workspace permanently You can save the FST to a file before you erase the Workspace Avoid using the Windows Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C and Paste Ctrl V commands to manipulate text in the FST Editor Also be aware that the FST Editor does not insert but OVERWRITES existing fields Monitor and Trace are two additional modes of operation for the FST Editor Monitor mode allows you to continually view the present contents of the FST structure in the device as it is modified Trace mode allows you to examine execution of an FST one step at a time for debugging purposes B 1 20 Troubleshooting an FST An execution error which occurs when the FST references a Point Number that has been removed or changed will stop an FST If a compile error occurs during the compile process Build gt Compile the Output field lists the error type and the cell in question turns red Execution errors are caused by changes in the FloBoss configuration after the downl
326. n you click in the field to display the valid values Yes Allows editing This is the default No Does not allow editing Expression Allows editing based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the data entry is allowed Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values Yes Object is always visible This is the BS default No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Line Adds a line to mark borders between objects This object has the following properties BIN Line Width 1 amp H 80000008 Property Description KE Color Sets the color of t
327. ncel Figure 10 3 Options Field Description Display TLP Displays values on the Select TLP screen as either El ornumbers See Figure 10 2 Auto Scan Update Sets in seconds the time interval at which the Auto Interval Scan feature present on numerous ROCLINK 800 screens polls a FloBoss 107 10 2 Tools Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 11 The Window Menu Use the Windows menu options to configure how your screens display and to select the ROCLINK 800 screen you desire to view Window Cascade Tile 1 Device Directory w 2 On Line Comi Fe10 Figure 11 1 Window Menu In This Chapter 11 1 Cascade Select Window gt Cascade to view all open ROCLINK 800 windows in a Cascade view ga ROCLINK 800 Fle Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Dae ts Selo ae Ve A IHawlWwl zop RW a O Device Directory E Function Sequence Table 1 Workspace E Ml On Line Com1 FB107 E a On Line Corn FB107 000 Modules 2 CPU gt SENSOR Not Installed mn JS LCD Controller SLOT 0 On Board 6 Point O SLOT 1 Auxiliary 6 Point lO Module Information v4 AH Al1 Slot v4 A3 Al 2 Slotl We AO 1 AO 1 Slott He DO 2 DO 2 Slot wm Pl 1 Pl1 Slot mJ Pl 2 Pl 2 Slott HgS SLOT 2 RS 485 B SLOT 3 MVS Module gt lt SLOT 4 NotInstalled gt SLOT 5 Not Installed gt SLOT 6 Not Installed 12 49PM 5 Figure 11 2 Cascade Bu
328. nding analog signal High Reading EU Sets the engineering unit EU for the high reading to 100 percent output or high end of the EU range Based on the EU range determined in part by this parameter the EU value is converted to a corresponding analog signal EU Value Current value displayed in Engineering Units Units Sets the engineering units for the discrete output such as percentage IN H20 PSIG MCF degrees F milliamps volts etc 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 5 4 DO Alarms Tab 7 5 4 DO Alarms Tab Select Configure gt I O gt DO Points gt Alarms tab to configure the alarm parameters for this DO point 1 Select the Alarms tab The Alarms screen displays Discrete Output Discrete Outputs i DO 2 slot Tag Do e slot RBs Alarming e Disabled i On Alarm Set C OnAlarm Clear On Alarm Setand Clear ZlUpdate OK X Cancel Figure 7 25 DO Alarms tab 7 32 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description RBX Alarming Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX OT SBS a Arming Or WIS PONE Vall Vates are Disabled Turns off RBX alarming This is the default On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to the host when the point enters an alarm condition On Alarm Clear Generates an RBX message to the host when the point leaves an a
329. nformation that differentiates each individual FB107 The Device Information screen has four tabs 6 4 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 6 8 1 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General tab which provides basic information about the FB107 Points tab which allows you to change point related information Other Information which displays customer information Revision Info which displays firmware and boot information Device Information General Tab The General tab has basic information about the FloBoss 1 Select ROC gt Information The Device Information screen displays showing the General tab Device Information Station Name FB1 07 Address 1 Group 2 Device Type 107 Units ContractHour 0 Force End of Day us C Metric FST Execution 20 Instructions Per Cycle Update Y ok X Cancel Figure 6 5 Device Information General tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Station Name Device Type Address Group Contract Hour Description Sets the station name logged into EFM reports This read only field shows the currently attached device Sets a unique address for this FB107 that differentiates it from all other FB107s ina communication group Valid values are 1 to 255 Note To avoid communications problems do not use 240 Sets a number that identifies a group of FB107s for communication purposes All FB107s defined as
330. ng ROCLINK 800 Software User Interface Basics Configuration Basics See Also Figure 12 2 ROCLINK 800 Software Help 12 1 Issued Jan 08 Help Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 12 2 About ROCLINK 800 Select Help gt About ROCLINK 800 to display the About ROCLINK 800 dialog box About ROCLINK 800 cke ROCLINE 800 Version 1 74 Part Number WT 30 License WIMIAL emertonprocess com remate Copyright FISHER CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL LLE ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CONFIDENTIAL This program is the property of FISHER CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL LLC Its configuration and algorithm are confidential and may not be used reproduced or revealed to others escept in accord with contract or other written consent of FISHER CONTROLS INTERNATIONAL LLE Any permitted reproduction in whole or in part must bear this legend Supporting Files Version Information ROC MDOB 1 74 DES00 MDE 1 74 PG asF ilter OL 1 5 0 0 Haas MIDD 1 5 0 0 FlowlalFilter OL 1 5 0 2 low al MDB 1 5 0 2 EfmE sport UL A 2 0 0 1 EfmE sport MOE 2 0 0 1 Build Date Thursday September 13 2007 Figure 12 3 About ROCLINK 800 The dialog box displays a variety of information including the version number license agreement creation software build date and version information for supporting files Click OK to close the dialog box Note Figure 12 3 represents the current version as of the publication date of this manual Newer versions ma
331. ng types of historical databases Minimum Maximum Min Max Database Minute Database Extended Hourly Database Daily Database The Min Max Database is for viewing only and cannot be saved to a disk file You can collect history values from the FB107 using ROCLINK 800 or other third party host systems Select View gt History selection to directly view history from the device or from a previously saved disk file Several options are available for the type of history values archived listed under the Archive Type heading Linear averaging is available for all parameters Meter run parameters may be averaged using one of the four averaging techniques recommended in API Chapter 21 Section I flow dependent linear flow dependent formulaic flow weighted linear and flow weighted formulaic You can accumulate integrate parameters that represent a rate engineering units time period to give total values when you specify a time period for the rate You can totalize parameters that represent an accumulated total by taking the difference between the value at the end of the current logging period and the value at the end of the previous logging period Finally you can log the current value of any parameter at the end of each logging period Table 7 3 details various kinds of archive types on the Standard History screen These archive types specify how the system calculates logged data Table 7 3 Archive Types Descr
332. nnannnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnna 8 11 Kleed EE 1 4 LIStUNUMDEN ceia 7 105 PONG E 1 5 SOCAN OM EE 3 16 SCICCIING E 7 4 Log Methane Adiust 8 14 SOUP VAD eset eee lene teh eres 7 4 Logical Wiele 1 16 VO MOGUIG EE 1 2 Logical POME EE 7 99 ene 6 11 Eet 1 5 ewe 1 5 Logs D E A E 6 7 EVON CLOG E 5 15 Je Sab e EE 3 11 TE Le WEE 5 8 IO 8 5 Viewing from a Device rreren 5 9 inactivity TINE senenn 3 12 Viewing from aile 5 11 KAEN EE 7 89 7 93 Re 2 4 3 7 3 16 Information LoloAlam 7 15 7 40 ROC eue E 6 4 Loop Output Voltage eee 6 11 pU GE 1 24 OOD FP CHOC KEE EE 7 68 Lare E 2 er acer cris PE EE ETEEN LES Loop Selected cccccccecececneceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 65 PG TOR EE EEN 8 7 LOW Alarm 7 14 7 40 7 55 8 18 IG e EE B 11 BeigplSAl Tei DIE 8 9 JE el EE 1 2 Low DP Setpoint iesiccvsn sets eosutecboertateainaxnden sorta 8 9 Installed Module 3 8 6 9 7 3 7 43 Low Flow Cutoff cc ccccccseececeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeees 8 8 PAA a 1 10 Low Reading EU 7 9 7 17 7 32 Installing a Girmng basedlLicense 9 10 Bel 7 88 Installing a USB Uicense ce eeeceeeeeeeeee eens 9 7 Ice ge EE 1 41 M Integer Gcale cc ecccecccccsececeeseeseseeseeeeeseaees 7 88 Integral Dead band L 7 68 7 69 Managing Objects a E EE 5 36 Integral HEET 7 65 Manual EU Ee 9 26 Integral Multiplier Period ME 8 5 Manually Creating a Desktop Shortcut 1 3 Integral Genen 4 5 Mass ap tale nip ices EEN 8 5 Integrity GEN 1 9 3 9 6 10 7 4 7 6 7 43 7 45
333. nning option for this point Valid values are Enabled automatically process the field input and display the last analog input scan in the Value field or Disabled permit only manual updates of the Value field Note If you enable alarming the FB107 generates a Manual Mode alarm when scanning is disabled If Scanning is set to Disabled you must manually enter a value in the Value field to override the input Alarming Sets the alarm option for this point Valid values are Enabled configures the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband on the Alarms tab or Disabled does not generate limit alarms Note The Point Fail alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but is not logged in the Alarms file If you Enable alarming the system generates an alarm if you disable scanning Active Alarms This read only field shows any active alarms for this point When you Enable alarming the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if you Disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 4 2 DI Advanced Tab 7 4 2 DI Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as filtering input inversion and counter values for the discrete input 1 Select the Advanced
334. ns 5 is highest most inclusive access level and allows access to all screens Note Each access level permits access to screens at that level and any inherited from lower access levels For example an operator ID with access level 3 can access screens with levels 0 1 2 and 3 Refer to Table 3 2 for a listing of menu options and their security levels 5 Click Save if you have changed the contents of this screen 6 Click Close to display the FB107 graphic Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 25 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 9 6 Analog Input Calibration Values Use this option to review all the calibration values for a specific analog input point 1 Select Utilities gt AI Calibration Values The AI Calibration Values screen displays Al Calibration Values Point af gfud El Raw Value 1 ES EU Value 1 OO Raw Value 2 ag OO EU Value 2 e25 Raw Value 3 158240 EU Value 3 i250 0 Raw Value 4 Du EU Value 4 pp o Raw Value D 30136 EU Value 5 250 0 Press Effect 0 069 Timer EC Set EU Value 0 069 Kode D Manual EU 0 5428765 Type jo Update vw OK AS Cancel Figure 9 28 AI Calibration Values 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description ee oe Raw Value 1 5 These read only fields show the calibrated raw A D input where Value 1 is the lowest calibrated input and Value 5 is the highest calibrated input Press Effect This read only field show
335. nsor 4 Click Verify ROCLINK 800 displays a verification screen Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 HES Paint MY Sensor Dt Pressure Dead weight T ester Value Live Reading Deviation ES 1905 947 922 3685 z Log Verify Figure 7 37 Verify Calibration 5 Complete the Dead Weight Tester Value field using a pre determined calibration value Review the other fields on this screen Field Point Action Dead Weight Tester Value Live Reading Deviation Log Verify Issued Jan 08 Description Identifies the point differential pressure static pressure or temperature being verified Shows the activity here Verify being performed as well as various values Actual Shows the current value from the EE Expected Shows the expected value as entered in the Dead Weight Tester e KE Deviation Shows the difference between the expected value and the actual value Deviation Expected Actual Shows the deviation as a percentage of range Sets the expected value against which the system tests Note This is the Expected value in the Action field This read only field shows the current reading from the sensor This read only field shows the deviation between the expected and actual values Y Deviation Deviation Span EU Zero EU x 100 Use this value to determine the need for calibration or adjustment Click to write displayed data to
336. nt Preview Configuration A1G2 FB107 SEE File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Deel st Be SAE Ve WHaw KMHI SZ ODF AAT TNS DB 0 A Om AOR S BE EE 4 6 Print Page 1 of 122 Configuration A1G2 F B107 Uploaded 04 25 2007 10 03 25 Operator LOI Point Type Configurable Opcode Point Number 1 Sequence Revision Data 2 Data 4 Data 6 Data 3 Data 10 Data 12 Data 14 Data 16 Data 18 Data 20 Data 22 Data 24 Data 26 Data 28 Data 30 Data 32 Data 34 Data 36 Data 38 Data 40 Data 42 Data 44 0 0 Data 1 Undefined Unde fined Data 3 Unde fined Unde fined Data 5 Unde fined Unde fined Data 7 Undefined Unde fined Data 9 Undefined Unde fined Data 11 Unde fined Undefined Data 13 Undefined Unde fined Data 15 Undefined Unde fined Data 17 Unde fined Unde fined Data 19 Unde fined Unde fined Data 21 Undefined Unde fined Data 23 Undefined Unde fined Data 25 Unde fined Unde fined Data 27 Unde fined Unde fined Data 29 Undefined Unde fined Data 31 Undefined Unde fined Data 33 Undefined Undefined Data 35 Undefined Undefined Data 37 Unde fined Unde fined Data 39 Unde fined Unde fined Data 41 Undefined Undefined Data 43 Unde fined Unde fined ne gt 4 7 Print Setup Issued Jan 08 DRE 1007 AN Figure 4 6 Print Preview 4 Use screen option buttons located on the toolbar to either directly print the preview or export it with a file name you specify to your PC s hard drive i
337. nt items and you can edit those properties at any time Move and re shape objects within the display as necessary To modify an object s placement or shape O O Click and drag on the control squares to change the size of the object Press Shift arrow keys to change an object s size Press Shift Alt arrow keys for smaller changes Press Ctrl arrow keys to move an object to the desired position Press Ctrl Alt arrow keys for smaller moves Select the Align Lefts icon to align all selected objects to the furthest left point in the group Select the Size to Widest icon to change the width of all selected objects to the width of the widest element Select the Make Vertical Spacing Equal icon to evenly adjust the vertical spacing between all the selected objects Select the Make Horizontal Spacing Equal icon to evenly adjust the horizontal spacing between all the selected objects Remove objects by selecting the object and pressing Delete 4 Click the Test icon to verify that the completed custom display works correctly 5 Click the Save Display to File icon to save the completed and tested custom display ROCLINK 800 displays use the suffix DSP as in TestScreen dsp View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 6 2 Adding Custom Display Objects The right hand side of the Display Editor toolbar includes a number of buttons for custom objects see Figure 5 21 Za ROCLINK 800 Display Edit
338. nt no longer outweighs the flow loop s attempts to maintain its setpoint Through the use of an FST you may implement a switchover algorithm When the input exceeds a predetermined switchover value the FST can switch the mode to Override only When the FST determines that the input value is no longer in a critical range the PID mode can be switched back to Primary only 7 9 2 3 PID Loop General Tab The PID Loop screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to configure general PID loop parameters Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 PID Loop 1 Gas Flow General Scanning C Enabled e Disabled Setpoint 0 0 0 0 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Tag Gas Flow Inputs Outputs Advanced Mode Output Type Control Type Manual e Auto C Friman Only Override Control Override Only e Analog C Discrete Override Type Select C High Primary Override Process Variable 0 0 e Low Output Change Big Output Big Tuning Gain 05 Reset 40 Loop Selected Disabled Override Gm Primary Rate 0 0 0 0 Scale Factor 1 0 1 0 Copy Auto Scar Update OK A Cancel Figure 7 46 PID Loop General tab 1 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field PID Tag Scanning Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu Description Selects the PID point to configure Click w to display all available PIDs Note The selection in this field applies t
339. nu to exit the ROCLINK 800 program Depending on your situation the following occurs If you are currently editing a configuration file ROCLINK 800 closes the file If you are currently connected to a dial up FloBoss ROCLINK 800 issues a hang up command to the modem If you are currently online with a FloBoss ROCLINK 800 automatically terminates the connection File Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 5 The View Menu Issued Jan 08 Use the View menu options to view the Device Directory electronic flow management EFM reports calibration logs history alarms and events logs create and manage custom displays and view the I O monitor 1K 300 On Line Com FE dit METE ROC Configure Meter Directory Ze EFM Report tal Mi Calibration Report aia History d Cd Alarms Mi Events d 1S Display HU 1 0 Monitor Ll i ee Figure 5 1 View Menu Options In This Chapter 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 Ree ie GE 5 2 BE IV ROO E AEE EE 5 2 5 41 Creating Mne EFM Pile sssaaa i a 5 2 5 2 2 Viewing EFM HReporte Aen 5 3 leie lei REDONS EE 5 6 5 3 1 Creating a Calibration Henort 5 6 5 3 2 Viewing an Existing Calibration Hepnort 5 7 History Alarm and Event Log Reports cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 5 4 1 Viewing History Logs from a Device cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 9 5 4 2 Viewing History Logs from aile 5 11 5 4 3 P
340. number of periodic entries in the segment determines the number of time stamps that can be written The value takes the format DD HH MM SS The FST determines which index in the periodic archive to write to independently of the current index for the segment Once you have determined what archive type to use set the archive point by clicking the TLP button that displays at the right hand side of each Archive Point field This displays a Select TLP dialog box you use to configure the associated TLP 7 10 3 History Setup Extended History Tab Use the Extended History tab to define up to 30 additional values for the FB107 to record Select the Extended History tab The Extended History screen displays History Setup Standard History Extended History Setup Point Archive Type Archive Point 1 Totalize FLYVNEW 1 MINTDY Flow Weighted Formula AGANEW 1 CUR DP Flow Weighted Formula AGANEW 1 CUR SP Flow Weighted Formula AGANEW 1 CUR TP Flow Weighted Formula FLWNEVW 1 IMV BM Flow Weighted Formula FLWNEW 1 HWET Accumulate Day FLYNEW 1 FLOWDY Accumulate Day FLYNEW 1 ENGDAY 2 3 4 5 G H 8 g Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined z Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 53 History Setup Extended History ta
341. o each tab on this screen Sets the ten character identifier for the PID Note The selection in this field applies to each tab on this screen Sets controls for scanning the on and off status of the PID loop Valid values are Enabled output is calculated and updates sent to the output point or Disabled no new output is calculated and no update is sent to the output point Note Enable scanning only after you have defined the process variable and output values of a Primary Only loop or the process variable override and output values for a dual control loop 7 63 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Mode Description Sets the mode for the PID loop Valid values are Manual no loops are active and the system writes the PID output parameter to the assigned control output allowing you to adjust the output as required or Auto PID loops are active as configured under Control Type you enter the setpoint of the loops and the system automatically sends any change in the calculated output to the configured output point Output Type Sets the output type for the PID loop Valid values are Analog the system writes the PID output to the assigned analog output point EU value or Discrete the system writes the PID output to the assigned DO Open Point EU value if the change in output is positive or writes to the assigned DO Close Point EU value if the change in output is negative Any discrete outputs must be configu
342. o print the report contents see Section 4 5 1 Print Configuration or Save to save the preview to a file for off line viewing select View gt Events gt From File View Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 5 Display Administrator Use the Display Administrator screen to manage custom displays stored in the FB107 The FB107 can store a maximum of 40 displays which includes both custom user displays that your organization may create and user program displays that accompany User C programs To view the display files stores in the FB107 1 Select View gt Display gt From Device gt Administrator The Display Administrator screen displays showing all displays currently loaded in the FB107 Display Administrator User Displays Installed in Device 4 4 GC Interface Display 6 AF2540 Display 7 D g 10 Gas Chromatograph Display 11 Download User Display File Browse Flash File System Bytes Used Bytes Free Download Display Size Estimated Bytes Remaining 19 568 111 204 Close Figure 5 16 Display Administrator 2 Select an empty slot View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Display Administrator User Displays Installed in Device GC Interface Display 1 2 z 3 4 R z 6 APIZ540 Display T 2 H z g 10 Gas Chromatograph Display Download User Display File Ke Bees Browse Flash File System Bytes Used Bytes Free
343. oBoss Actual Module This read only field shows the module is physically installed in the backplane This field is updated whenever the FloBoss 107 is restarted Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module Revision This read only field shows the firmware revision for the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Build Date This read only field shows date the firmware was built for the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Boot Revision This read only field shows Displays the revision of the main startup firmware currently installed in the FloBoss or hardware Boot Build Date This read only field shows the date the main startup firmware currently installed in the FloBoss or Integrity This read only field shows the status of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Alarms display on the user interface indicating the state of the hardware including the CPU I O modules CPU I O assembly MVS modules communication modules and smart application modules You can mouse over an alarm icon to display the definition Uninstall Click to remove the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 This field displays the type of module the FloBoss 107 uses for point configuration and does not require that a module be physically installed to display The FloBoss 107 remembers the Installed Module type until you Uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module 7 1 2 I
344. oad of an FST This may include removal of I O or other logical points the FST uses In Monitor mode the Run Flag Status RF indicates execution errors RF Meaning 0 Indicates the FST is not running ooh Indicates the FST is running Indicates the FST has shut down due to an invalid point reference usually an out of place or unexpected I O Co oo Indicates the FST Editor has initiated Trace mode When an FST fails as indicated by an RF value of 5 you can view at which Instruction Pointer IP the FST failed B 2 FST Monitor Mode Issued Jan 08 When on line use the FST Monitor menu to select which FST to monitor turn Trace mode on and off close the FST pause or resume an FST monitor registers timers miscellaneous registers messages or to compare flag options FST Editor B 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 B 12 To start Monitor mode to display the selected FST select the desired FST from the Monitor menu while on line with the FloBoss or click the Monitor button from within the open workspace to monitor that FST You can edit FST fields located on the right side of the Monitor screen by highlighting the field typing the value and pressing Enter The new value is written to the FST and read back on the next update The Help Status Line at the top of the Monitor indicates the status of the Monitor and Trace Modes The Parameter and Data fields include Field CF Timer 1 through Timer 4 D
345. oaded 04 25 2007 13 30 46 Operator LO EFM Report Information Report Data File C Program Files ROCLINKS00 A1G2 e m Report Period 11 05 2007 to 11 05 2007 Run Selected Meter Description Report Date System Parameters Meter 1 Description 11 05 2007 14 3210 1 FB107 W68182 Ver 1 00 Dec 20 2006 7 22 4 Meter Tag Contract Hour Device Group Active Meter Runs Manufacturing ID ROM Serial Number MPU Loading 107 Figure 5 6 Sample EFM Report 5 3 Calibration Reports Create a calibration report to record the calibration procedure 5 3 1 Creating a Calibration Report To create a calibration report 1 Select Meter gt Calibration The Meter Calibration screen displays 5 6 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Meter Calibration Meter Meter Tag Meter HI Freeze Freeze Yalues Diff Pressure Low DP Static Pressure Temperature EH ld ep Ian Top Ian Cabes G ss pes Ges Zaos zeg is Ins Auto Scan 2 Update wi Done Figure 5 7 Meter Calibration 2 Click Freeze to stop the system from updating the values of the analog MVS and temperature RTD inputs during verification or calibration 3 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog to create a calibration report 4 Enter the file name of the calibration report and use the default extension of 800 or cal to represent calibration 5 Click Save The system creates the calibration report file i
346. oday nun 1134864 46415 ae ee aam ua Yesterday 3423578 3676635 Haag Eegen 0 0438923 Lo Mant 7638782 78461 35 32110 12 SEN 6000483 Inches PrevMonth 183980 1889754 7716 7 BEE bam Inches Accumulated 34785 82 97359 45 39826 82 Beta 05957859 Auto Scan Update ACancel Figure 8 30 Meter Run Values Example 2 Click V in the Run field to select a defined orifice or turbine meter 8 34 Meter Menu Issued Jan 08 8 4 Plate Change Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Review the screen s contents You can click Update to refresh the display on demand or Auto Scan to start updating the display once per second 4 Click Cancel to return to the FB107 graphic Use the Plate Change option to change the size of an orifice plate under flowing or non flowing conditions 1 Select Meter gt Plate Change The Plate Change screen displays Plate Change Meter Number 2 Meter 2 e Meter Type a E Will Plate Change Be Under Flowing Conditions a T E Differential Press 3 21 Dit Static Dress i 9482 46 Temperature 78 0541 4 Fipe Diameter 8 071 Inches Orifice Diameter SEU Inches Y OK X Cancel Figure 8 31 Plate Change 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Meter Number Meter Type Description Sets the meter number to be changed Click w to display all defined meters Will Plate Change Indicates the conditions dur
347. on I O Points Tab 6 9 3 CPU Information UO Points Tab Use the I O Points to configure the CPU s system analog inputs 1 Select the I O Points tab The CPU Module I O Points screen displays ROC Menu 6 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General POINT TAG CONFIGURATION INTEGRITY ACTIVE ALARMS SYS Al Logic Dr Al Batter SYS Al 3 Charge In SYS Al 4 System m Dr Alb Brd Temp Auto Scan Update Figure 6 11 CPU Information I O tab 2 Review the following fields Field Description Point Type This read only field shows the database points associated with the installed hardware and CPU The built in inputs and outputs I O on the CPU consist of a resistance thermal detector RTD input interface and five diagnostic analog inputs Al that monitor the Logical voltage Battery voltage from the backplane voltage input connector Charge in voltage originating from the CPU power input System milliamps originating from the power input from the CPU Use to determine current draw for battery sizing Battery temperature originating at the CPU Tag Displays the tag associated with each point type Configuration Click to display an analog input screen you use to configure the point associated with the hardware 3 For information on integrity or active alarms refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface 4 Proceed to Section 6 9 4 CPU Information Meter Points Tab 6
348. onnect to KEY Move to KEY Licenses on KEY Time Created pplication Name Yendor ID Yendor Name App Code Version 1 01 22 2007 11 40 25 AM Props Example Sample Vendor D No Expiration 2 01 22 2007 11 40 30 AM Flow Example Sample Yendor DU No Expiration 3 01 22 2007 11 40 35 AM IAPWS 1997 Sample Yendor Du No Expiration 4 01 22 2007 11 40 42 AM Cond Orifice Sample Yendor H No Expiration License Key Event Log Vendor ID Application Name Previous Quantity New Quantity 05 30 2007 16 14 49 lAPW S 1997 05 24 2007 11 42 49 Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 42 06 Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 41 14 Props Example 05 24 2007 11 40 56 Props Example 05 24 2007 11 40 26 Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 40 05 Cond Orifice 05 04 2007 14 54 52 Cond Orifice COPS Oo i f j a Figure 9 17 License Removal Completed Note Although you have removed this license from the FB107 the file you used to install the license still resides on your PC You have deleted only the installed license iteration not the original license 9 3 Converting EFM Report Files Use the Convert EFM File option to convert EFM Report files EFM database file to the Flow Cal or AGA DET report file format 1 Select Utilities gt Convert EFM File The Convert EFM File screen displays 9 16 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Convert EFM File Device a Convert To DAC FlowCal C ADA4ADEI Eeer SC File to Convert Select Palda E C
349. ons in the Integrity field Integrity notifications indicate hardware problems related to the CPU module I O modules Auxiliary 6 Point IO the CPU module s optional I O assembly On Board 6 Point IO MVS modules communication modules and smart application modules Other integrity notifications can include Red TT Integrity The point is out of the user defined or default range For example when an AI is open the actual AD count is O but the default range 1s 643 to 3220 or loss of communications occurred Communication Failure The FB107 sets a diagnostic error indicating Communication Failure if the Actual Module field is empty and the Installed Module field displays a value or if communications is lost between the FloBoss and the module Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module Module Mismatch Displays if you install a different module type than the one currently displayed in the Installed Module field which draws from information residing in the CPU configuration Out of Range Indicates that the point is not within the user defined configured parameters Integrity Failure Displays when the FB107 cannot read or communicate with the associated hardware The hardware reports a malfunction Alarm notifications indicate problems related to field or other user defined values The FB107 dynamic interface displays an A in a yellow box to indicate an alarm condition see Figure 1 2 The alarm conditio
350. onverted File s Log alll a Converted File Hame Pretix Use Station Address amp Group Use EFM File Collection Date amp Time 5 Ger Meter Runts to Conver Period Start Date End Date H 08 2007 g 12 2007 ll Cancel Figure 9 18 Convert EFM File 2 Select the appropriate device type ROC306 312 364 FB103 104 107 407 503 3504 in the Device Type frame 3 Select a conversion option in the Convert To field Note The AGA DET option contains standard history points for the meter run The Flow Cal option requires that you indicate the meters involved and provide a start and stop date for the involved files 4 Click in the Select Efm File s to Convert field The Select EFM Files to Convert screen displays Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 FE Select EFM Files to Convert Path C Prograrm Files ROCLINE SOD E c Mjollnir kd vw 41G2 efm EJEA Cd Program Files ROCLINKS00 C Displays _ FB10 Licenses Select All Deselect All Y OK 7 Cancel Figure 9 19 Select EFM Files to Convert 5 Use this screen to locate and select the EFM files stored on your PC Note By default ROCLINK 800 selects all the displayed files Click Deselect All to individually select specific files Click OK The system internally validates each file type If any of the files are invalid an error message displays If this occurs click OK The system automatic
351. or File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help D gH DO H AN ww WW a A Se lei BI E Tr groer 2 8 Uf Aw e ER Oo Be Figure 5 21 Custom Display Objects Tab Control Adds an eight tab image which you can size appropriately and edit to fewer tabs You can then drag and drop objects onto each tab This object has the following properties Allow Data Entry Yes Tab Order J0 Property Description Tabs Sets the number of tabs up to 8 on the screen Click w which displays when you click in the field to specify the number of tabs Caption 1 through 8 Sets a label or caption for each tab The size of the tab increases to accommodate the text Allow Data Entry Sets whether the user can edit the object Click e which displays when you click in the field to display the valid values Yes Allows editing This is the default No Does not allow editing Expression Editing is permitted based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the data entry is allowed Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click w which displays when you click in the field to display the valid values Yes Object is always visible This is the default TE Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 23 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB1
352. ore an alarm generates If the change is equal to or greater than this value an alarm occurs Note To disable the rate alarm without disabling the other alarms you can set the rate alarm value greater than the scan of the analog input Sets in engineering units an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limits and below the High Alarm limits The Alarm Deadband prevents the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX or RBX alarming for this point Valid values are Disabled Turns off RBX alarming This is the default On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to the host when the point enters an alarm condition On Alarm Clear Generates an RBX message to the host when the point leaves an alarm condition On Alarm Set Generates an RBX message to and Clear the host when the point enters or _ Note RBX Alarming requires you to configure the 8 communications port Refer to Section 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start Configure Menu 7 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 3 Analog
353. ore it is recognized as such Enter the Filter value as a valid between 0 to 255 The discrete input returns to the Off state immediately upon detection of the On to Off transition there is no filtering for this transition Counts the number of times the discrete input goes from Off to On The accumulator is a 32 bit number with a maximum count of 4 294 967 295 You can preset the accumulator by entering the desired value or clear the accumulator by entering 0 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description On Counter Counts the number of 50 millisecond periods when the Status parameter is in the On state The On Counter is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value You can preset the On Counter by entering the desired value or clear the counter by entering 0 Note The On Counter does not function if you disable scanning Off Counter Conts the number of 50 millisecond periods when the Status parameter is in the Off state The Off Counter is a 32 bit number that automatically rolls over when it reaches its maximum value You can preset the Off Counter by entering the desired value or clear the counter by entering 0 Note The Off Counter does not function if you disable scanning 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 4 3 DI Alarms Tab 7 4 3 DI Alarms Tab Use the Alarms tab to configure the alarm parameters
354. ot used by the standard history Additionally you can configure within boundaries the number of entries logs available to Standard and Extended History You can select the number of history points to archive the number of points the number of days to archive and whether history data logs at the beginning of the period or the end of the period Note When you make changes on the Setup tab ROCLINK 800 automatically performs a Cold Start amp Clear History when you click Apply The system displays a dialog box to remind you of this To avoid losing data save any changes you make on the Setup 1 Select the Setup tab on the History Setup screen The Setup screen displays Number Sample Number Number of Points Interval ofEnties of Days Standard History 30 Extended History 5 10 Mirutes 10080 70 00 Daily History Size History Time Stamp f 35 Days f At Beginnig of Period f DU Days f At End of Period Note Number of Standard History Points 0 100 Number of Extended History Points 0 25 IO Update vw OK A Cancel Figure 7 50 History Setup Setup tab Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Note When you configure the number of Standard and Extended history points specify enough points to meet both your immediate need and any foreseeable changes Changing the number of points later requires y
355. ou can create an FST either by entering the steps in a blank workspace or by editing an existing file from a device or from a disk file To create an FST while on line with an FB107 1 Start the ROCLINK 800 software and connect to the device 2 Select Utilities gt FST Editor 3 Select the tab of the FST FST 1 through FST 6 depending on the device 4 Fill in each step with the appropriate labels commands tags and arguments When you select the Command field the Lol button appears Click this button to display a list of commands from which to choose Alternately you can type the three character command in the Command field Depending upon which command you choose the argument fields prompt you to type in a label choose a TLP or enter some other data The Label field is optional but are may be required if you are using a label within a command Enter all required labels to prevent a compile error Place an End command at the end of your FST FST Editor B 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 B 1 8 Creating an FST from an Existing File Use the following steps to create an FST by editing an existing FST You may use either a FST from the device or a FST file on your PC If you are using a file from the device connect the FB107 to the computer running ROCLINK 800 software 1 Select Utilities gt FST Editor 2 Select File gt Read gt From File or File gt Read gt From Device 3 Open an existing
356. ou to run Cold Start amp Clear History If you must change the number of points make a back up of the history log before you make any changes Field Description Standard History Sets the number of Standard History points the Number of Points system uses You can define up to 100 points the default is 30 Although the first eight Standard History Points are pre configured you can change them The Standard History database logs entries for each point at three intervals minute hour day Additionally at contract hour every day the database logs a min max entry The min max values are from today and yesterday the minute values are from the last 60 minutes the hourly values are from the last 35 hours and the daily values are from the last 35 or 60 days Extended History Sets the number of Extended History points the Number of Points system uses You can define up to 25 points the default is 5 Extended History archiving provides a monitoring resolution that is similar to a chart recorder The default interval for Extended History is 10 minutes Note If you are replacing a chart recorder select a 10 minute interval for 4 points The Extended History database creates one entry for each point at the user specified interval Use the Sample Interval field to determine how frequently samples occur to a maximum of 25 points of user selectable minute or second values from the last 35 or 60 days The system can maintain a maxim
357. output for the amount of time defined in the Time On field At the end of that time ROCLINK 800 resets this value to Off Sets in seconds the amount of time for momentary operation The default value is 1 second Note In Momentary mode this is the amount of time in seconds that the momentary contact is energized In the Toggle mode this is the time in seconds between switching On or Off In the TDO and TDO Toggle modes the TDO configuration calculates this value Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description DOUT Type Selects the function of this discrete output Valid values are Latched Changes on an active transition of the output from off to on the discrete output status to On and leaves the output in that state until cleared by selecting the Off in the Status field Time Enables the discrete output to have a Duration time duration Note Selecting this option displays the TDO Parameters tab on the Discrete Output screen Use that tab to define time related parameters see Section 7 5 3 DO TDO Parameters Tab Toggle Enables the discrete output to enter the Toggle mode Toggle mode enables a square wave output for which both the Time On and Time Off are defined by the value in the Time On field Time On and Time Off are equal Note Selecting this option displays the TDO Parameters tab on the Discrete Output screen Use that tab to define time related parameters see Sectio
358. peed ken 6 11 CN OSC EE 4 10 Closing FS eects aa aes ae mice tide ne ae B 10 B AEEA IEE A S AAE E EE E A B 5 Code Pointed Duve 7 59 Code SiZ EE 7 59 Colect DIa EE 5 2 6 2 COM Modules Update Firmware 9 5 RE KEE 3 7 OF as atta teeta cee ea een de 3 7 EH dn 3 7 OMAN WOU TEE 7 85 SOMA ON eege 3 9 Comm Ports beet 3 6 3 9 FOB OSS siesta ta harh tere een ae ie 3 10 General Taani aaae iA 3 10 WIGS aonn aa E neta eee 1 84 iere E 3 4 Modem TaD nisar e 3 12 WIOCLE INS sionasdoei a ea a a a 3 12 Module S oren vend paata ts tensed 1 10 SE 2 1 SU e EE 3 3 RBX AD EE 3 13 ROCLINK 800 Communications 3 2 Rn GE 3 4 Troublesbootmg 3 18 BE el Be LEE 7 99 Command Structure CMD B 5 COMMUNICATIONS E 3 1 Alarms for Module 3 9 Communications Montor 9 29 Debug Communications 000nn0nenaaaneaaen 9 29 Device Directory uk 2 1 SUE 1 9 1 10 Module E EE 3 9 WIG GUIS EE 1 10 3 7 eebe 2 1 ROCLINK SOO ries chsh tdtei niente atisttaiives 3 2 Troublesbootmg 3 18 9 29 Compare Flag WEE 7 59 Compile Compiling Build and Viewing an FST B 8 Computer Requirement cccsecceeeeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Config Commande 3 12 Configuration CHECKS EE 4 2 Biere e EE 4 6 Duplicating ee 4 2 FB107 Comm POMS E 3 9 PANG TYG RE 4 4 FST le EE 9 29 B 1 Issued Jan 08 FST Reosters 7 56 History en LEE 1 71 He EE 7 3 M d DUS oaaae sede A 7 82 KI 4 2 Opening H TE 4 6 PAN EE 4 7 ROCLINK 800 Communicatons
359. plays definitions and explanations at the bottom of the screen 5 When your expression is complete click Evaluate ROCLINK 800 checks your expression for errors Correct any errors 6 Click OK when your expression is complete The Display Editor screen displays Note At this point it is strongly recommended that you save the custom display to save the expression 5 40 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 6 5 Editing a Custom Display from a File 5 7 UO Monitor Issued Jan 08 Once you have created a custom display you save the display as a DSP file you can later edit Click Save Display to File on the Display Editor toolbar and indicate the name and location for the saved display To edit a saved display select View gt Display gt From File An Open screen displays Select the DSP file and click Open ROCLINK 800 opens that display If Edit is not included in the buttons displayed at the bottom of the ROCLINK 800 screen you need to change the attributes of the DSP file Using Window s Explorer access the directory that houses your DSP files typically C Program Files ROCLINK800O Displays if you accepted defaults during system installation If you store your DSP files in another location access that directory Locate the DSP file and left click the file to display a pop up menu Select Properties A window similar to this one should appear AutoAdj TurboMeter 3 dsp Properties Kl E
360. plays the FloBoss FST capabilities Table B 1 Device specific FST Functionality Maximum Number Maximum Byte Size per of FSTs FST 4 3000 400 Maximum Line Length Maximum number of steps Each FST may consist of as many functions as can fit into the memory reserved for the FSTs Reserved memory is pre determined by the FloBoss with a set amount of steps allocated for each FST The byte size of an FST displays in the Code Size field on the Advanced tab of the FST Registers screen Configure gt Control gt FST Registers Because of the potential loading increase on the system we recommend that you monitor the Master Processor Unit MPU loading displayed on the Other Information tab on the Device Information screen ROC gt Information to ensure that the FST is not consuming too much of the MPU s resources Note To reduce processor loading use WAIT WT commands Include an END command at the end of your FST As the sequence of functions executes two memory locations store intermediate results from one function to the next One location called the Results Register RR stores a floating point value referred to as the Signal Value Analog SVA The other location called the Compare Flag CF stores a discrete value called the Signal Value Discrete SVD Depending on the command the Results Register RR and the Compare Flag CF may be loaded stored tested modified or left unchanged Note Since re
361. pletes execution of the FST and waits for the next FST execution cycle before returning to the first STEP of the FST The END command can only be used once in an FST If omitted End is appended to the FST by the FST Editor at compile time following the first empty Command field Log a 10 character message and the current value of the selected parameter to the respective log Table B 15 FST Miscellaneous Commands Name Description Arguments Results GO Go to specified LABEL 1 LABEL Goto ARG1 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in BRK Break delays execution ofeach 1 Input Database or Constant FST break time ARG1 command after this one for the Value RR out RR in number of 100 millisecond intervals SVD out SVD in a defined by ARGUMENT 1 o o S ayn ate END End of FST returns to first None Execute FST starting with first command command RR out RR in SVD out SVD in MSG LCD Message sends message K Input Message FST Message String ARG1 ARGUMENT1 and value ARGUMENT2 to local display panel One 30 character message can be sent by each FST as shown next Value XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX ARG2 VAL YYYYYYYY ZZZZZ ZZ SCAN NEXT PREV MENU XXXX message yyyy FST Tag name E ALM Log Alarm records message Issued Jan 08 2 Input Database or Constant FST Editor FST Message Value ARG2 RR out RR in SVD out SVD in Log Alarm ARG1 ARG2 B 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manu
362. power Also called Flash memory A microprocess based device that provides flow calculations remote monitoring and remote control A FloBoss is a type of ROC Factory Mutual Write an ON OFF True False or 1 0 value to a coil Compressibility Factor Frequency Shift Keypad Function Sequence Table a type of user written program in a high level language designed by Emerson Process Management e Remote Automation Solutions Division Foot or feet Ground Fault Analysis Electrical ground such as used by the ROC unit s power supply Gauge Pressure The indicated quantity times the meter factor derived from a meter proving of the flow meter at a specific flow rate Calculation gross quantity indicated quantity times meter factor Highway Addressable Remote Transducer Analog output number value to be read Differential pressure Hertz Integrated Circuit Also Industry Canada more recently known as Measurement Canada an organization that grants custody transfer approvals on certain ROC units Identification Industrial Electrical Code or International Electrotechnical Commission See http www iec ch Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers A professional organization that in conjunction with the International Standards Organization ISO establishes and maintains the Open System Interconnection OSI reference model and an international standard for the organization of local area networks LANs Ref
363. pproaches the Override setpoint the pressure Override loop pinches back the output At the point that the pressure loop requests an output change less than the flow primary loop the output from the pressure loop is selected and controls the valve Set the Scale Factor for each of the Primary and Override loops as span of output span of input Both loops have scale factors which permit the control action to close the valve when the process variable is above the setpoint With the scale factor set according to the above formula the initial settings for gain reset and rate produce stable control under most circumstances Gain controls the magnitude of the initial change in output for a given change in the process Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 variable or setpoint Reset controls the magnitude of the change in output based on the continuing difference between the process variable and the setpoint over time You can then adjust these values to produce the desired control actions 7 10 Configuring History Points The History options allow you to copy and store to the historical database for up to 35 days data values and calculated variables stored in the current value database You then configure the historical database to log only the values that need to be logged The system logs values in the standard minute hourly daily time base of the FloBoss unless you use FST control By using the FST
364. process Zero Shift Offset Click to set adjustment factors for the input RTD Bias SEENEN Auto Scan Click to automatically request values each second Stop Scan from the meter The request continues until you click Freeze A Caution If you have an MVS transmitter or a DVS sensor refer to Chapter 6 Sensor Transducer Accessories in the ROC FloBoss Accessories Instruction Manual Form A4637 for the recommended way to remove or restore the device from or to working pressure during calibration Failure to follow recommendations may damage the device 8 2 1 Verifying an Input To verify an input 1 Select Meter gt Calibration The Meter Calibration screen displays 2 Select a meter input to verify Note ROCLINK 800 retains or removes the appropriate inputs from the Meter Calibration screen The following example verifies a temperature sensor for a turbine meter Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Meter Calibration Meier E ll Meter Tag Turbine Hz Freeze Freeze Values Static Pressure Temperature 777 0000 77 4540 ez ee Ges ter Dia ETD Bias Auto Scan LEI Update wi Done Figure 8 12 Turbine Meter Verification 3 Click Freeze ROCLINK 800 displays a dialog asking 1f you want to create a calibration report file ROCLINK 800 Do you want to create a calibration report file 4 Click Yes to display a Save As dialog box and specify a storage locatio
365. r Enabled number of screens equals the number of logicals The default is Disabled Note The number of screens is based of the number of logicals for the first point type selected in the Point Type field Issued Jan 08 Field Point Type s Picture Menu Location Tree Location Update Mode ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description Sets if you enable the Logical Point List option the point type s whose logicals track the iteration of the display Click which appears when you click the field to display the Select Point Type s screen Use that screen to associate one or more point types with this Logical Point List Identifies a graphic used for the background of the display Click which appears when you click the field to display a Select Picture File screen Use that screen to associate an image with the display Allows you to hide replace or rename a menu selection in the ROCLINK 800 menu This option applies only to displays physically residing in the FB107 Hide Hides a menu selection in the Meter View or ROC menu Requires the syntax H menuname submenuname as in H Meter Plate Change Replace Replaces a screen in the Meter menu with the current custom display Requires the syntax R menuname submenuname as in R Meter Setup Rename Replaces a menu in the Meter View or ROC menu with the current display using the indicated name Requires the syntax N menuname submen
366. r List Chart screen Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 109 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 110 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 8 The Meter Menu Use the Meter menu options to define configure and calibrate meter runs review meter runs and perform plate changes H Setup Calibration Values Plate Change Figure 8 1 Meter Menu In This Chapter 8 1 Configuring the Meter Getunp 8 1 8 1 1 Meter Setup General Tab 8 3 8 1 Meter Setup Inputs Tab 8 7 8 1 3 Meter Setup Advanced Tab 8 9 8 1 4 Meter Setup Fluid Properties Tab 8 12 8 1 5 Meter Setup Sampler Tab 8 14 8 1 6 Meter Setup Calibration Factors Tab 8 16 8 1 7 Meter Setup Alarms Tab 8 17 62 Calibration E 8 20 g amp l VOriiyili Ait APU snosi akae Nata 8 21 8 2 2 Calibrating an JEE seitei ania 8 26 8 2 3 Zero Shift Offset andRiDBas eee ees 8 32 8 3 mn 151 gt 62 EE 8 34 6 4 Plate Change EE 8 35 8 1 Configuring the Meter Setup Issued Jan 08 Use Meter Setup to configure meter runs The Meter configuration screens contain the functions directly associated with measuring and logging flow including setup of American Gas Association AGA American Petroleum Institute APD or International Standards Organization ISO calculation configuration parameters and calibrating the meter depending on the device that you are configuring The FloBoss 107 can support up to four pulse or differential mete
367. r a dial up modem connection 1 3 Contacting Technical Support For technical support please contact your local sales representative You may also contact Remote Automation Solutions directly Emerson Process Management Remote Automation Solutions Marshalltown IA 50158 USA Houston TX 77065 USA Pickering North Yorkshire UK YO18 7JA E mail supportnet emersonprocess com Website http www emersonprocess com Remote Technical Support Website http www emersonprocess com flow Emerson support support_index html Telephone 641 754 3449 Toll Free US and Canada 800 807 0730 Hours Monday through Friday 7 30 AM to 4 30 PM Central Standard Time USA 1 4 Software Installation To install ROCLINK 800 1 Start the installation using either of the following methods Method 1 If you have a CD ROM that contains the ROCLINK 800 installation files A Place the ROCLINK 800 installation CD ROM into your drive B If the CD ROM runs automatically click Install a ROCLINK Product on the Main Menu Introduction Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 C Click the Install ROCLINK 800 button in the Installation Screen Note If the CD ROM does not run automatically click Windows Start gt Run When the Run dialog box opens click Browse and navigate to the CD ROM drive and select setup exe Click Open If the CD ROM is drive D the location will be D Mnstalls ROCLINK800_W68130 Setup exe Click OK in the Run d
368. r written to the FloBoss device Conversions account for differences in data types between the master and slave devices Conversion codes 65 to 72 allow a 4 byte IEEE formatted floating point number to be sent or received in two Modbus registers with the byte orders configurable A check is made to ensure that an even number of registers is requested that the Start Register number does not begin in the middle of a register pair and that the number of registers does not exceed the number of registers configured Table 7 7 Modbus Convert Codes Convert SCHER Slave re Code Description Function Definition H No Conversion N A Ni 1 Float to integer 3 4 Se Float Scale 4 IT 2 Float to integer 3 4 Float Scale H 3 s Float to integer 3 4 Float Scale 3 4 _ Float to integer AA The Float to Integer conversion changes FloBoss floating point FloatScale4 data to an integer for transmission to the Host The number of the 5 Float to integer 3 4 Convert Code specifies which floating point scaling value is to be Float Scale 5 _ used for the conversion 6 Float to integer 3 4 EA Float Scale 6 T Float to integer 3 4 FloatSeale7 8 Float to integer 3 4 Float Seale 8 e 7 96 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Convert Slave Code Description Function Definition 25 Any type to Float 3 4 6 16 _ No Scaling l 28 Anytype to Signed 3 4 6 16 Short Integer gt When using Function Cod
369. ration No Expiration 3 01 22 2007 11 40 35 AM IAPWS 1997 Sample Vendor 4 01 22 2007 11 40 42 AM Cond Orifice Sample Yendor License Key Event Log Vendor ID Application Name Previous Quantity New Quantity 05 30 2007 16 14 49 lAPW S 1997 05 24 2007 11 42 49 Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 42 06 Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 41 14 Props Example 05 24 2007 11 40 56 Props Example 05 24 2007 11 40 26 Cond Orifice 05 24 2007 11 40 05 Cond Orifice 05 04 2007 14 54 52 Cond Orifice COPS OM ol i f j a Figure 9 14 Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key 3 Click Remove A Confirm Remove License dialog box displays Confirm Remove License d Zi Are you sure you want to remove the select Figure 9 15 Confirm Remove License Dialog 4 Click Yes A second confirmation dialog displays Permanently Remove Non Transferable License LY This license is permanent and cannot be moved to a license key Are you sure you want to permanently delete this license Figure 9 16 Confirm Removal Dialog 5 Click Yes ROCLINK 800 displays the Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key screen showing that the license for V Cone Flow Calc the permanent license is gone Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY Licenses on DEVICE fbb ee i et Ep Time Created HAPWS 1997 1997 ample Yendor 0 00 4 Ken No Expiration 01 22 2007 11 40 35 AM C
370. ration Canceled Deviation 0 000 0 0000 Deviation 0 000 0 0000 Figure 5 9 Calibration Report Print Preview 5 Click Print to print the report ROCLINK 800 displays a Print window that allows you select the printer number of copies and other options You can also export the report to different formats using the PDF RTF TXT and HTML buttons on the tool bar 5 4 History Alarm and Event Log Reports The View menu option enables you to access and display the Minute Hourly Periodic and Daily History Log reports View gt History the Alarm Logs View gt Alarms or the Event Logs View gt Events You can retrieve these logs either from the device itself Gf ROCLINK 800 is currently connected or from a previously saved file on your PC Once you select the view the system displays the log ROCLINK 800 provides several option buttons you can use to manage report data 5 8 View Menu Issued Jan 08 5 4 1 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Option Description Plot Graphically displays history data based on criteria you select Note This option is available only for history values obtained either from a connected device or from a file Refer to Section 5 4 3 Plotting History Select New Redisplays the Select History Points screen which you can use to select new history values Note This option is available only if you are viewing history data from the device Save Saves the log
371. rce Recalculation Forces after you select this value and click Apply the system to fully recalculate the flow without waiting for the next normal recalculation You set normal recalculation periods using the Integral Multiplier Period or the Base Multiplier Period fields on the General tab of the Meter Setup screen After a forced recalculation the system zeros accumulations logs the flow value as a new entry Note The system automatically resets this parameter to Clear after the recalculation completes Limit Meter Events Sets the logging of AGA events The system logs AGA limit events when an input to the AGA calculation is either outside the specified limits or the calculation fails Valid values are Enabled log all AGA limit events or Disabled ignore AGA calculation related events Note Disabling this parameter prevents the event log from filling with AGA limit events Pressure Tap Indicates the pressure tap type and location for this meter run Valid values are Gauge Absolute Indicates the type of pressure tap This choice must match the static pressure type as actually measured by the sensor Order the MVS sensor DVS sensor or other pressure transmitter to provide absolute or gauge Seen EE eee Upstream Indicates the location of the Downstream orifice static pressure tap in relation to the orifice and normal flow Upstream is the default Note This field displays only for an orifice meter I
372. re 8 10 PUTO SCAN EE 10 2 Update Interval Option 1 16 Auxiliary 6 Point IO Update Firmware n nnannnannannnannnnnnannnnennennnnne 9 5 Auxiliary Power jn 6 13 Average I O Scan me 6 14 6 18 l 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Average Raw Values n nnenennennesenennreeennenenne 7 10 Averaging Techngue 8 6 AXIS ZOOM ING Un EEN 5 14 B Backup ROC USERIMOD succeeded asta 2 4 Backups CONNGQUPATION EE 2 4 Bad I O SPI Messages cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 14 Base Multiplier Period DM 8 5 Base Pressure EE 8 10 Base Temperature 8 10 Baud Rate HOBOS EE 3 10 SE 3 4 BLM list parameter text EE 7 107 FERAINIG LOS iors aca Sadana E EE 7 107 BLEW ISU EE 7 107 ZE 8 5 Boot Build Date 3 9 6 9 7 4 7 43 Boot Hevision 3 9 6 9 7 4 7 43 DIKES EEEE EA EE B 21 A EAEN ee B 12 Build Date 3 9 6 9 7 4 7 43 Clo o A E E E A EN B 8 Button Add Uicense 9 10 t 1 11 Byte EE 7 86 C Calculation Standard 8 4 Calibrated Gra vACcel 8 17 Calibration A tel Eu E EE 8 32 EE E 7 11 FAC ON EE 8 16 AE FA eene 7 50 8 21 METER EE 8 20 MOJO oeie E EA EE E 9 27 EEN 7 49 rees 8 20 REPONS sesso Paci arate ieee aia 5 6 RID EE 7 11 E ee 11 1 Ee B 12 CF BAY ieee ee ee eee B 12 Chart BEIER ele EE 7 108 Charts AXIS ZOOM aise Nat cancieioe EE 5 14 Graphics ZOOM an Area 5 13 Sie e 5 12 Check Eeer B 20 Clear l 2 Index USET FTO aM csse 9 21 er elle Le EE 7 11 COG EE 6 3 Clock G
373. red as Timed Duration Outputs TDO Control Type Override Only Sets the Primary loop as the only active loop The system uses the output the Primary loop calculates to adjust the control output Primary Only Sets the Override loop as the only active loop The system uses the output the Override loop calculates to adjust the control output Note This control type is used mainly for tuning the Override loop or when loop selection is controlled by an FST or other logic external to the PID algorithm Sets both the Primary and Override loops as active The system compares the outputs from the two loops and uses either the lesser or greater of the two outputs based on the selection in the Override Type Select field to adjust the control Override Control 7 64 Configure Menu Defines a setpoint for controlling the Primary PID loop s process variable Note This field does not display if you select Override Only as a Control Type Defines a setpoint for controlling the Override PID loop s process variable Note This field does not display if you select Primary Only as a Control Type Issued Jan 08 Field Process Variable Output Change Output Override Type Select Loop Selected Tuning Gain Reset Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description This read only field shows the value and units for the Primary or Override process variable as
374. riod To Ge C Disabled e Disabled Low Reading EU 400 High Reading EU 7520 ActveAlams i Copy Update w OF Cancel Figure 7 6 Analog Input The Analog Input screen has four tabs Use each tab to configure a component of the input Use the General tab to set the basic parameters for the analog input point Use the Advanced tab to configure features such as filtering A D conversions and clipping for the selected analog input Use the AI Calibration tab to calibrate the AI point while on line Use the Alarms tab to set the alarm parameters for this AI point Note If you enable Alarming Configure gt I O gt AI Points gt General tab configure the limit alarms four levels rate and deadband on the Alarms tab To conserve alarm log space enable alarms only when necessary If you do not plan to use all the alarms check and adjust the value of each one to prevent the generation of false alarms Refer to Sections 7 2 1 through 7 2 4 for a complete description of the fields on each tab Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start Configure Menu 7 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 2 1 Al General Tab The Analog Input screen initially displays the General tab Use this tab to set the basic parameters for the analog input point
375. rm of permanent memory ona ROC Electronic Flow Metering or Measurement Serial Communications Protocol using three or more signal lines intended for short distances Concerning RS232D and RS232C the letters C or D refer to the physical connector type D specifies the RJ 11 connector where a C specifies a DB25 type connector Serial Communications Protocol using four signal lines Serial Communications Protocol requiring only two signal lines Can allow up to 32 devices to be connected together in a daisy chained fashion Electro Motive Force Electro Magnetic Interference Electro Static Discharge Engineering Units Units of measure such as MCF DAY Federal Communications Commission See http www fcc gov Glossary A 3 Firmware FlashPAC module Flash ROM FloBoss FM Force FPV FSK FST Ft GFA GND GP Gross Quantity HART Holding Register Hw Hz J IMV Indicated Quantity Input A 4 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Internal software that is factory loaded into a form of ROM In a ROC the firmware supplies the software used for gathering input data converting raw input data values storing values and providing control signals ROM and RAM module for a ROC300 Series unit that contains the operating system applications firmware and communications protocol A type of read only memory that can be electrically re programmed It is a form of permanent memory requires no backup
376. rol description that allows the DL8000 to automatically control the product quantity or total quantity based on percentages of multiple components during a batch delivery operation The DL8000 supports up to thirty recipes Radio Frequency Interference Ring Indicator modem communications signal Remote Operations Controller microprocessor based unit that provides remote monitoring and control Microsoft Windows based software used to configure functionality in ROC units Read only memory Typically used to store firmware Flash memory A positive displacement meter used to measure flow rate also Known as a Roots meter Real Time Clock Resistance Temperature Device Ready to Send modem communications signal Remote Terminal Unit Room Temperature Vulcanizing typically a sealant or caulk such as silicon rubber Serial Communications Protocol using three or more signal lines intended for short distances Also referred to as the EIA 232 standard Serial Communications Protocol using four signal lines Also referred to as the EIA 422 standard Serial Communications Protocol requiring only two signal lines Can allow up to 32 devices to be connected together in a daisy chained fashion Also referred to as the EIA 485 standard Received Data communications signal Glossary Issued Jan 08 SAMA Script Side Stream Side Stream Component Side Stream Meter Smart module Soft Points SP SPI SPK SRAM SRBX
377. rs Table 8 1 shows the units of the flow parameters in Metric and US engineering units EUs Table 8 1 Meter Run Engineering Units EU Flow Parameter U S Units Metric Units Meter Input AGA3 ISO5167 InH2O kPa Meter Input AGA7 _ MCF Day kM3 Day Static Pressure PSIG or PSIA kPaGorkPaA Temperature l Deg F Deg C e Meter Menu 8 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 2 Flow Parameter U S Units Metric Units BTU CForBTU Lb Instantaneous Volume Hour CF Hour M Hour Instantaneous Volume Day MCF Day kM3 Day E Instantaneous Energy Hour BTU Hour Mio R Instantaneous Energien MMBTU Day GJ Day 8 Volume Flow Today Yesterday MI kKM3 EnergyToday Yesterday MME GJ gt o 8 Viscosity LbmiFtSec Com Diameters Inches Millimeters Elevation Fe Mee EE SE E Inst Mass Day MlbiDay Tomes Day Mass Flow Today Yesterday Mlb Tonnes DEE GE ES MAM or MJ Kg To configure the meter runs select Meter gt Setup The Meter Setup screen displays Meter Setup Meter Number ET Z Meter Taq Meter 2 General Inputs Advanced Fluid Properties Sampler Calibration Factors Alarms Meter Description Meter 2 Description Calculation Standard Type of Units AGA3 92 Volume C AGA 96 C Mass C 1505167 2003 C Flow Alarming C Enabled e Disabled Integral Multiplier Period IMP i D Minutes Averaging Technique Flow Dependent Linear C
378. ry The internal real time clock provides time stamping and control of the historical databases Event Log and Alarm Log Note The user selectable time stamp in the FloBoss reflects the time either at the beginning or at the end of the period Select Configure gt History Points gt Setup tab to adjust this preference in the History Time Stamp field 1 Select ROC gt Clock or click the Clock icon in the toolbar The Clock screen displays Device Date and Time Tuesday March 13 200 08 07 39 AM Set Device Date and Time ES March 2007 Eet Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Sat 1 3 4 5 6 7 68 10 11 12 ER 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 2 28 29 31 CD Today 3 13 2007 9 07 39 AM Auto Scan Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 6 3 Clock 2 Ifthe clock in your PC is set correctly you can use it to set the FloBoss clock Click Today at the bottom of the calendar 3 Ifthe PC clock is not correct Use the arrow buttons to select the correct Month and Year You can also click the Month to select the exact month or the Year and use the arrows to Select the desired Year Click on the desired day of the month Click on the time field and type in the desired value type P or A for the AM PM field or use the arrows 4 Click Apply if you changed any fields on this screen 5 Click OK For a complete discussion of device security refer to Section 3 7 2 Device Security ROC Menu 6 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107
379. s sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display Option Button Adds a radio button to limit input to a single selection This object has P be following properties OptionButton 1 wP o o Mask Value 255 Visible Selected When i Visible Yes Tab Order Ju Property Description Caption Sets a label or caption for each object The default is OptionButton 1 the system uniquely names each object until you rename it TLP Associates the object with a TLP Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to define the associated TLP Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 27 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Mask Value Identifies individual bits of an 8 bit integer ROCLINK uses when calculating the value to be compared to the value specified in the Selected When or Checked When fields ROCLINK performs a mathematical AND comparing this masked value and the value in the Selected When or Checked When field and activates the button or box if the values are equal The default value is 255 Selected When Specifies the value at which the option button activates Works in conjunction with the value in the Allow Data Entry Sets whether the user can edit the object Click e which displays when you click in the field to display the valid values Yes Allows editing This is the default No RUE Expression Allows editing based on a Visual Basic expre
380. s defined on the History Setup screen in Figure B 3 The system also creates an historical index for point 9 in FST1 Note For steps b and c you must use the number of the point as Argument 1 c Write the current time WTM to the historical point 10 FST Time Second at FST 1 R2 as defined on the History Setup screen The system also creates an historical index for point 10 in FST1 Note Itis possible and very likely that the historical time intervals will not match the same intervals the FST uses when it records historical data This step gives the periodic history report a time stamp when the FST records data d Suspend the FST execution WT for 5 seconds e Stop the FST execution END and restart at step Q 5 Click the Compile FST button EH on the FST Editor menu bar The FST Editor compiles the FST and determines whether it contains any errors in the area below the FST 1 FST Edit View Build Monitor Window D Ge MN Gt hk Aha WG a ORE el RS a Gte Fst 1 FsT2 reral FST 4 STEF LABEL CMD ARGUMENT 1 ARGUMENT 2 COMMENTS Not stored in device Use Read File to get comments WAL SFF 1 DATAT WOB J FST 1 A1 WT E 10 FST 1 A2 WT 5 VAL SFP 1 DATA WDE 3 Compiled FST Code IC 47 11 00 Of 00 29 22 0 00 00 00 47 10 00 OF OO ZA ZZ 0A 00 00 00 47 10 00 03 00 19 ZZ 05 00 00 OO FO 5 lines 35 bytea code 0 errora detected Figure B 6 Compiled FST B 28 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 Us
381. s the zero shift adjustment value for a differential pressure input This value is an offset to the calibrated EU Values and compensates for the effect of working static pressure on a DP transmitter that was calibrated at atmospheric pressure Set EU Value This read only field shows the Tester Value specified for the last calibration Manual EU Value This read only field shows the Live Reading for the last calibration EU Value 1 5 These read only fields show the five calibration settings in Engineering Unit values converted from the raw values based on the low reading EU and the high reading EU defined for the point Value 1 is the zero value value 5 is the span value and values 2 3 and 4 are midpoint values 9 26 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Timer Mode Type ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description This read only field shows the last inactivity count down in seconds typically starting from 3600 seconds that occurred during the last calibration session Had the countdown reached 0 time out would have taken place automatically ending the calibration mode This read only field shows the status of the calibration Valid values are 0 Use Current Calibration E 1 Start Calibration ss S i 2 Calibrate 3 Restore Previous Calibration A Stop Calibration ss This read only field shows the currently set calibration value Valid values are 0 Inactive no value i 1 Zeo o 2
382. s updated whenever you restart the FB107 Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module This read only field shows the firmware revision for the hardware currently installed in the FB107 This read only field shows the date the firmware was built for the hardware currently installed in the FB107 This read only field shows the revision number for the main startup firmware currently installed in the FB107 or hardware This read only field shows the date the main startup firmware currently installed in the FloBoss or hardware This read only field shows the status of the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Alarms display on the user interface indicating the state of the hardware including the CPU I O modules CPU I O assembly MVS modules communication modules and smart application modules You can mouse over an alarm icon to display the definition Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 43 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 44 Field Description Uninstall Click to remove the hardware currently installed in the FB107 This field displays the type of module the FB107 uses for point configuration and does not require that a module be physically installed to display The FB107 remembers the installed module until you uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus Installed Module 7 8 2 MVS Module I O Points Tab Use this tab to assign types of I O to each channel before you configure t
383. s visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display Combo Box Adds a list of options that opens when you click e This object has the ER following properties ComboBox 1 TLP Allow Data Entry es Yes Tab Order In enfin Property Description TLP Associates the object with a TLP Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to select the associated TLP Item List Enables you to build a drop down list of up to 30 selectable items Click which displays when you click in the field to display an Item List screen ltem List ltem Value List ltem Associate a TLF value with a list tem string yY OK A Cancel Use this screen to add items to the drop down menu ROCLINK 800 expands the list as you add items 5 30 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Item Value Associates the label in the drop down menu with a value in the designated a TLP List Item Sets the label that appears in the e _ drop down menu Allow Data Entry Sets whether the user can edit the object Click v which displays whe
384. screen information about getting started with ROCLINK 800 and performing keyboard operations a list of the Help topics and the ROCLINK 800 version To display context sensitive help on a menu item a parameter or a button press F1 while the item parameter or button is highlighted A help window appears on the screen To view detailed help select Help gt Help Topics from the menu bar Option Description Contents Presents a list of Help Topics that display based on task oriented situations Each screen tab and field has a help topic associated with it For example the Modbus Scale Values tab is located under Modbus gt Modbus Configuration gt Scale Values tab Index Locates specific Help Topics The Index lists each field by the So tab or screen in which the field appears Search Activates a search function on a specific word Back Returns to the last topic that you viewed Print Sends the currently displayed topic to the PC s default printer See Also Displays topics related to the currently selected topic lt lt gt gt Navigates forward gt gt or backwards lt lt through the help system on a per topic basis The Browse Sequence follows the order of the topics as displayed in the Contents tab 1 6 8 Basic Navigation Issued Jan 08 When you start ROCLINK 800 the Device Directory displays After you connect to an FB107 the Configuration Tree displays see Figure 1 4 Use the and sy
385. scription Active Alarms This read only field shows any active alarms for this point When you Enable alarming the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if you Disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface Note A read back error indicates the AO is driving the output to a set level but the loop is not responding Example An UD converter is connected to the A O and set to 25 If the I P is not connected or an open wire occurs a read back error would display Scanning Sets the scanning option for this point Valid values are Enabled automatically process the field input and display the last analog output scan in the Value field or Disabled permit only manual updates of the Value field Note If you enable alarming the FB107 generates a Manual Mode alarm when scanning is disabled If Scanning is set to Disabled you must manually enter a value in the Value field to override the input Alarming Sets the alarm option for this point Valid values are Enabled configures the limit alarms four levels Rate and Deadband on the Alarms tab or Disabled does not generate limit alarms Note The Point Fail alarm may appear in the Active Alarms field but is not logged in the Alarms file If you enable alarming the system generates an alarm if you disable
386. se Name Version Created CRC Size Size Update Close Figure 9 21 User Program Administrator mouu Update Close 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description User Programs Displays any user programs currently installed in the Installed in Device FB107 9 20 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description example 07Q0232 V Cone Flow the system completes the upper portion of the screen as shown on the right hand portion of Figure 9 27 Status This read only field indicates the status of the _ Selected program Valid values are S Empty No program installed E Loaded y Program installed but not running E Running gt Program active License Not Program requires a license to Found operate see Section 9 2 Clear Click to delete the selected user program from Oe EE Start slick to start the selected user program Stop Click to stop the selected user program from running Download User Identifies the program file to be downloaded Program File Download amp Start Click to download and start the identified user ooo Programming Download Click to download but not start the identified user program Note If you download several programs they may need to be started in a particular order Use this button to download without starting the programs 3 Click Close to display the
387. soline product This is because the gasoline product cannot be exclusively metered controlled or measured Wild Stream A product component measured as part of Primary Blend Stream Component Side Component Stream Component a primary blend stream component by a primary blend stream meter is called a wild stream component Gasoline is referred as wild stream component A 10 Glossary Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Appendix B The FST Editor ROCLINK 800 s Function Sequence Table FST provides an instruction list programming language you can use to define and perform a set of specific actions when a set of conditions exists In This Chapter Bal FST Editor EE B 1 Bast Using the FS CEdIO ssc co isecsvtaecisnceatuncd auadsvier este vation B 3 B142 FST Lael FONG ee ctese tered etysessactshise a ee thek B 4 SNE FST Command Fle e DEE B 5 B 1 4 FST Argument Eelde B 5 B 1 5 FST Comment elde AA B 6 B 1 6 FST Storage and Restart B 7 Bait Creating an FST getest ee Ce EEN B 7 B 1 8 Creating an FST from anEustnngtie B 8 B 1 9 Compiling to Build and Viewing an EG B 8 B 1 10 Downloading the FST to the FloBOSS n nnnnnannnannnenennnnna B 8 SW WE le Le an EE B 9 B 1 12 Staing the FS EE B 9 Sankt SE ele le Le El FS WEE B 9 B 1 14 Deleting an FST usmgCOear B 10 B 1 15 Reading an FST From Device n sannsnsennnnennnnsnnerenennn B 10 B 1 16 Reading an FST Fromtie B 10 Balch Closing an Eh ebe eege B 10
388. ssion This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the data entry is allowed Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values Yes Object is always visible This is the E default No Object is not visible Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools button on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display 5 28 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Check Box Adds a check box for multiple selections This object has the following MW properties Property Caption TLP Mask Value Checked When Allow Data Entry Visible Issued Jan 08 CheckBo 1 CheckBou 1 TLP Mask Value Checked When 0 Allow Data Entry Tab Order lo Description Sets a label or caption for the object The default is Ch
389. ssued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 11 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on the screen 4 Proceed to Section 8 1 4 Meter Setup Fluid Properties Tab 8 1 4 Meter Setup Fluid Properties Tab Use the Fluid Properties tab to define the mole percentages of up to 21 gas components as well as the Heating Value Basis the Heating Value and the Specific Gravity Note If other runs have similar characteristics you can use Copy and Paste to create gas quality configurations 1 Select the Fluid Properties tab The Fluid Properties screen displays Meter Setup Meter Number f1 Meter 1 v Meter Tag Meter 1 General Inputs Advanced Fluid Properties Sampler Calibration Factors Alarms FP Method Nitrogen Heptane 0 e Detailed C Grossi C Gross Heating Value C Calculate e Enter 1025 0 BTU CF Heating Value Basis Dry C Wet C As Delivered CH WD C02 Octane 6 Oe e Ge e Kee Ge Ge Ge Ge Ge CH Methane Nonane CH Ethane Decane CH Propane H25 n Butane Vater Specific Gravity Calculate e Enter 0 573538 Viscosity 0 000069 Lbm FtSec Sp Heat Ratio i 3 Gas Quality Butane Helium CH n Pentane Oxygen CO CH i Pentane Hexane Hydrogen 0 Argon 0 Total Mole 100 Constant Log Methane Adjust e Enabled C Disabled Update Y OK ACancel Apply Figure 8 6 Met
390. start always clears FST registers including the Run Flag use softpoints to load initial values for the FST B 2 FST Editor Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 B 1 1 Using the FST Editor Issued Jan 08 Using the FST Editor you create compile debug and download FSTs to the device The FST Editor consists primarily of a workspace and menus similar in structure to spreadsheet programs The FST Editor also allows you to monitor and trace of an FST while it runs Select Utilities gt FST Editor or click the FST Editor button Z to launch the FST Editor The FST Editor screen displays eg ROCLINK 800 Function Sequence Table 1 Workspace C FST Edt Yew D i Montor Window o WW Ha WA dog B pn 7 k SS ARGUMENT 2 COMMENTS ot S0eed mn donot leo besch File to oot comments Figure B 1 FST Editor The FST Editor provides a workspace menus and buttons for creating a Function Sequence Table The title bar at the top of the workspace window identifies the FST being created or edited The workspace area is a table divided into rows and columns with the intersection called a cell Cells are denoted by a box containing the cursor and a gray line around the cell Use Tab and the arrow keys to move between cells or you can go directly to a cell by clicking it with the mouse The Header Line of the workspace contains the function structure column names The STEP column contains the numbers that correspond to th
391. sted Note Use the Request Delay field to schedule the continual polling Request Delay Sets a delay time in seconds between polling request sequences This field is valid only when you enable Continuous Polling Note The system consideres each line in a Modbus Master Table as a request 2 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 3 Proceed to Section 7 12 3 Modbus Configuration Scale Values Tab 7 12 3 Modbus Configuration Scale Values Tab Use the Scale Values tab to define eight low and high floating point scale values each with a low and high integer values used to convert floating point numbers to a scaled integer The system uses integer scale values and the float scale values in conjunction with one another whenever you use the Convert Code 1 through 8 In older Modbus devices the system exchanged data without applying scaling using raw A D counts sent between devices Scaling factors allow values to be exchanged between Modbus emulating raw unscaled values For example a 4 to 20 mA loop might have a raw A D value in which 4 mA equaled 800 counts and 20 mA equaled 4095 counts At midrange 12 mA the raw A D count would be 2448 If this AI signal was representative of a 0 to 250 pound pressure 4 mA would equal 800 counts or 0 PSIG 20 mA would equal 4095 counts or 250 PSIG and midrange at 12 mA would equal 2448 counts or 125 PSIG Convert Codes 1 to 8 support both reads and writes 1
392. stem displays a message E Set Tebkeu Order With the left mouse button select each object in the desired order Select OF when done 5 38 View Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Import Display Allows you to import another custom display into the Objects current custom display Use this to quickly duplicate custom displays or build similar custom displays When you click this option the system displays an Import screen that you use to select the DSP file to EE EE Export Display Allows you to save the current custom display Objects When you click this option the system displays a Save As screen Use it to save the DSP file to the default or other ROCLINK 800 directory Lock Controls Restricts the movement of objects on the custom display This control is helpful when you want to make minor changes to the custom display without accidentally modifying the location of objects 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Some custom display objects tab label button text box option check box combo box line circle square and image allow you to add Visual Basic expressions that cause the display to change under specific conditions The Expression Builder screen enables you to quickly build and test a Visual Basic expression to provide customized functioning For example you could set a frame s Visible property to Expression and then specify the conditions such as a particular
393. ster are mapped to the same Point Type and point Logical Number and increment the Parameter Number Sets the type of conversion performed if any on data before it is either sent to the Host or written to the FloBoss device The conversions are used to allow for differences in data types between the Master and Slave devices Conversion Codes affect Function Codes 3 4 6 8 and 16 This read only field shows the comm ports affected by the register 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 12 5 Modbus History Table Use the Modbus History Table to configure the Hourly and Daily history values event records and alarm records for retrieval using function code 03 of the Modbus protocol To simplify setup ROCLINK 800 predefines several registers which you can reconfigure to your organization s requirements Daily Index Register 7160 Hourly Index Register 7161 Extended Index Register 7162 Events Alarms Register 32 Current Date Register 7046 Current Time Register 7047 Hourly Data Register 703 Daily Data Register 704 You may also configure the Hourly and Daily registers for up to ten groups of history points The Current Date and Current Time values may be useful when you need the date and time as floating point numbers in the formats respectively of DDMMYY and HHMM Configure Menu 7 93 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note Before you
394. story and Extended History the number of points allocated for each Note You can configure these values on the Setup tab of the History Setup screen Configure gt History Points 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 6 8 3 Device Information Other Information Tab 6 8 3 Device Information Other Information Tab The Other Information tab displays customer information Issued Jan 08 1 Select the Other Information tab on the Device Information screen The Other Information screen displays Device Information Customer Name NONE Version Name opge Ver 1 00 ID Emerson Process RAS Time Created Dec 20 2006 72200 ROMSerial 000000000000 MPU Loading 1206912 0 Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 6 7 Device Information Other Information tab 2 Review the information on this screen Field Customer Name Version Name ID Time Created Description This read only field shows the information about the customer or owner associated with this device This read only field shows the version number for this device This read only field shows the vendor associated with this device This read only field shows the date the firmware was created ROC Menu 6 7 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description ROM Serial This read only field shows The serial number assigned by the factory to the read only memory ROM installed in the device
395. t If you are still having trouble communicating try increasing or decreasing the Key Off Delay field in the Advanced tab screen Click Apply Return to the General tab and click Connect Check the security settings of ROCLINK 800 You control security in two ways ROCLINK 800 Security Enables who can access log on ROCLINK 800 and the Access Level assigned to a user Device Security Enables who has access to the FB107 comm ports Communications and Security Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Note Security Access Levels enable you to control which users have access to specific ROCLINK 800 functions 3 7 1 ROCLINK 800 Security Use the ROCLINK 800 Security screen to set access to ROCLINK 800 Note Refer to Section 3 7 2 Device Security for instructions on securing the FB107 To access this screen select Utilities gt ROCLINK 800 Security The ROCLINK 800 Security screen displays Its table format enables you to define by operator ID password and security level who can log on to ROCLINK 800 and the screens which those IDs can access You may define up to 32 different users ROCLINK 800 Security Operator ID Password Access Level LO 1000 5 Figure 3 8 ROCLINK 800 Security Note The default Operator ID is LOI The default Password is 1000 1 Enter three alphanumeric characters for the Operator ID which is typically the initials of the person who operates the device Each Operator ID
396. t EE 8 32 Issued Jan 08 Index ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 RTD Inputs BS leie de EE 7 11 KAREN B 10 Kap VE 7 85 PRO OKC EE 1 99 Running Total Entered Rollover 00000000000n 7 38 S Sample Mtera EE 7 74 Sample orenian decease acme 8 14 PAC CUM EE 8 15 COMTO ME 8 15 PUPAL OM RE 8 15 SAV EE Eh B 22 Saving Configuration EE 4 7 SH KEE B 9 ROC User EEN 4 7 Sale Let EE 7 66 Scale EES 7 87 Scan le te EE 7 50 SCAN CRO ettlech 6 11 Analog NPU EE 7 8 Discrete INDuts ccccscccseecsseeseeeeseeeeeaes 1 22 RE AAEE E EAA 7 36 Scan Time RE A 6 14 6 18 scanning PA deeg 7 9 PRO EE 7 18 7 29 Fits teach eegene A EEE T A EE 7 23 Enabling 7 9 7 18 7 23 7 29 7 37 7 63 EE 7 47 GEN 7 37 PD EE EN 7 63 Screens Security Access lLevels 3 20 EEN NE eebe eege ege 7 105 7 107 STe E AIA EE E EE E soresedaaceeasesteccyys 3 18 INCCOESS Levels arsi ENEE 3 20 ROCHNK RRE 3 19 SOCUPILY O EE 3 23 Select RENE 1 16 Sensor AlarmS EE 7 47 Sensor Configuration ccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 7 47 Sensor Interface Version 7 48 Serial Number 3 8 6 9 7 4 7 43 9 10 Set EU WEE 9 26 DEE RES 10 o Ile EE 6 18 Set Timer H RE B 20 Set To Factory Defaults ce eeeeeeeeeeees 9 28 SEET 7 64 Setting the Clock AA 6 3 Setup Communication Parameters ccceeeee 2 2 VO ICT er 7 4 VOLO es cet settee A E A oe eee au ene ne 8 1 Signal Value Analog 7 59 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107
397. t RR out RR in Value Op Logical OR ARG1 with SVD in 7 1 Input Database or Constant S RR out RR in Value XOR Logical XOR ARG1 with SVD in 1 Input Database or Constant RR out RR in FST Comparison Commands Kat SwDieou SVD in XOR ARG1 Use comparison commands to compare values Comparison commands conditionally compare two values and branch to a different sequence of commands if the comparison is determined to be true Otherwise if the comparison is determined to be false no branching occurs and the next command in sequence is executed Comparison commands test values for equivalence non equivalence less than lt less than or FST Editor Issued Jan 08 Note that this command performs in a bit wise fashion so two floating Point Numbers displayed as equal may not match ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 equal to lt greater than gt and greater than or equal to gt Table B 13 FST Comparison Commands Description Test If RR in equals ARG1 Test If RR in Not Equal to ARG1 Test If RR in less than ARG1 Test If RR in less than or equal to ARG1 Test If RR in greater than ARG1 Test if RR in greater than or equal to ARG 1 Input Database or Constant Value 2 LABEL 2 LABEL Arguments 1 Input Database or Constant Value 2 LABEL Results If RR in ARG1 Goto ARG2 Otherwise continue to next command SVD out SVD in
398. t a point ROCLINK 800 activates the Download button 6 Click Download ROCLINK 800 begins to download the configuration points you have chosen and displays the status point type and point number information as the download progresses 7 Click OK when the download completes 8 Select ROC gt Flags and click the Save Configuration for Flash Memory button 4 4 Saving a ROC User File In addition to keeping backup copies of the configuration file it is also good practice to keep a backup copy of the ROC_USER mdb file This file contains the communications security and password settings for the FloBoss To create a backup copy of the file 1 Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the folder where ROCLINK 800 software is located Typically this folder is C Program Files ROCLINK800 2 Create a copy of the ROC_USER mdb file 3 Paste the copy into another folder on the PC or a disk 4 5 Saving a Configuration 4 5 1 Issued Jan 08 The Save option saves the current configuration of a connected device to a disk file This feature is useful when creating a backup when configuring similar FloBoss units for the first time or when making configuration changes off line Once a backup configuration file is created it can be loaded into a device using File gt Download 1 Select File gt Save Configuration The Save As dialog box appears 2 Type the desired File name of the backup file 3 Click Save ROCLINK 800 conf
399. tabase RR out ARG1 value SAV Store RR sets the argument to the RR in Arguments Results or Constant SVD out SVD in 1 Output ARG1 RR in Database Value RR out RR in SVD out SVD in RDB Read Historical Database sets the RR out 1 Input Database For FST History Point to the historical database value of the _ specified database point ARGUMENT1 and the specified pointer ARGUMENT 2 to the historical database value Applies to historical database points defined for the _ FST only If ARGUMENT2 is a floating database value for example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command increments ARGUMENT2 to the next historical _ database value and sets it to 0 when the number of archived historical periods are exceeded Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Note Each ARGUMENT2 must be unique WDB Write To Historical Database sets the RR in to the value of the database point ARGUMENT 1 and the pointer ARGUMENT2 Applies to historical database points defined for the FST only lf ARGUMENT 2 is a floating database value for example FST1 FST SEQ 1 R8 the command increments ARGUMENT2 to the next historical database value and sets it to 0 when the number of archived historical periods are exceeded Otherwise no effect occurs to ARGUMENT2 Note Each ARGUMENT2 must be unique or Constant RR out History Value ARG1 ARG2 _ Value _ For floating database valu
400. table Sets a beginning value from which the Modbus Master polling sequence begins This number corresponds to a line number on the Modbus Master Table associated with this comm port Number of Requests Sets the total number of requests the Modbus Master makes for this polling sequence This value specifies the total number of lines in the Master tables on which to execute the polls The default value 0 prevents the polling from occurring Note You can define up to three Modbus Master tables for this comm port The tables are contiguous If you indicate more requests that are on a single table the system accesses the second or third table to complete the request For more information see Section 7 12 7 Modbus Master Table Retries 7 86 Configure Menu Sets the amount of time in seconds that the Master Host waits to receive a valid message after the FloBoss sends a request to a device Note Do not enter 0 Zero in this field Sets the number of times after the initial try that the Master FloBoss attempts to establish communications with the specified device before reporting a timeout error Valid values are between 0 and 25 the default is 2 Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Continuous Polling Indicates whether the system continually executes the Modbus Master polling sequence Valid values are Enabled polling occurs continually or Disabled polling occurs only as reque
401. ted sensor This is similar to polling a FloBoss using Address and Group 240 When Address 240 is used the sensor will respond with its address by updating the Address field Issued Jan 08 Field Voltage Sensor Configuration Pressure Temperature Values Scanning Sensor Alarms Active Alarms Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description This read only field shows the voltage input to the sensor If the MVS interface version as shown on the Advanced tab s Sensor Interface Version field is 6 or greater this field should read approximately 5 which is the voltage to the microcontroller in the sensor If the MVS interface version is less than 6 this field shows the input voltage to the sensor Note For proper operation the input voltage to the sensors with versions less than 6 must be at least 10 5 volts dc Click Write to update the sensor with the current values on the screen or click Read to read the sensor s current configuration data and process variables These read only fields show scaled differential pressure readings from the sensor The units display as either InH20 or kPa The scaled Differential Pressure Reverse DP reading is from the sensor times a negative 1 for flow in the reverse direction The scaled absolute Pressure Static Pressure reading from the sensor displays in either PSI or kPa The scaled process Temperature reading from the sensor displa
402. ted the previous contract day calculated as the previous day s Today s Total value at the contract hour before being cleared Current Rate This read only field shows the calculated rate as of the most recent scan expressed in EUs per unit of time You select time units using the Rate Period field on the Advanced tab The system calculates the rate at the end of each scan period by multiplying the number of pulses received by the conversion value divided by the rate period Active Alarms Frequency 7 36 Configure Menu This read only field shows any active alarms for this point When you Enable alarming the limit alarms such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm that are active appear Even if you Disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 Dynamic Interface This read only field shows in pulses second the frequence of incoming pulses Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Scanning Sets the scanning option for this point Valid values are Enabled automatically process the field input and display the last pulse input scan in the Value field or Disabled permit only manual updates of the Value field Note If you enable alarming the FB107 generates a Manual Mode alarm when scanning is disabled If Scanning is disabled you must manually enter a value in the Value field to
403. ter Setup Calibration Factors Tab Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 8 1 6 Meter Setup Calibration Factors Tab Use the Calibration Factors tab to define instrument specific parameters that can affect calibration of the meter inputs 1 Select the Calibration Factors tab The Calibration Factors screen displays Meter Setup Dead Weight Calibration Static Press e No C Yes Calibrated Grav Accel Calibrated Grav Accel User fel Leer Correction Factor 1 0 User Correction Factor 1 0 Copy Update wi OK X Cancel Figure 8 8 Meter Setup Calibration Factors tab Figure 8 9 Meter Setup Calibration Factors tab Orifice Meter Turbine Meter Note Which screen displays depends on the calculation standard you selected on the General tab Select AGA3 92 or ISOQ5167 2003 orifice calculations to display Figure 8 8 Select AGA7 96 turbine calculations to display Figure 8 9 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Dead Weight Sets whether any corrections occur for local gravity s Calibration Static effects on dead weight calibrations to static pressure Pressure The system multiplies the factor Fpwl by the base volume flow equation The system uses the factor Fpwl to correct for the effect of local gravity on the weights of a dead weight calibrator which are usually sized for use ata standard gravitational force or at some spe
404. the Event Log Configure Menu 7 51 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 6 Click Log Verify to write the displayed data to the Event Log 7 Click Done when you have completed the verification The system 10 11 12 displays the Calibrate screen Click Calibrate if the values resulting from step 4 are outside the contractual limits The system displays a Set Zero screen Set Zero Point MUD Dif Pressure Dead Weight Tester alue T Live Reading 73 001 Deviation 29 2004 Ger Zero A Cancel Figure 7 38 Set Zero Calibration Complete the Dead Weight Tester Value field using a pre defined zero calibration point Click Set Zero The system adds a line to the online display changes the value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field to the pre defined zero value and changes the button label to Set Span Click Set Span The system adds a line to the online display changes the value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field to the pre defined span value and changes the button label to Set Mid1 If appropriate define up to three midpoints for calibration Review the following fields on the screen Field Description Point Identifies the point differential pressure static pressure or temperature being calibrated Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Action Shows the activity being performed as well as _ various values As Found Shows the sensor s
405. the Register Number defined in the History Access configuration In this request the number of registers is included to maintain format compatibility but is ignored by the receiving FloBoss Twenty bytes are returned for each event and alarm in the response Up to 12 events and alarms can be returned in a single response If no events and alarms have occurred since the last collection the response contains zero 0 data bytes For the date stamp in the events and alarms returned the year YY is really the number of years since 1980 For example if the current year is 2007 the year YY for the date stamp would be 27 Following is an example of a request for events and alarms with the history access event alarm register defined as 32 Ox0020 hex 7 102 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Table 7 9 Host Event Alarm Request Example Message Message Field Device Address Function Code Register Offset yi Error Check Bytes 1 1 2 2 2 TX Order MSLS M LS L MS Value 01H 03H 00H20H 00H H CRC 16 The following example shows a response returning three events and alarms Table 7 10 Event Alarm Response Example Message Message Device Function Byte Field Address Code Count oala EMOT CNECK Bytes 1 1 1 20 bytes per event or alarm 2 SE er e e gt GE E a RE no ao ae SEN Se em SC Ss EN d Sp a Acknowledging After the host has correctly received event and a
406. the live pressure or temperature reading and the measured pressure or temperature reading Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 17 Click Done ROCLINK 800 displays the Calibrate screen This completes the calibration process 7 8 6 Multi Variable Sensor Alarms Tab Use this tab to establish limits for differential pressure pressure temperature and RBX alarms 1 Select the Alarms tab The Alarms screen displays Multi Variable Sensor Diff Pressure Alarms Pressure Alarms Temperature Alarms C Enabled e Disabled C Enabled Disabled C Enabled e Disabled Low Alarm 0 Low Alarm 0 0 Low Alarm 0 0 0 0 High Alarm 0 High Alarm High Alarm 0 Alarm Deadband 0 0 Alarm Deadband 0 0 Alarm Deadband 0 0 Fault Value 0 0 Fault Value 0 0 Fault Value 0 RB Alarming e Disabled On Alarm Set C On Alarm Clear On Alarm Set and Clear ZUpdate Y OK X Cancel Figure 7 40 Multi Variable Sensor Alarms tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values Field Description Enabled Disabled Sets whether for the particular input alarms are active Valid values are Enabled configure alarms using the set parameters or Disabled do not generate an alarm regardless of configuration The system logs alarms to the alarm log To conserve log space enable alarms only when necessary Note If you disable an alarm the system does not generate an a
407. the second Note Any changes to this value take effect in the next execution cycle Re start is not required To reduce the potential risk of loading on the FB107 monitor the MPU loading when making changes to this parameter See Section 6 8 3 Device Information Other Information Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 6 8 2 Device Information Points Tab 6 8 2 Device Information Points Tab The Points tab displays history point information 1 Select the Points tab on the Device Information screen The Points tab displays Device Information General _ Points Other Information Revision Info Maximum pbs fe ff AGAs 4 History Paints Standard History 30 Extended History 5 Update Y ok X Cancel Figure 6 6 Device Information Points tab 2 Review the following fields for your organization s values 6 6 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 Field Maximum Active History Points ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Description This read only field shows the maximum number of PID loops or AGA points meter runs allowed in the FB107 Sets the number of active PIDs loops or AGA points on the currently attached device Note This value cannot exceed the value shown in the Maximum number field To conserve processor executions set this value to the minimum value your application requires This read only field shows for both Standard Hi
408. the version number of this application Quantity Indicates the number of licenses assigned to this application Note ROCLINK 800 manages this value as you install or move licenses License Source Indicates the original source for the software license Valid values are Key the license came from a USB key and has no expiration date File the license came from a string and has no expiration date or Temporary the license came from either a string or key but has an expiration date Issued Jan 08 Utilities Menu 9 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Expiration Indicates the date the license expires and becomes vii for use Time Created Shows the date and time the application was Be compiled Connect to Key Click to refresh the screen display If you insert a USB license key while displaying this screen click Connect to Key to allow ROCLINK 800 to refresh the Licenses on Key portion of the screen with the contents of the inserted USB license key Move to Device or Click to move the selected license from the license Move to Key key to the FB107 Note ROCLINK 800 re labels this button as Move to Key if you select a license currently installed on the FB107 ROCLINK 800 also grays out this button if you select a permanent non moveable license Add License Click to add either a key based or string based license to the FB107 or move a string based license to a key if allowable This button activates when
409. tified in the Value property TLP Associates the object with a TLP Click which displays when you click in the field to display a Select TLP screen you use to define the TLP Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 35 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Value Opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Enabled Indicates whether the button is active Valid values ane Yes Object is always active This is the 2 default No Object is not active Expression Selection is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Visible Indicates whether the object appears in the final version of the display Click e which displays when you Click in the field to display the valid values Re EE A Expression Visibility is based on a Visual Basic expression This option opens an Expression Builder window which you use to determine the conditions under which the object is visible Refer to Section 5 6 4 Adding an Expression to an Object Tab Order Sets the object to object order the cursor follows on the custom display when you press the Tab key Note For greatest efficiency use the Set Tab Key Order option accessed through the Other Tools bu
410. tion file and you may edit the file off line You can also load the configuration file into the FB107 using the Download function 4 3 Downloading a Configuration Use the Download option to download a saved configuration to a FloBoss device You create configuration files using File gt New Configuration To download a saved configuration file 1 2 4 6 Connect to the FloBoss Select File gt Download The Select File to Download dialog box displays Select the configuration file name ROCLINK 800 files have the extension 800 Click Open The Download Configuration screen displays Download Configuration Select Points to Download M System Variables M Clock Parameters F Modbus Configuration Cone Cale Setup Module Parameters Modbus Function Tables l Comm Port Parameters FST Code F Modbus History Table f Analog Inputs FST Parameters f Modbus Master T able Analog Outputs User List Parameters f Modbus Master Modem E Meter Calibration S ampler f Discrete Outputs Meter Configuration Pulse Inputs I History Configuration F MVS Parameters F Soft Points f Opcode Tables Status Point Type Point Number mw SIOS i Select Al Deselect All Figure 4 4 Download Configuration File Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 Select only the Configuration Points you desire to download ROCLINK 800 grays out any items not configured in your configuration Note Once you selec
411. tions and Security 3 13 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 14 Comm Port Comm Ports 1 Local Port v Tag Local Port RBX Mode C Enabled e Disabled REX Attempts 1 fe Fixed Number C Continuous mmm RBX Alarm Index RBX Status REx Host Delay Address 1 Delay 1 20 0 Seconds Group H Delay 2 30 0 Seconds Delay 3 145 0 Seconds REX Attempts 2 RBx Attempts 3 Extra Key On Delay Fixed Number Fixed Number Enabled C Continuous C Continuous fe Disabled 200 B DE Seconds vr Inactive ES Copy Update Y OK X Cancel Figure 3 6 Comm Ports RBX tab Field RBX Mode Description Sets the RBX Mode for Spontaneous Report by Exception alarming on this comm port The default is Disabled Sets the address of the host to which the RBX feature communicates Sets the group of the host to which the RBX feature communicates RBX Attempts Sets in seconds the time the device waits between attempts to transmit an RBX message Each RBX Attempts parameter has an associated delay parameter The default for Delay 1 is 20 seconds the default for Delay 2 is 30 seconds and the default for Delay 3 is 45 seconds Sets the number of times the device attempts to resend a message if it does not obtain a valid response on the first try Attempt refers to the initial message plus any retries ROCLINK 800 provides three parameters The default for all parameters is
412. tor The AGA calculations use a K Factor You can specify a variable K factor to keep the K Factor value more linear by equating it to a EU Value as received from a specified Input The K Factor values cannot be less than zero Note This field displays only for a turbine meter 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on the screen 4 Proceed to Section 8 1 3 Meter Setup Advanced Tab 8 1 3 Meter Setup Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to specify additional meter parameters 1 Select the Advanced tab The Advanced screen displays Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 9 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Meter Setup Mear Humber l bir FI Meter Tag Meim gi General inpas Advanced Fluid Properties Sampler Cmlibraton Pacinos Alarmes Alaaphanc Pressure Calculate 445 PSA Base Pregoure ban Base Temporsteg SUI Elavab ri z000 Labuda EER Forme Recslculabon Set Clear mm Enter Lg Meter Ears Im Enabled C Dirabiad Giana Acs levator im Calculate 0 Enter 214390 pech Triias Mptonel Pipa Malarial b FSLA Steriess Sagal I Graines Seel T Monel T Moril Cog F Cabin 8 Carbon Feel Deg Di DegF 680 Deg F Pragsure Tap e Gauge Is Upstream Abecduia C Doeprzeenrmn pdas wok Acana Apply Figure 8 6 Meter Setup Advanced tab Orifice 8 10 Meter Meter Setup Meter Number 1 Well 100 v Meter Taq Well 100 Atmospheric Pressure Grav
413. tory Confirm Save These changes require the device to Save Configuration to Flash and to perform a Cold Start amp Clear History Do you want to continue Click Yes to continue The system performs a Cold Start and Clear History and displays a dialog box when complete ROCLINK 800 Click OK to continue Click the Standard History tab The Standard History screen displays Select Archive Types and assign Archive Points if you are configuring more than the eight pre configured points Click Apply Select the Extended History tab The Extended History screen displays Assign Archive Types and Archive Points Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 16 Click Apply This completes the process of configuring history points 7 11 Opcode Table Use the Opcode table to group data being polled for more efficient communications You can assign parameters from different point types to the opcode table data points which can substantially reduce the number of polls from a host computer Note Use of the term opcode in this context does not refer to the operator identification codes in ROC protocols 1 Select Configure gt Opcode Table The Opcode Table Settings screen displays Opcode Table Settings Table No eae Version Mo 0 0 Data e a wGae fa foo fa eset IECH oom eae Cn ECH NEE OC EEN IESSE WEE a E cmoa ECH EECH RE OC a Lea j a IEN E ORG EE LEE OC AN
414. tory gt Comm Port gt Properties PC communication configurations ROC menu gt Security User List and Comm Port Security ROC menu gt Clock ROC menu gt Information system variables ROC menu gt Comm Ports FloBoss communication configurations Configure menu gt I O menu gt AI AO DI DO MVS DVS PIM and PI Meter menu gt Setup Configure menu gt Control menu gt PID Loop Configure menu gt Control menu gt FST Registers Configure menu gt History Points Utilities menu gt FST Editor View menu gt Display gt New or from File for custom PC displays ROC menu gt Flags for saving and system variables to Flash memory 4 1 2 Duplicating a Configuration You can duplicate the configuration for another FloBoss by using these menu functions in the following order 1 File gt Save Configuration to save a device s configuration to a specified file 2 ROC gt Direct Connect Local Port or Connect modem to connect physically to the second unit and then communicate 3 File gt Download loads the configuration into the unit File Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 After you have loaded configuration data into the second FloBoss Step 3 and changed it as needed you can save the configuration to its own disk file by using Step 1 4 1 3 Creating a New Configuration File The New Configuration File screen allows you to create a configuration
415. trator cccccceeee 5 17 5 19 Display Editor ceeeccsseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 18 5 20 Display Editor blank 5 20 5 21 Custom Display Obiechse 5 23 5 22 Object Management Tools 5 36 5 23 Expression Builder cccceceeeeeees 5 40 5 24 Properties E 5 41 5 25 Select Points to Monitor 00 5 42 520 VO MONOT aayan a cera 5 43 6 1 Collect Device Data 6 1 6 2 Collect Device Data 6 2 E ee EE 6 3 6 4 Device Memory cccccseceseeeeeeeseeeees 6 4 6 5 Device Information General tab 6 5 6 6 Device Information Points tab 6 6 6 7 Device Information Other Information tab Reder tS 6 7 6 8 Device Information Revision Info tab 6 8 6 9 CPU Information General tab 6 9 6 10 CPU Information Advanced tab 6 10 6 11 CPU Information I O tab 00 6 12 6 12 CPU Information Meter Points tab 6 13 6 13 CPU Information Diagnostic tab 6 13 SNE e 6 14 6 15 Flags General tab 6 15 6 16 Flags Advanced ab 6 18 7 1 Configure Menu 7 1 7 2 FloBoss 107 I O Module Racks 1 2 7 3 V O Interface Generaltab 7 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 4 VO Interface I O Setup tab 7 5 7 5 I O Interface I O Setup tab 7 5 7 6 Analog Input 1 1 ELCA General a DEE 7 8 7 8 Al Advanced tab cccceeeeeeceseeeeeeeees
416. ts Pass Through Mode allows data to be received by one unit Source and then passed through to other devices destinations connected on any other communications port Select the Source and the Destination For example the host communicates via a radio on the FloBoss COM2 port Other FloBoss units can then be connected via EIA 485 RS 485 on the COM1 port of the first FloBoss and then all the FloBoss can use the one radio to communicate to the host using the COM1 or COM2 option Note The group number of the FloBoss receiving the data must match the group number of the FloBoss units to which the data will be passed If the Group number does not match the data will be forwarded but not received Refer to ROC gt Information to view or change the Group number 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Click OK to close this screen Issued Jan 08 ROC Menu 6 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 6 20 ROC Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Chapter 7 The Configure Menu Use the Configure menu options to define points for inputs outputs control functions user programs Modbus the optional FB107 Touchpad and User C program data Line Com FB10 eee Meter Utili LO d Control k E History Points Opcode Table MODBUS H LED User List P User Data V Figure 7 1 Configure Menu In This Chapter 7 4 Configuring Input Output UO 7 2 7 1 1 I O Interface General Tab 7 3
417. tton Description Minimizes the size of the window and places it at the bottom of the screen m Maximizes the size of the window to fill the screen area Issued Jan 08 Window Menu 11 1 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Button Description Restores the original size of the window 11 2 Tile Select Window gt Tile to view all open ROCLINK 800 windows in a Tile view mam ROCLINK 800 fle gdt yew ROC Configure Meter Unites Jook Window Hep D GM Rete Ve Nhe AP FA ORS RI gw Device Directory LL OIX ll E On Line Ethernet FBi07 Gt Direct Conmect A On Line Etheret FB107 BR Device Root it Medie A COM Device yoma WO y COM Device amp Control ZS E GE B Meter hem ice Me System 3 New G e ME History ES User Progam Al User Display Function Sequence Table 1 Workspace E r Communications Monitor ok Si 3 i 4a de SS Se 00 40 28 0D 41 28 00 47 2E 00 48 2E 0D 49 2E 00 4A 2E 00 4B 38 e oo vc ZE 00 4D 2E O0 3C ZE 00 3B 2E 00 35 2E 00 34 ZE 00 33 2E op Ban ap 00 31 ap op 30 2E 00 2c D BA na 01 04 Oi 84 oe 17 28 00 53 pp np op on Se 00 54 00 pp pp op 28 ARGUMEN o Ion 30 00 00 ON on 2E 00 ap Dp 0O 20 op 2H 00 ap OO 0O pp 20 28 on 40 op op op op ae OU 41 00 0O op op 2E J0 47 00 Op OO D ZE op ap Bnp oo op OO Ze 00 45 00 00 00 G Ze op a 00 00 00 op Ze op An moo np 00 2E 00 Ac 02 09 00 pp 2E OD An on op 00 00 2E BO Ac op on Bn OO ze op ae on on nn ap 00 35 AA AS Ad 42 28 00 34 50 3P CA 46 2E
418. tton on the toolbar to set this sequence when you have finished defining all the objects on the custom display 5 6 3 Managing Custom Display Objects The left hand side of the Custom Display toolbar provides utilities you use to manage the objects placed on the custom display see Figure 5 File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help 0ER M MI zepg E aw TAR FR OOBE Figure 5 22 Object Management Tools 5 36 View Menu Issued Jan 08 New Display DI Open Display File Sl Save Display to i fa Test Align Lefts H Size to Widest O Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Creates a new custom display file Opens an existing custom display file Click this button to display an Open screen that shows all available DSP files in the default ROCKLINK 800 directory If you store DSP files elsewhere use this screen to navigate to that location and select a file Saves the current display Click this button to display a Save As screen that shows the DSP files in the default ROCKLINK 800 directory If you store DSP files elsewhere use this screen to navigate to that location and save the display file Closes edit mode for the custom display and shows the custom display as defined If any errors exist the system displays appropriate error messages Aligns selected objects to the left Click e to display a drop down menu that provides more specific align
419. ture Dependent Linear hwPf Pressure Extension Flow Rate per Day Archive Type Totalize Average Flow Dependent Linear Average Flow Dependent Linear Average Flow Dependent Linear Average Flow Average Flow Dependent Linear Accumulate Day Energy Rate per Day Accumulate Day Configure Menu Archive Point FLWNEW 1 MINTDY AGANEW 1 CUR DP AGANEW 1 CUR SP AGANEW 1 CUR TP FLWNEW1 IMV BMV FLWNEW1 HWPF FLWNEW 1 FLOWDY FLWNEW1 ENGDAY 7 15 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 History Point Definition Flowing Minutes Today Total Pulses Meter Input Static Pressure Meter Input Temperature IMV or BMV Uncorrected Pulses Point Type Meter Flow Values Meter Flow Values Meter Configuration Parameters Meter Configuration Parameters Meter Flow Values Meter Flow Values Instantaneous Flow Meter Flow Values Instantaneous Energy Meter Flow Values History Setup 12 E 14 Archive Type Totalize Totalize Avg Flow Dependant Linear Avg Flow Dependant Linear Avg Flow Dependant Linear Totalize Accumulater D ay Accumulate D ay Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Archive Faint FCW NEW 1 MINTO FLWNEW 1 PULACC AGANEW 1 CUR SP GANEW 1 CUR TP LANEW 1 IMB M FLWNEW 1 UCCTD Y FLW EW 1 FLOW D r FLWNEW 1 ENGDAY Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 15
420. ty Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Build Date This read only field shows the date the firmware was built for the hardware currently installed in the FloBoss 107 Note Not associated with communications modules Boot Revision This read only field shows the version for the main startup boot firmware currently installed in the module Note Not associated with communications modules Boot Build Date This read only field shows the build date for the main startup boot firmware currently installed in the module Note Not associated with communications modules Integrity This read only field shows a message regarding the status of the hardware currently installed in the FB107 The user interface displays alarms that indicate the state of the hardware CPU I O modules CPU UO assembly MVS modules and communication modules Mousing over an alarm displays a short explanation of the alarm Refer to Section 1 6 1 FloBoss 107 User Interface Uninstall Click to remove the hardware definition currently installed in the active FB107 configuration The Installed Module field displays the type of module the FB107 is using for point configuration It does not require that the module is physically installed in the FB107 to display The FloBoss 107 remembers the type of installed module until you use this button to uninstall it Refer to Section 1 6 2 Actual versus eS Comm Port Clic
421. u have selected and you can customize the parameters in the object properties box Note Custom displays are not compatible between ROCLINK for Windows and ROCLINK 800 Configuration software Sections 5 6 1 and 5 6 2 discuss the process of creating a new custom display and adding and arranging objects on that display Creating a New Custom Display To create a new display 1 Select View gt Display gt New A blank Display Editor screen displays View Menu 5 19 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 File Edit View ROC Configure Meter Utilities Tools Window Help Ge RM Gt H d ojs ae E New Display button zo BS Al A bes Co RS Me A8 E CG Bai o x E 2 Ki Display Name Logical Point List Disabled Undefined Mone Point Type s Menu Location ree Location Update Mode Normal Figure 5 20 Display Editor blank Note You can also click the New Display button at the extreme left of the Display Editor toolbar to create a new display 2 Specify the properties for the new custom display Field Display Name 5 20 View Menu Description Names the display Although you can enter up to 120 characters for a screen name a maximum of 10 20 characters should be sufficient to uniquely name the screen Indicates whether the display is unique or one of several iterations Click e which appears when you click the field to display the values Valid values are Disabled screen is unique o
422. ue which in this example represents 50 of the instrument s range Note ROCLINK 800 provides the previous midpoint value as a default value Edit this default as necessary set Mid 1 Paint Static Acton As Found As Lett Deviation 4 Deviation Set ero 15 518 0 000 15 518 1 9397 2 Dead Weight T ester Value EM 0 Live Reading Kz oal Deviation 0 3538 S Set Mid 1 7 Cancel Y Done Figure 8 25 Set Midpoint I When you enter a value in the Dead Weight Tester Value field ROCLINK immediately begins comparing it once per second to the value in the Live Reading field obtained from the static pressure sensor and calculating the percentage deviation between the two values 14 Click Set Mid 1 when the live value stabilizes ROCLINK 800 adds the next line in the calibration log renames the screen and changes the label on the Set Mid 1 button to Set Mid 2 Issued Jan 08 Meter Menu 8 31 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Set Mid 2 KEN Paint Static 1 Set era 15 518 0 000 15 515 1 9397 z Dead weight T ester alue 50 0 Live Reading 52 61 5 Deviation KSE ZS Get Mid 2 A Cancel Y Done Figure 8 26 Set Midpoint I Note To define up to two more midpoints repeat steps 13 and 14 15 Click Done when you have sufficient calibration information The Meter Calibration screen displays Note Following a calibration you may re run a
423. um of 10080 Extended History log entries The maximum number of days depends on the Sample Interval Use the Daily History Size field to select the number of days to archive 35 or 60 Use the History Time Stamp field to determine whether history data logs at the beginning or the end of the period Issued Jan 08 Configure Menu 7 73 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 74 Field Description Sample Interval Sets how frequently the system samples for Extended History data The intervals are 1 2 3 4 5 10 12 15 20 30 and 60 in either minutes or seconds The default is every 10 minutes Note The more frequent the sample the fewer days of history are available If you sample every 60 minutes with 10080 maximum log entries you have 420 days But if you sample each second with 10080 maximum log entries you have 10080 seconds or 0 117 days Number of Entries This read only field shows how many Standard and Extended History points you have defined The value dynamically changes as you change the number of history points The maximum number of entries is 10080 Number of Days This read only field shows the number of days of Standard and Extended History the system can maintain based on your current settings Daily History Size Sets the number of days Standard History can hold up to 100 points of user selectable data Valid values are 35 or 60 days the default is 35 days History Time Stamp Sets whether the system logs
424. uname newsubmenuname as in N Meter Calibration Coriolis Cal Note Use a comma to hide replace or rename multiple features as in N Meter Calibration Coriolis Cal N Meter Calibration Central Cal Sets when the system updates data on this screen Valid values are Normal system does not update the screen content or AutoScan system updates the screen content based on the interval you specify in the Auto Scan Update Interval field on the Options screen Tools gt Options The default value is Normal Note If you include dynamic content on your custom display you may want the system to refresh that content for the most current values 3 Add display content to the custom display You can either drag an object from the toolbar and place it on the custom display or place the cursor on the display where you want the object right click and select from the pop up menu Refer to Section 5 6 2 Adding Custom Display Objects for a description of each object and its properties Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 21 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 5 22 Add as many objects to the screen as you need You can place objects anywhere on the Display Editor screen Use a frame with a label to logically group certain options such as option buttons or check boxes to ensure that others know the use context for the options bor each object you enter complete that object s Properties box Each object s Properties box has differe
425. unction correctly you must configure the historical database in the FloBoss so that the system can retrieve flow values from memory Refer to Configuring History Points in Chapter 7 5 2 2 Viewing EFM Reports To view the EFM report 1 Select View gt EFM Report An Open dialog box displays showing all files with an EFM file extension 2 Select an EFM file and click Open The View EFM Report screen displays Issued Jan 08 View Menu 5 3 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 View EFM Report Report Data File OAProagram Files ROCLINESGUO FBR1O etm Station Address Al Gz Station Marne FEI O Eeport sections Meter Run Pa Characteristic Contiquration Data w Hourly Volume Data Start Date End Date Daily Volume Data vw Alarm Data 3042007 w 3 09 2007 e STEEN Print Preview A Cancel Figure 5 4 View EFM Report Field Description File Displays the name of the EFM Report you have open Information about the FloBoss displays in the Station Address and Station Name fields Meter Run Select the Meter Run from drop down list box to select the Meter Run on which you desire to report Start Date End Date Enter the Start Date Enter the End Date These are the dates for the period of the report you desire to cover Note Click e to view a calendar and select report dates Report Sections Select the Report Sections for the data to include in the EFM Report 3 Complete the fields identifying t
426. unning on a PC Personal Computer A discrete signal from a device that is input to a discrete input in the DL8000 The DL8000 uses this signal to allow a product delivery to be initiated or allow a product delivery to continue Permissive contacts are CLOSED in the normal or safe state and OPEN in the abnormal or unsafe state Flowing pressure Pressure Differential Pressure Pulse Input Proportional Integral and Derivative control feedback action Periodic Timer Interrupt Programmable Logic Controller Software oriented term for an I O channel or some other function such as a flow calculation Points are defined by a collection of parameters The physical location of an I O point module slot and channel as installed in the ROC Defines the database point to be a specific type of point available to the system The point type determines the basic functions of a point Number value previously determined for a register Also A generic term that describes the functional instrument group to which the DL8000 belongs The term originated from mechanical and electrical preset counters The DL8000 provides much more versatility and capability compared to a simple mechanical or electrical preset counter Primary PID control loop A blended product measured by a primary blend stream meter A meter measuring the gasoline ethanol blend A set of standards that enables communication or file transfers between two computers Proto
427. up Setup Lab 7 72 7 51 AGA 3 History Setup Standard History tab EE 7 75 7 52 AGA 7 History Setup Standard History tab sah hea ees ala teas Gite nantes EEN 7 76 7 53 History Setup Extended History tab 7 79 7 54 Opcode Table Gettngs 7 81 7 55 Modbus Configuration cc0ce 7 83 7 56 Modbus Configuration General tab 7 84 7 57 Modbus Configuration Scale Values tab 7 7 58 Modbus Registers cccceeeeeeeeeee ees 7 91 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 7 59 Modbus History Table 00nnaannaannnann 7 94 7 60 Modbus Master Table 1 99 Fe CN ECD USER LIST EEN 7 105 7 62 LCD User List BIM 7 106 7 63 LCD User List Chart 7 108 8 1 Meter Menu 8 1 8 2 Meter Getup 8 2 8 3 Meter Setup General ab 8 4 8 4 Meter Setup Inputs tab Orifice Meter 8 7 8 5 Meter Setup Inputs tab Turbine Meter 8 7 8 6 Meter Setup Advanced tab Orifice Meter Ee 8 10 8 6 Meter Setup Fluid Properties tab 8 12 8 7 Meter Setup Advanced tab Turbine Meter eege 8 10 8 7 Meter Setup Sampler tab 8 15 8 8 Meter Setup Calibration Factors tab Orifice VE e E 8 16 8 9 Meter Setup Calibration Factors tab Turbine Meter AA 8 16 8 10 Meter Setup Alarms tab 8 18 8 11 Meter Calibration ee eeeeeee ee 8 20 8 12 Turbine Meter Verification 8 22 8 13 Verification Frozen Values 8 23 EE V G
428. ure Review the following fields Field Point Action Temperature Standard Reading Measured Pressure Reading Temperature Bias Pressure Offset Deviation Description Identifies the point differential pressure static pressure or temperature being adjusted Shows the activity being performed as well as various values As Found Shows the sensor s initial value As Left Shows the sensor s value after calibration Deviation Shows the difference between the As Found value and the As Left value Deviation Shows the difference between the As Found and As Left values as a percentage Sets the temperature as read from a calibrated temperature probe Note This field displays only for temperature points Sets the pressure as read from a calibrated pressure sensor Note This field displays only for static pressure This read only field shows the normal temperature or pressure as taken from the FB107 This read only field shows the difference between the live temperature reading and the entered standard temperature reading that ROCLINK 800 applies to the temperature value Note This field displays only for temperature points This read only field shows the difference between the live pressure reading and the measured pressure reading that ROCLINK 800 applies to the pressure value Note This field displays only for static pressure This read only field shows the difference between
429. value greater than the scan of the analog input Alarm Deadband Sets in engineering units an inactive zone above the Low Alarm limit and below the High Alarm limit The Alarm Deadband prevents the alarm from being set and cleared continuously when the input value is oscillating around the alarm limit This prevents the Alarm Log from being over filled with data RBX Alarming Sets the Spontaneous Report by Exception SRBX KEE Turns off RBX alarming This e the default EE Generates an RBX message to the host when the point enters an alarm condition Generates an RBX message to the host when the point leaves an alarm condition Generates an RBXmessage to the host when the point enters or leaves an alarm condition Disabled On Alarm Set On Alarm Clear On Alarm Set and Clear communications port Refer to Section 3 4 3 Comm Ports RBX Tab 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen Note After you configure a point and click Apply click Flash Memory Save Configuration on the ROC gt Flags screen to save I O configuration to permanent memory in case you must perform a cold Start 7 40 Configure Menu Issued Jan 08 7 7 Soft Points Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Softpoints are global data storage areas that any FloBoss application can use A softpoint may store the results of a specified calculation from an FST or an intermediate result of a specified v
430. value for the flow calculation Note If you select Enter the value should represent the gas at standard conditions and cannot be less that 0 07 Sets the dynamic viscosity of the flowing gas Units of measure are either lbm Ft Sec for English units or cP for metric units Sets the specific heat ratio of the gas defined as the specific heat of the gas at constant pressure divided by the specific heat of the gas at constant volume Accepted practice for natural gas applications is to use a value of 1 3 which was used to develop the expansion factor tables in the AGA 3 Report Part 3 If entered the value must be greater than zero Sets the source for determining gas quality readings Valid values are Constant readings are entered in the event log or Live readings come from a gas chromatograph or are periodically downloaded from a host and are not entered in the event log Logs automatic system adjustments to methane percentages Valid values are Enabled log adjustments or Disabled allow adjustments but do not log them 3 Click Apply if you change any parameters on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 8 1 5 Meter Setup Sampler Tab 8 1 5 Meter Setup Sampler Tab Use the Sampler tab to set up the discrete output DO to send a pulse output to another device such as an odorizer and to control a gas sampler for a meter run Note To use this option select the Enabled option in the Sample Control field 1
431. w meter registration to the observed gross volume actual flow meter throughput at operating conditions Meter factor Meter prover volume corrected to standard conditions Flow meter indicated volume corrected to std conditions A procedure used to determine the meter factor for a flow meter The K factor exact number of pulses per a volume unit that a flow meter generates is determined at the factory The K factor is used to derive a mathematical factor known as meter factor which is used to adjust results of the internal flow calculations the DL8000 performs Note The flow meter is not re calibrated determining the meter factor allows the operator to manually re calibrate the DL8000 so that the flow meter s nonadjustable calibration characteristic pulses per volume unit K factor are incorporated into the flow calculations A popular device communications protocol developed by Gould Modicon Micro Processor Unit Millimeter Million British Thermal Units Millisecond or 0 001 second Multi Variable Sensor A device that provides differential pressure static pressure and temperature inputs to a ROC for orifice flow calculations Millivolts or 0 001 volt Milliwatts or 0 001 watt National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturer s Association See http www nema org Off Hook modem communications signal Accomplished while the target device is not connected by a communications link For example
432. y be available Consult with your LBP 12 2 Help Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Appendix A Glossary A D ABS ADC Additive AGA AWG Al AO Analog Annubar AP API Area Arm ASCII Attribute Batch Blend Stream Issued Jan 08 Note This is a generalized glossary of terms Not all the terms may necessarily correspond to the particular device or software described in this manual For that reason the term ROC is used to identify all varieties of Remote Operations Controllers Analog to Digital signal conversion Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene Analog to Digital Converter Used to convert analog inputs Al to a format the flow computer can use A liquid that is injected into a primary liquid component in relatively small quantities usually less than four percent of the delivered volume total Additives are injected into the primary liquid component by an injector mechanism which places a known fixed volume of the additive into the primary liquid component stream for each injector pulse received from the DL8000 Preset American Gas Association A professional organization that oversees the AGA3 orifice AGA5 heating value AGA7 turbine AGA8 compressibility and AGA11 ultrasonic gas flow calculation standards See http www aga org American Wire Gauge Analog Input Analog Output Analog data is represented by a continuous variable such as an electrical current
433. y default settings may be altered from the stored data 6 10 3 Flags Advanced Tab Use the Advanced tab to perform actions that affect the CRC checking and the I O scanning Issued Jan 08 1 Select the Advanced tab The Flags Advanced screen displays ROC Menu 6 17 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 General CAC Check e Enabled Disabled Advanced LO Scanning e Enabled C Disabled Fass Through Mode Source Destination e Set ATS High for 30 secs LOI Part 8 Come Com 2 Update vw OK 7 Cancel i Apply Figure 6 16 Flags Advanced tab 2 Review the following fields Field CRC Check Description Activates Cyclical Redundancy Checking CRC on ROC protocol communications Valid values are Enabled or Disabled The default is Enabled Set RTS High for 30 Seconds ROC Menu Activates I O scanning for read only field shows the average time in seconds the PIDs FSTs and backplane scans have taken Note You can also enable or disable I O scanning on the I O point displays Sets the respective port Local Port COM2 or COMS3 for the Set RTS to High for 30 Sec option and click Apply to activate the RTS Request to Send signal The RTS signal turns on for 30 seconds Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Field Description Pass Through Mode Sets a communications option to send Pass Through messages By using any of the FloBoss communications por
434. you click on the device and opens a dialog box for the load Note You can move a string based license from the FB107 to a USB key only if the license is not registered to the specific FB107 Remove Click to remove the selected permanent file based license from the FB107 Note ROCLINK 800 grays out this button if you select a moveable USB key based license You can transfer a moveable license to a USB key but you cannot remove it If you need to restore a permanent license you can re install it from the PC file location where you stored it E SerialNumber Shows the serial number for the USB license key Close Click to close the Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key screen and display the FB107 graphic 9 2 3 Installing a License String based Note You must have previously obtained a 105 character string based license to successfully complete this process To install a string based license on the FB107 1 Select Utilities gt License Key Administrator gt Transfer Between Device and Key from the ROCLINK 800 menu bar The Transfer Licenses Between a Device and a Key screen displays 9 10 Utilities Menu Issued Jan 08 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 Transfer Licenses Between a DEVICE and a KEY Licenses on DEVICE Application Name Vendor Name _ App Code Version Quantity License Source Expiration Time Created Connect to KE Y Move to KEY Add License Remove Licenses on KEY i INO LICE
435. ys in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius based on global settings ROC gt Information Sets whether the input communicates with the MVS sensor Valid values are Enabled allow communications to the MVS sensor or Disabled the system does not update information from the sensor Note The field in this frame displays scanning status messages Additionally the system generates an alarm when you Disable scanning Sets the alarm conditions of the sensor or any alarms that are active for this point Valid values are Enabled display any active failed alarms such as point fail or sensor fail or Disabled do not display alarms Note When you enable sensor alarms the system displays any loss of communications to the sensors by displaying an RS 485 Communications Failure If you disable scanning an Off Scan Mode alarm displays These read only fields indicate any alarms that are active for this point If you enable alarming any active limit alarms Such as Low Alarm and Rate Alarm appear Even if you disable alarming the Point Fail hardware reports a malfunction alarm and Manual Scanning Disabled indicators can still appear 1 47 ROCLINK 800 User Manual FB107 3 Click Write if you change any parameters other than the MVS identifier or Tag on this screen 4 Proceed to Section 7 8 4 MVS Advanced Tab 7 8 4 Multi Variable Sensor Advanced Tab Use the MVS Advanced screen to configure how the FB107 r

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

RapidMatch Handbuch  Information Hiding on Open Format Documents using Permutations  Mikrotik RBSXT-5HPnD  Timex Global Shock User Guide  Techno Source 4010 User's Manual  Manuale Tecnico Segnaletica 2014 prima parte  Manuel Utilisateur  User Manual - SENA Home Page  Tacens Initio II 450W  Manual de Instruções  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file